IDI_SM_M

Image Diagnost International
MammoWorkstation
Service Manual

5338446-12-8EN
Revision 1
© 2012-2014 by General Electric Company
All Rights Reserved.
MammoWorkstation 5338446-12-8EN
Service Manual Revision 1
MammoWorkstation
Version 4.7.0
1 Copyright Information
All Licensed Software is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and by applicable
international treaties.
2 Trademark Information
- GE, the GE Monogram, and MammoWorkstation are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
General Electric Company.
- DICOM is a trademark or registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers
Association.
- Siemens, syngo, and MammoCAD are trademark or registered trademark of Siemens A.G.
- iCAD, PowerLook, and Second Look are registered trademarks of iCAD, Inc.
- StarOffice is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
- OpenOffice is a trademark or registered trademark of Apache Software Foundation.
- Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
- Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
- X-keys is a trademark or registered trademark of P.I. Engineering, Inc.
- Hologic is a trademark or registered trademark of Hologic, Inc.
- All other product names and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
3 Accuracy of Information
The screenshots in this publication may deviate from the software installed on your computer. All patient
data are fictitious.
2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 1: Safety
Language Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Definition of Warnings and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 2: Publication Presentation

Acronyms Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 3: Proprietary Considerations

Chapter 4: Product Presentation
Product History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 5: Renewal Part List

Chapter 6: Pre-Installation System Requirements
Chapter 7: Pre-Installation Checklist
Chapter 8: Installation
Job Card IST A01 - Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to
Monitors - HP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Job Card IST A86 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to
Monitors - DELL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Job Card IST A64 - Installation of Eizo 5MP Review Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Job Card IST A88 - Installation of Barco 5MP Review Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Job Card IST C03 - Installation of Windows XP Professional (64-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Job Card IST C43 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on DELL T5600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Job Card IST C04 - Installation of Windows XP Professional (32-bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Job Card IST C44 - Installation of Windows 7 (32-bit) on HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Job Card IST A36 - ATI Driver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Job Card IST A06 - Network Connection Setup on Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on Windows 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3
Table of Contents
Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Job Card IST A54 - Pre-installation License Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for Mammo Documentation Station. 229
Job Card IST A18 - Windows Theme Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Job Card IST A19 - Additional Language Files for Windows XP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 20 . . . . . 237
Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 24 . . . . . 251
Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Job Card IST C89 - Installation of Graphic Board Drivers for Eizo 5MP Review Monitors 273
Job Card IST C26 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows XP 277
Job Card IST C29 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows 7. . 285
Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb 293
Job Card IST A56 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and Med. 5MP2FH . . 303
Job Card IST C82 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and MXRT-5400 . . . . 307
Job Card IST A58 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and Med. 5MP2FH . . . . 311
Job Card IST C84 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and MXRT-5400. . . . . . 315
Job Card IST A27 - 3 MP Eizo Monitors Driver Installation and Display Settings Configuration
319
Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Baselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Job Card IST A74 - Recommendations for Eizo DIN Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Job Card IST A38 - MX300W Eizo Monitor Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4
Table of Contents
Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Job Card CFG C72 - Loading Sample Images from IDI Software DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization from Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation
(Remote Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client
(Remote Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Job Card CFG C25 - Configuration for Storage Commit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Job Card CFG A82 - Setting up Stand-alone MWS Including CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages Configuration on DVD/CD . . . . . . . . . 459
Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled Reporting Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Chapter 9: Advanced Configuration

Job Card CFG C42 - Advanced HL7 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Job Card CFG C75 - Patient Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Job Card CFG C27 - Prefetching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Job Card CFG C29 - Transfer Syntax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Job Card CFG C78 - Configuration for PACS Viewer License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Job Card CFG C81 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Job Card CFG C31- Patient List Importer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
5
Table of Contents
Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Job Card CFG C48 - Selective PDF/HL7/XML Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Job Card CFG C50 - Quadrant Zoom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Job Card CFG C52 - Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Job Card CFG C56 - Configuration of the AW Server Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Job Card CFG C58 - ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Job Card CFG C62 - Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Job Card CFG C60 - Configuration of MRS Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Job Card CFG C64 - Configuration of the Merge CADstream Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Job Card CFG C80 - Configuration of FileDrop Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Job Card CFG C54 - Change Administrator Password for IDI Support Interface. . . . . . 623
Job Card CFG C66 - Configuration of the "Claim Worklist Item" Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis Mask Specific Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Job Card CFG C70 - Reporting Mask Specific Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Job Card CFG C76 - In-image Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Job Card CFG M74 - Additional Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Job Card CFG M71 - Hierarchical Menu for Predefined Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Job Card CFG C77 - Configuration of V-Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Job Card CFG C84 - Configuration of V-Preview labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Job Card CFG C83 - Hanging Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Job Card CFG C79 - The Clunie Dicom Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Chapter 10: Upgrade

Job Card UPG C01 - Check Customized Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Job Card UPG A03 - License Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Job Card UPG A05 - Software Upgrade to 4.7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Job Card UPG A13 - 8GB RAM Upgrade for Z800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Job Card UPG A11 - 32GB RAM Upgrade for Z800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Job Card UPG A14 - 12GB RAM Upgrade for Z600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Job Card UPG C12 - Windows Upgrade from 32 to 64-bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Job Card UPG C10 - Check Hologic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
6
Table of Contents
Chapter 11: Corrective Maintenance

Job Card DC A02 - Manual DICOM Files Importation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Job Card DC A08 - Local Database Rebuilding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Job Card DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Job Card TSG A02 - Solving Problems with Query-Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Job Card TSG A04 - Ultra VNC Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Job Card TSG C08 - External Adapter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Job Card TSG C09 - Captcha Dialog Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Job Card TSG A10 - Magnified Image Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Job Card TSG A12 - Register Images of Unknown Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Job Card TSG A18 - Eizo Monitors Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Job Card TSG C24 - Idle DICOM Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Job Card TSG M29 - Cache Search Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Job Card TSG A20 - How to Modify Annotation Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Job Card TSG M21 - OverlayObjects Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Job Card TSG A06 - X-keys 20 Keypad Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Job Card TSG A22 - X-keys 24 Keypad Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Job Card TSG A23 - Wrong Gray Palette Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Job Card TSG A25 - Troubleshooting System Lockup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Job Card TSG A26 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows 7 Configuration . . . . . . . 819
Job Card TSG A27 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows XP Configuration . . . . . . 825
Job Card TSG M30 - Worklist Error after Upgrade from 4.6.0 to 4.7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . 835
Job Card TSG C32 - Error Message of Missing Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Job Card TSG C33 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Chapter 12: Planned Maintenance

Job Card PM A02 - Cleaning / Checking Monitors and Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Job Card PM A04 - Luminance Measurement Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Job Card PM M05 - Backup or Restore of IDI Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Chapter 13: Uninstallation
7
Table of Contents
Job Card UIST A01 - IDI Applications Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
8
Safety
Chapter 1 Safety
Overview Chapter 1
This chapter includes information and warnings related to safety:
- Language Warnings on page 11

- Definition of Warnings and Notes on page 19
Note:
This Manual is primarily intended for GE Field Engineers or for Engineers trained by GE.
9 Chapter 1
Safety
This page is blank.
Chapter 1 10
Language Warnings
Language Warnings
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

(BG) • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език,
задължение на клиента е да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали
и разбрали упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до
нараняване на доставчика на услугата, оператора или
пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга
опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻
译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机
械伤害或其他形式的伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提
供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、
機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻
譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機
械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan
osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali
i razumjeli ovaj servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja
usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih
ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.
(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném
jazyce, je zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem
zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento
provozní návod a pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění
pracovníka prodejního servisu, obslužného personálu nebo
pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem
mechanických či jiných rizik.
11
Language Warnings
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk,
er det kundens ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne
servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade
på grund af elektrisk stød, mekanisk eller anden fare for
teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.
(NL) • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de
klant verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze
onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het
onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een patiënt gewond
kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.
(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than
English, it is the customer's responsibility to provide translation
services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service
manual has been consulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service
provider, operator or patient from electric shock, mechanical or
other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest
erinevas keeles, vastutab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva
teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja,
operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või
muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin
englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan käännöksen
hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja
ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla
huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai potilaan
vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
12
Language Warnings
ATTENTION Ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance est disponible

(FR) uniquement en anglais.
• Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une
langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce
manuel d'installation et de maintenance n'a pas été consulté et
compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le
technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures dues à des
dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist
es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu
sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese
Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen
des Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten
durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren
kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL) • Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε
γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να
παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό
αν δεν έχετε συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο
σέρβις.
• Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να
προκληθεί τραυματισμός στον τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον
ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a
vevő felelőssége a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a
karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató,
működtető vagy a beteg áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb
veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls
en ensku, er það skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa
tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók
hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á
þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu
eða öðrum áhættum.
13
Language Warnings
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua

(IT) inglese.
• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una
lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla
traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo
aver consultato il presente manuale ed averne compreso il
contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare
lesioni all'addetto alla manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti
provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri rischi.
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、
翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービス
を行わないでください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あ
るいは患者さんが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷
する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역
서비스를 제공하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를
수리하려고 시도하지 마십시오 .
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않形면 전기 쇼크 , 기계性 위험 , 또는
기타 위험形로 從해 서비스 제공자 , 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을
입힐 수 있습니다 .
BRDINJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā
valodā, klienta pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas
izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās
strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks
apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne
anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte
ar nesupratote šio eksploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus
ar paciento sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų
pavojų.
14
Language Warnings
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er
det kundens ansvar å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken
er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at
serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller pasienten skades på
grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku
(PL) angielskim.
• Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski,
zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z
niniejszym podręcznikiem serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do
obrażeń serwisanta, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia
prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível
(PT-BR) unicamente em inglês.
• Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste
manual, caberá ao cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e
compreendido este manual de assistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no
técnico, operador ou paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos,
mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em
(PT-PT) inglês.
• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este
manual noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer
os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e
compreendido este manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a
segurança do técnico, do operador ou do paciente devido a
choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.
(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă
decât cea engleză, este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o
traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi
înţelegerii acestui manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea
depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de
electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
15
Language Warnings
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию

(RU) представлено только на английском языке.
• Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо
руководство не на английском, а на каком-то другом языке,
клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования
обязательно обратитесь к данному руководству и поймите
изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может
привести к тому, что специалист по техобслуживанию,
оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током,
механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da
obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli
ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja
servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili meha-
ničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
(SK) • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako
angličtinu, poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je
zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod
na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie
poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta
elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un
idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la
traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado
y comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el
proveedor de servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones
provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra
naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än
engelska, ansvarar kunden för att tillhandahålla
översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och
förstår den här servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i
skador på serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av
elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
16
Language Warnings
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku,
mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti
prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega
udara, mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik
storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DIKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka
lisandan talep ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale
etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer
tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör veya hastanın
yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
17
Language Warnings
This page is blank.
18
Definition of Warnings and Notes
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
! Notice:
Used for instructions to the user to prevent damage to property.
Note:
Used to draw attention to information that is important for the user to know.
19
This page is blank.
20
Publication Presentation
Chapter 2 Publication Presentation
1 Overview
This chapter includes:
- Context on page 21
- Acronyms Glossary on page 23
- General Conventions on page 25
- Revision History on page 27
2 Context
This Service Publication provides all information required to understand, to plan installation, to install and
to maintain the IDI products, as well as the recommended hardware.
Note:
The hardware units mentioned in this section are third-party products (unless otherwise stated),
which are recommended to be used with the GEHC products.
• The descriptive chapters describe the MammoWorkstation components and networking environment.
• The procedural chapters describe procedures required in specific service contexts: pre-installation,
installation, configuration and maintenance.
Procedural instructions are given in two types of documents: Scenarios and Job Cards.
1. Scenarios
A scenario is a high-level description of the steps required to carry out a defined service action,
such that the context, sequencing, initial and final state are known.
2. Job Cards
Job Cards are used to describe specified independent tasks that can be performed in different
contexts.
Job Cards and Scenarios Categories
Code Definition Scope
PRE Pre-installation Includes room preparation, electrical cabling, etc.
IST Installation First installation on customer site. Physical and software

installation except IDI software configuration.
CFG Configuration First installation on customer site. IDI software configuration.
DC Data Correction Manual modification of data.
TSG Troubleshooting General guidance for diagnostic and repair in a certain context.
PM Planned Maintenance Specifies planned maintenance procedures and their frequency.
UIST Uninstallation Describes on-site uninstallation procedures.
21 Chapter 2
Publication Presentation
Code Definition Scope
UPG Upgrade Describes update procedures.
Chapter 2 22
Acronyms Glossary
Acronyms Glossary
AET Application Entity Title

AWS Acquisition Workstation
CC Cranio-Caudal
CDL Common Documentation Library
CESM Contrast Enhanced Spectral Mammography
CFG Configuration
CR Computed Radiology
CSe Collaboration Server
CT Computed Tomography
DBT Digital Breast Tomosynthesis
DC Data correction
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DICOM Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine
DNS Domain Name System
DSh DICOM Shuttle
DX Digital Radiography
FE Field Engineer
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
GEHC GE Healthcare
GUI Graphical User Interface
IDI Image Diagnost International
IP Internet Protocol
IST Installation
MDS Mammo Documentation Station
MG Mammography
ML Medio-lateral
MLO Medio-lateral Oblique
MQSA Mammography Quality Standards Act
MR MRI system
23
Acronyms Glossary
MWS MammoWorkstation
OLC OnLine Center
OS Operating System
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication System
PM Planned Maintenance
Q/R Query / Retrieve
RIS Radiology Information System (Modality Worklist server)
SCP Service Class Provider
SIP Service Information and Procedures
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TSG Troubleshooting
UIST Uninstallation
UPG Upgrade
US Ultrasound
V-Preview Volume Preview
VPN Virtual Private Network
24
General Conventions
General Conventions
1 Typographical Conventions
• In text describing the User Interface, italic and bold characters are used to differentiate between body
text and on-screen or hardware captions and labels, etc:
- Italics are used for references to hardware items and text which appears on-screen (for example,
menu titles, on-screen messages, and so on).
- If the operation includes pressing a button on screen, its name is shown between square
brackets.
- If the operation includes configuration entries in configuration files, the text will be displayed in the
font Courier New.
• In other text:
- Italics are used when a specific concept is introduced.
- Italic and bold characters may also be used for local emphasis.
- In electronic version of the document, cross-references appear in blue italics.
2 Basic IDI Conventions

1. Starting with software version 4.6.1, the environment variable %IDI_Home% is introduced.
- This environmental variable points to the MammoWorkstation installation directory:
a. C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost
b. C:\Program Files\ImageDiagnost
- The environmental variable can be entered directly into the Windows Explorer and will
automatically direct to the installation directory.
2. For editing configuration files, the Support Interface should be used.
! Notice:
To avoid errors, do not use the Notepad for editing configuration files.
25
General Conventions
This page is blank.
26
Revision History
Revision History
Reference Date Main reason for change
5338446-1-8EN 2009.04 Initial release for software versions 4.2.0 and 4.3.0.
Rev 1
5338446-3-8EN 2009.10 Release for software version 4.5.2.

Rev 1
5338446-4-8EN 2010.02 Release due to hardware obsolescence and JC IST20

Rev 1 update.

Rev 1

Rev 1

Rev 1

Rev 1
5338446-9-8EN 2012.10 Updated release for software version 4.6.0.

Rev 1 CE label change and company designation.
5338446-10-8EN 2012.10 Updated release for software version 4.7.0.

Rev 1 CE label change and company designation.
5338446-11-8EN 2013.09 Update for v.4.7.0. maintenance release 02.

Rev 1
5338446-12-8EN 2014.03 Update for v.4.7.0 with V-Preview license option.

Rev 1
27
Revision History
This page is blank.
28
Proprietary Considerations
Chapter 3 Proprietary Considerations

This chapter contains information relating to the proprietary aspects of installation and service of
MammoWorkstation products.
• The level of service tools and support available to a service engineer working on the system at any
time depends upon:
- Equipment Life Cycle on page 30 (first installation, in warranty, out of warranty).
- Categories of Service Engineer on page 30 (GE-exclusive, peer license and third-party
engineers).
- Access to proprietary Service Tools on page 30. This is restricted to GEHC personnel and to
service organizations which have entered contracts with GEHC.
- Service Publications on page 31. This sections explains the different types of Service Manuals.
• Outside of warranty, the customer can establish a service contract directly with GEHC, or with a non-
GEHC service organization. Non-GEHC service organizations can have Peer license or Exclusive
contracts with GEHC.
• The diagram below summarizes the types of service available. Refer to the sections which follow for
more information.
29 Chapter 3
1 Equipment Life Cycle

1-1 First Installation
• Pre-installation and first Installation work must be performed by GE Exclusive personnel (employed
by GEMS or a recognized distributor).
First installation means:
- Installation on customers site of a complete system shipped from the factory, including
connection of options.
- Upgrade of options on the customer site.
• Class M tools and documents are applicable; installation must follow the recommendations of the
Steering Guide given in the Service Manual Class M ("red"). An abridged version (omitting GE–
proprietary actions) is given in the Service Manual Class A.
1-2 Maintenance during the Warranty Period

During the warranty period:
- Maintenance is free to the customer.
- Maintenance must be performed by GE Exclusive personnel (employed by GEHC or a
recognized distributor), and not by a third-party organization.
- All Class M material is available.
1-3 Moving and Reinstalling a System

There are two possible scenarios for moving an installed system:
Move from one room to Can be performed by a Third Party service engineer.
another within the same Customer and network identifications are unchanged.
hospital: Customer rights are unchanged.
Move from one hospital to Customer and network identification must be changed.
another within the same If performed by a GE Exclusive service engineer all customer features/rights
group: can be retained.
If performed by a Third Party service engineer some features/rights will be lost.
2 Categories of Service Engineer

Three categories of service engineer can be involved in service operations:
- GE Exclusive: Engineers and technicians employed directly by GE or by recognized distributors
(organizations having exclusive agreements with GE). They have access to all proprietary
informations and tools, including OLC access.
- Peer license: Engineers and technicians employed by organizations which have limited agreement
with GE. For example, hospitals who wish to perform their own maintenance can enter Peer license
agreements with GE.
- Third party: Engineers and technicians employed by organizations which have no licensing
agreement with GE. These can include service organizations which are in competition with GE.
3 Service Tools
Access to OLC through VNC is protected by a password. This password is also required to configure
VNC at installation.
Chapter 3 30
4 Service Publications
4-1 Service Manual (SM) Class A
• The SM Class A is a “white” document. It contains only non-proprietary information. It is intended for
use by any service engineer involved in servicing the equipment, including third party employees
employed by service organizations in competition with GE.
• Class A information includes all necessary information (descriptive and procedural) for pre-
installation work, installation, and maintenance of MammoWorkstation products.
• Class A Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix A.
4-2 Service Manual (SM) Class C

• The SM Class C is a “yellow” document. It intended for use only by service engineers operating
under a Peer license, such as employees of a hospital having signed an agreement with GE.
• In addition to all Class A information, the SM Class C includes advanced information covering the
theory of operation and troubleshooting.
• Class C Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix C.
4-3 Service Manual (SM) Class M

• The SM Class M is a “red” document, containing GE-proprietary information. It is intended for use
only by service engineers with GE Exclusive rights, employed directly by GE or by organizations
having an exclusive agreement with GE.
• in addition to all Class A and Class C information, the SM Class M includes procedures for
connection to OLC.
• Class M Job Card numbers are identified with the prefix M.
31 Chapter 3
This page is blank.
Chapter 3 32
Product Presentation
Chapter 4 Product Presentation

This chapter provides an overview of the MammoWorkstation applications that are part of the
MammoWorkstation Software installer:
- Introduction on page 33.

- Physical Description on page 35.
- Functional Description on page 37.
- Product History on page 41.
Note:
The applications have different hardware requirements. Each application needs a separate
license.
1 Introduction
IDI has developed a set of software solutions focused on improving the efficiency of the mammography
diagnostics capabilities in a digital network.
Images DICOM Worklist
SIS
SIS
Server
Server
PACS
RIS
RIS Prefetch
Server priors
Server DICOM Worklist
(plus prior reports)
DICOM structured
report to PACS
Export to RIS
via HL7
PDF report Image Diagnost Solutions

July 2008
1-1 Image Review (MammoWorkstation)

• high speed reading
• image auto-alignment
• structured, in image reporting
• workflow for single and double reading
• image control with a keypad
33 Chapter 4
• contrast enhancement with the backlight option

• lesion identification in different views.
1-2 Workflow Management

• routing of images between equipment or imaging centers
• JPEG 2000 image compression for fast transmission
• single worklist input to acquisition from multiple worklist providers
• auto-fetching of priors
• single reading
• blind double-reading.
Chapter 4 34
2 Physical Description
2-1 Components Description
MWS MWS MWS

(MammoWorkstation) Control Monitor Review Monitors
MWS
Tower PC
Keyboard Mouse Keypad
MDS
(Mammo Documentation
Station)
CSe
(Collaboration Server)
DSh
(DICOM Shuttle)
35 Chapter 4
Note:
For corresponding Hardware configuration, see Product History on page 41.
2-1-1 MammoWorkstation
MammoWorkstation is designed for diagnostic reading of mammograms.
The base software license is typically used in combination with a RIS client for reporting and does not
contain report creation.
In the base software license DICOM worklist provided by a RIS is available. The base software license
does not contain workflow management with user specific worklists provided by Collaboration Server.
2-1-1-1 Reporting Module (option)

The reporting module provides an integrated report creation mask for Mammography. It can be used to
document the report and access prior reports. The reports can be exported to an information system
using document formats such as DICOM-SR, XML, HL7, DICOM encapsulated PDF or PDF.
2-1-1-2 Workflow Module (option)

The workflow module provides support for Collaboration Server based workflow management including
double reading workflows and user specific worklists. If MammoWorkstation is used stand-alone, the
Collaboration Server functionality is built-in on the same PC. If multiple Mammo Workstations are used,
the Collaboration Server resides on a separate PC.
2-1-1-3 Backlight Module (option)

The backlight module provides image post-processing capabilities. It requires the "For Processing" raw
data from the mammography modality.
2-1-2 Mammo Documentation Station

The Mammo Documentation Station is the MammoWorkstation software running in an environment not
approved for diagnostic reading. The technologist can use Mammo Documentation Station to access
patient data simultaneously to the examination. Mammo Documentation Station is installed close to the
mammography system. Mammo Documentation Station provides access to finding annotations and
reports created by the radiologist. In addition, the technologist can enter clinical patient information
obtained during the exam. This information is available to the radiologist when reading the case.
2-1-3 DICOM Shuttle

The DICOM Shuttle provides routing services to distribute DICOM documents across devices and
locations.
Its WorklistBroker module consolidates worklists from different sources and presents them as one single
Worklist to one or more mammography modalities.
In addition to DICOM Shuttle node, some additional DICOM Shuttle systems can be installed to connect
to multiple devices that are in remote locations.
2-1-4 Collaboration Server

The Collaboration Server connects with RIS using DICOM worklists and manages the workflow for
Mammo Workstations. It provides workflow schemes for single reading and blind double reading.
Chapter 4 36
It is proposed as an additional hardware in case there are multiple workstations on site.
3 Functional Description
3-1 Stand-alone MammoWorkstation Configuration
Illustration 1 Stand-alone MammoWorkstation
1. The mammography station retrieves the worklist from the RIS.

2. The mammography is taken.
3. The image is sent to the MammoWorkstation and to the PACS archive.
Modality configuration: Must send images to MammoWorkstation, requires AE Title, Port and IP of
MammoWorkstation.
4. The radiologist selects the worklist source. The MammoWorkstation retrieves the worklist from the
RIS - the corresponding image is already available.
5. Refer to Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server on page 429 for further details.
6. The radiologist reads a case from the worklist and enters a report. MammoWorkstation stores this
report as DICOM structured report document and prepares sending it to the archive associated to the
worklist.
7. The images can be printed on a DICOM printer. The PDF created from a report can be printed on any
ordinary paper printer.
8. Refer to Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration on page 453 for further information.
9. The report is sent to the PACS archive.
37 Chapter 4
3-2 Workflow Examples

Illustration 2 RIS-driven workflow
Illustration 3 RIS-driven workflow with DICOM Shuttle
Note:
The images are automatically pushed to the right PACS.
Chapter 4 38
Illustration 4 IDI-driven workflow (with Collaboration Server)
Note:
- Collaboration Server enables advanced Mammo Workflow (multiple reading, rule based
worklists, user specific worklists).
- Structured report: homogenous vocabulary + accurate lesion localization.
Note:
Every hardware equipment shall be in compliance with IEC/EN 60950-1: Information technology
equipment - Safety.
39 Chapter 4
This page is blank.
Chapter 4 40
Product History
Product History Chapter 4
1 Releases
Note:
The hardware units mentioned in this section are third-party products (unless otherwise stated),
which are recommended to be used with the GEHC products.
Table 1: Software release versions 4.3.0 - 4.5.2

Context First release as GEHC product New release
Context First release as GEHC product New release
Introduction date Nov. 2008 October 2009
Software version 4.3.0 4.5.2
Release letter IDIintro2 IDIintro3bis
Hardware components MWS:
MWS tower PC HP xw8600 HP xw8600
MWS control monitors Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor
MWS review monitors Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors or Barco Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors or Barco
5MP Coronis Mammo B&W monitors 5MP Coronis Mammo B&W monitors
MWS keypad X-keys XD-293-R X-keys XD-293-R
MWS keyboard Standard USB keyboard Standard USB keyboard
Hardware components MDS:
MDS tower PC HP DC7800 / HP DC7900 HP DC7900
MDS monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor
or Eizo 29.8" MX300W color monitor or Eizo 29.8" MX300W color monitor
Hardware components CSe and DSh:
CSe tower PC HP xw6600* HP xw6600*
DSh node tower PC HP xw6600* HP xw6600*
DSh satellite tower PC HP DC7800 / HP DC7900* HP DC7900*
41
Product History
Note:
* + monitor and keyboard during installation and service.

Context Hardware New software New software release
obsolescence release
Introduction date March 2010 July 2010 November 2010
Software version 4.5.2 - US 4.5.3 4.6.0
MWS tower PC HP Z800 HP Z800
MWS review monitors Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors or Barco Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors or Barco
5MP Coronis Mammo B&W monitors 5MP Coronis Mammo B&W monitors
MDS tower PC HP DC7900 HP DC7900
MDS control monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor
or Eizo 21.2" RX320 color monitor or Eizo 21.2" RX320 color monitor
CSe tower PC HP Z600* HP Z600*
DSh node tower PC HP Z600* HP Z600*
DSh satellite tower PC HP DC7900* HP DC7900*
42
Product History

Context New software release New software release
Introduction date January 2012 October 2012

October 2013 (maintenance release 02)
March 2014 (V-Preview extended
functionality)
Software version 4.6.1 4.7.0
MWS tower PC HP Z800 HP Z800 / DELL T5600
MWS review monitors Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors Barco 5MP NIO B&W monitors
or Barco 5MP Coronis Mammo B&W or Barco 5MP Coronis Mammo B&W
monitors monitors
or Eizo 5MP SMD 21511 B&W monitors or Eizo 5MP SMD 21511 B&W monitors
or Eizo 5MP LCD GX540 monitors
MWS keypad X-keys XD-293-R X-keys XD-293-R or

or X-keys XK-24 X-keys XK-24 or
IDI Keypad Second Edition
MDS tower PC HP DC7900 HP Z600 / DELL T5600
MDS control monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor Eizo 19" MX191 color monitor
or Eizo 21.2" RX320 color monitor or Eizo 21.2" RX320 color monitor
MWS keypad X-keys XD-293-R X-keys XD-293-R or

or X-keys XK-24 X-keys XK-24 or
IDI Keypad Second Edition
CSe tower PC HP Z600* HP Z600 / DELL T5600*
DSh node tower PC HP Z600* HP Z600 / DELL T5600*
Hardware Components of Workstation Base Units:
Content of the HP Z800 Workstation Base Unit:

• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.8GT/s QPI, DDR3 800 1st CPU
• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.8GT/s QPI, DDR3 800 2nd CPU
43
Product History
• HP 8GB(8X1GB)DDR3-1333 ECC RAM

OR
HP 8GB(4X2GB)DDR3-1333 ECC RAM
• ATI FirePro V5800 512MB PCIe Graphics
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 1st HDD
• HP 500GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 2nd HDD
• HP 500GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 3rd HDD
• HP USB Standard Keyboard
• HP USB Optical Scroll Mouse
• No Floppy Disk Kit
• HP 16X DVD+-RW SuperMulti SATA Drive 1st Drive
• Air Cooling Solution
• HP Z800 Localization Kit GER
• HP 2x Standard Heatsink Thermal Kit
•
Content of the DELL T5600 Workstation Base Unit:
• Intel Xeon Processor E5-2620 Six Core, 2.00 GHz Turbo, 15MB cache, 7.2GT/s 1st CPU
• Intel Xeon Processor E5-2620 Six Core, 2.00 GHz Turbo, 15MB cache, 7.2GT/s 2nd CPU
• 32GB(8x4GB) 1600MHz DDR3 ECC RDIMM
• AMD FirePro W5000 2GB Graphics
• 500GB SATA 7200 rpm 2.5" HDD 1st HDD
• 1TB SATA 7200 rpm 3.5" HDD 2nd HDD
• 1TB SATA 7200 rpm 3.5" HDD 3rd HDD
• DELL USB Keyboard
• DELL Laser Scroll USB Mouse
• 8X Slimline DVD+-RW
44
Product History
2 Languages available in MammoWorkstation v. 4.7.0:
Localized User Interface and Localized Operator Manuals

Operator Manuals (English User Interface)
DE German BG Bulgarian
EN English HR Croatian
ES Spanish ID Indonesian
FI Finnish LT Lithuanian
FR French LV Latvian
IT Italian RO Romanian
JA * Japanese SK Slovakian
KO * Korean SR Serbian
NL Dutch ET Estonian
NO Norwegian DA Danish
PL * Polish
PT Portuguese
SV Swedish
RU * Russian
CS * Czech
HU * Hungarian
EL * Greece
TR * Turkish
ZH-CN * Chinese
Note:
* Reporting Module is not available for these languages.
45
Product History
This page is blank.
46
Renewal Part List
Chapter 5 Renewal Part List
The following part lists give the references of orderable parts (FRU):
4
10
11
5
7
1
# PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY APPLIES TO
5327866-15 MammoWorkstation Software v. 4.7.0 1 All systems
1. Workstations
5314872-3 IDI MammoWorkstation HP Z800 1 Z800
5314873-3 HP Z600 1 Z600
5314874-2 HP DC7900 1 DC7900
5488778-1 IDI MammoWorkstation DELL T5600 XL 1 Z800, Z600,

T5600XL
47 Chapter 5
Renewal Part List
2. Control Monitors
5318540 Eizo MX191 1MP LCD color monitor 19" 1 All systems
5350390 Eizo RX320 3MP monitor 1 All systems
5323044 Eizo MX300W 4MP LCD monitor 29.8" 1 All systems
3. Review Monitors This page is blank.
5450693 Barco Nio 5MP LCD review monitors (x2) 1 All systems with
Barco Nio monitors
5437423 Barco Mammo Coronis 5MP LCD review 1 All systems with
monitors (x2) Barco Coronis
monitors
5432871 Eizo 5 MP LCD SMD 21511 monitors - 1 All systems with Eizo
ClearBase (x2) 21511 CB monitors
5343107 Eizo 5 MP LCD SMD 21511 monitors - 1 All systems with Eizo
BlueBase (x2) 21511 BB monitors
5432871-2 Eizo 5 MP LCD GX540 monitor bundle (x2) 1 all systems with
V5800, W5000 or
later introduced
graphic board
4. Mouse and Keyboards
5183547-14 Black 3-button EMC Enhanced USB 1 All systems

Optical mouse
Chapter 5 48
Renewal Part List
5183547-4 Standard Black/Silver US English USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-5 Standard Black/Silver French USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-6 Standard Black/Silver Italian USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-7 Standard Black/Silver Spanish USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-8 Standard Black/Silver German USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-9 Standard Black/Silver Portuguese USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-10 Standard Black/Silver Swedish USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-46 Standard Black/Silver Danish USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-47 Standard Black/Silver Dutch USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-48 Standard Black/Silver Norvegian USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5183547-49 Standard Black/Silver Finnish USB 1 All systems

Keyboard
5. Keypads
5314876-2 IDI Keypad X-Keys 24 1 All systems
5314876 IDI Keypad X-Keys 20 1 All systems
5413145 IDI Keypad 2nd Edition (SA Adapted) 1 All systems
6. Graphic Cards
5318133 Graphics controller board ATI Med Fire GL 1 All systems with
V5600 existing ATI MED
V5600 graphic board
49 Chapter 5
Renewal Part List
5419481 ATI FirePro V5800 1GB Graphics 1 All systems with Eizo
Controller Board monitors
5495778 Graphics board AMD W5000 1 All systems with

5MP Eizo monitors.
Can only be
combined with
V5800, W5000, or
This page is blank.
later introduced
graphic boards
5458020 Graphics controller board Barco MXRT- 1 All systems with

5400 Barco monitors
Cables and Cable Adapters
7. 5268153 DVI Cable 1 All systems with

Barco monitors
8. 5269969 USB Cable 1 All systems
2385966 10 meters network cable 1 All systems
2285138 5 meters network cable 1 All systems
2237476 3 meters Ethernet cable (UTP, cat 5) 1 All systems
5388910 DMS-59 Male to Dual DVI Female 1 Fujitsu Siemens

Celsius R630 to
connect to Reporting
Screen; OR
HP XW8600 to
connect to Reporting
Screen
5183547-17 Dual DVI Y-Cable Adapter for NVidia 1 Fujitsu Siemens

NVS285 Celsius R630 to
connect to 19" LCD
monitor; OR
HP XW8600 to
connect to 19" LCD
monitor
Chapter 5 50
Renewal Part List
5183547-16 Dual VGA Y-Cable Adapter for NVidia 1 Fujitsu Siemens

NVS285 Celsius R630 to
connect to 19" LCD
monitor; OR
HP XW8600 to
connect to 19" LCD
9. 5394794-9 850 Watt Power Supply for HPZ800 1 HP Z800
10. 5268559 Power supply for Nio 5MP LCD monitor 1 Barco Nio monitors
5393899 Power supply for Coronis 5MP LCD 1 Barco Coronis

monitors monitors
RAM
5390746 8 GB DDR3-1333 ECC Memory 4 x 2GB HP Z800, HP Z600
5394794-11 Single 4GB FBD DDR3 Registered ECC 1 x 4GB HP Z800, HP Z600
DIMM
5394794-10 Single 2GB FBD DDR3 ECC DIMM 1 x 2GB HP Z800, HP Z600
5183547-36 Single 2GB FBD DDR2-667 Registered 1 x 2GB HP XW8600, HP

ECC DIMM XW8400
5500593 Single 4GB DDR3-1333 ECC RAM 1 x 4GB HP Z600
HDD
5183547-56 250 GB SATA 7200RPM HDD 1 HP Z800
5364293-23 500 GB SATA HDD 7.2K RPM 1 HP Z800
Other
5394794-12 Rear Chassis Fan Assembly for Z800 1 HP Z800
5183547-19 Rear Chassis/Memory Fan Assembly 1 HP XW8400
5394794-5 5.25” SATA DVDRW Multi Drive 1 HP Z800, Z600,

XW8600, XW8400
5183547-21 3.5” 1.44MB Floppy Diskette Drive 1 HP XW8400, HP

XW8600
5262743 Front filter 1 Barco monitors
51 Chapter 5
Renewal Part List
11. 5257196 LCD Luminance meter for Barco monitors 1 Barco Coronis
monitors
5237201 Advanced Serial Luminance meter LCD for 1 All Eizo monitors
Eizo monitors
2319223 Wellhofer Serial Spotmeter 1 All systems with

medical monitors
2110360 Gray card (light measurement) 1 All systems with

medical monitors
For instructions on how to replace FRU parts on the Workstations, please refer to the according Service
Manual:
• HP Z600: http://libraries.ge.com/download?fileid=477672882101&entity_id=40834005101&sid=101
• HP Z800:http://libraries.ge.com/download?fileid=477673185101&entity_id=40834005101&sid=101
• DELL T5600:http://libraries.ge.com/
download?fileid=477672543101&entity_id=40834005101&sid=101
Chapter 5 52
Pre-Installation System Requirements
Chapter 6 Pre-Installation System Requirements
1 Overview
This chapter includes:
- Responsibility of the Purchaser/ Customer on page 53

- Environmental Requirements/ Limitations on page 54
- IEC60601-1-2 Electromagnetic Standards Compliance on
page 55
- Structural Requirements on page 57
- Electrical Requirements on page 58
- Room Lighting on page 60
- Physical Characteristics on page 60
- Telephone Connection on page 63
- Broadband Connectivity for Remote Maintenance on page 63
- Network Configuration on page 63
- General Hardware Requirements on page 70
2 Responsibility of the Purchaser/ Customer
The customer is responsible for providing an appropriate desk, chair and electrical wall outlets.
The customer is responsible for locating the workstation in compliance with any local or national codes.
53 Chapter 6
3 Environmental Requirements/ Limitations

3-1 Room Climate and Altitude
The room environment where the workstation and all accessories are located must be maintained
(during workdays, holidays and weekends) as specified in the following table.
To ensure the user comfort while viewing images, the room temperature should be maintained between
65°F (18°C) and 75°F (24°C).
Table 1 Environmental Requirements / Limitations
Product/ Humidity (1) Temperature Altitude (4)

Component
In use (2) Storage (2) In use (3) Storage (3) In use Storage
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
HP Z800 10% 85% 10% 90% 5°C +35°C -40°C +60°C 0 ft 10,000ft 0 ft 30,000ft
workstation +40° +95°F -40°F +140°F 0m 3000m 0m 9100m
F
LCD monitors 8% 80% 5% 95% 15°C +35°C -20°C +60°C 0 ft 10,000ft 0 ft 15,500ft
+59° +95°F -4°F +140°F 0m 3000m 0m 5200m
F
Barco USB - - - - 16°C +30°C 0°C +40°C - - - -

luxmeter
HP Compaq 10% 90% 5% 95% 0°C +35°C -30°C +60°C 3048m 9144m
DC7900 +95°F +140°F
HP Z600 8% 85% 8% 90% 5°C +35°C -40°C +60°C 3000m 9100m

computer +40° +95°F -40°F +140°F
F
DELL T5600 Relative humidity (max): 20% to 10°C 35°C -40°C 65°C -50ft 10,000ft -50ft 35,000ft
workstation 80% (noncond.) +50° +95°F -40°F +159°F -15,2m 3048m -15,2m 10,668
F m
Notes:
(1) Non-condensing
(2) At 35C (95F) with a gradient < 30% Relative Humidity/hr
(3) At 20% Relative Humidity
(4) Relative to sea level
(5) 5°C writing optical, 0°C if not
3-2 Equipment Heat Output

Optimal operating conditions:
• A well ventilated or air-conditioned work area to avoid overheating:
• ENCLOSURE VENTILATION
If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through the
enclosure (front and back).
• ENCLOSURE MINIMUM CLEARANCE
- Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the
airflow required for proper ventilation.
Chapter 6 54
- Enclosure Door Area

- The intake and exhaust door areas should be at a minimum the same size as the system
intake and exhaust areas.
• RECOMMENDED ENCLOSURE
Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow
and impacts your computer performance, possibly causing it to overheat.
• OPEN DESK MINIMUM CLEARANCE
If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.)
clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper
ventilation.
• A dust free work area (as much as possible).
WARNING
The MammoWorkstation PCs have vents on their front and back panels for ventilation. When you
place a unit on a desktop, make sure that objects do not block the vents on either side of the unit.
Allow at least 76 mm (3 inches) of unobstructed space on either side of a system unit.
Table 2 Heat output for basic products
Components Part Number Heat Output
IDI MammoWorkstation HP Z800 5314872-3 850W or 1110 W
IDI MammoWorkstation DELL T5600 5488778-1 825W or 635W
HP DC7900 5314874-2 365 Watt
HP Z600 computer 5314873-3 650 W
HP Compaq DC7900 5314874-2 365 W
Eizo MX191 1MP LCD color monitor 19" 5318540 50 W
Eizo RX320 3MP monitor 5350390 110 W
Eizo MX300W 4MP LCD monitor 29.8" 5323044 170 W
Barco Mammo Coronis 5MP LCD review 5437423 100 W max

monitor
Barco Nio 5MP LCD review monitor 5450693 95 W typ
Eizo 5MP LCD SMD21511 monitors 5343107 or 5432871 85W
Eizo 5MP LCD GX540 monitors 5432871-2 108W
4 IEC60601-1-2 Electromagnetic Standards Compliance

For the electromagnetic standards compliance of a certain piece of hardware, please refer to its service
manual.
4-1 Use Limitation

External components:
55 Chapter 6
The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified can result in the
degraded Electromagnetic compatibility of the MammoWorkstation components.
4-2 Installation Requirements and Environmental Control

• In order to minimize interference risks, the following requirements apply.
4-2-1 Cable Shielding & Grounding

• All interconnecting cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of
cables not properly shielded and grounded can result in the equipment causing radio frequency
interference.
4-2-2 Separated Power Supply Distribution Panel & Line

• This product complies with the radiated emission limits of the CISPR11 Group1 Class A standard.
• The MammoWorkstation components are primarily intended for use in non-domestic environments,
and not connected directly to the public mains supply network.
They are primarily intended for use in environments (such as hospitals) with a dedicated supply
system.
• To avoid interference in the event that the MammoWorkstation components are used in a domestic
environment (in a doctors office, for example), it is recommended that it must be connected to a
separate AC power distribution panel and line.
4-2-3 Subsystem & Accessories Power Supply Distribution

• All components, accessories, subsystems, and systems which are electrically connected to the
MammoWorkstation components must have AC power supplied by the same power distribution
panel and line.
Note:
In order to avoid interference, all components and accessories connected to the
MammoWorkstation components must be connected to the same AC power distribution panel.
This AC power distribution panel which is itself supplied by a single power line.
4-2-4 Stacked Components & Equipment

• The MammoWorkstation components must not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the workstations must be monitored to ensure that normal
operation occurs in the configuration in which it is used.
4-2-5 Static Magnetic Field Limits (Permanent Magnet)

• In order to avoid interference, static field (from an MR system for example) in the surrounding
environment should not exceed 3 Gauss.
4-2-6 Electrostatic Discharge Environment & Recommendations

• In order to reduce electrostatic discharge interference, a charge dissipative floor must be installed to
prevent charge accumulation.
• The dissipative floor material must be connected to the system reference ground, if applicable.
• Relative humidity must be maintained above 30 percent.
Chapter 6 56
5 Structural Requirements
5-1 Minimum Door Size Requirements
• Access through a door opening at least 0.6 m (25 inches) wide and at least normal height of 2 m
(78.75 inches) is required.
5-2 Ceiling Requirements

• Not applicable.
5-3 Floor Requirements

• Not applicable.
5-4 Wall Requirements

• Not applicable.
5-5 Seismic Requirements

• Not applicable.
5-6 Desk or Table Size

A large desk or table (150 x 80 cm) must be provided by the customer for the system and the optional
peripherals.
The computer box may be placed on the floor, but the use of a trolley is recommended to keep the PC
from dust and water:
Illustration 1 Example of a PC Trolley
57 Chapter 6
6 Electrical Requirements
6-1 Certified Electrical Contractor Statement
! Notice:
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared
for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors.
The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical
servicing on the equipment. That is GE Field Engineers, personnel of third-party service
companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians.
6-2 Line Voltage Specifications

Table 3 Line Requirements
Components Voltage Frequency
Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max

Vac Vac Vac Hz Hz Hz
HP Z800 computer 100 90 269 50/60 47 66

240
DELL T5600 computer 100 100 240 47 63

240
HP Z600 computer 100 90 269

240
HP Compaq DC7900 100 90 264 50/60 47 63

240
Eizo MX191 1MP LCD 100-120V 50/60

color monitor 19" 200-240V
Eizo MX300W 4MP LCD 100-120V 50/60

color monitor 29.8" 200-240V
Eizo RX320 3MP monitor 100-120V 50/60

200-240V
Barco Mammo Coronis 90 ~ 264 VAC for supplied 45/65 45 65

5MP LCD review monitor
Barco Nio 100 ~ 240 VAC for supplied 50/60 47 63

5MP LCD review monitor
Eizo 5MP LCD SMD21511 100...240V AC, +/- 10%

monitors
Eizo 5MP LCD GX540 100 - 120V 50/60

monitors
6-3 Line Frequency Specifications

• 50 Hz or 60 Hz nominal with a frequency range of 47 to 66 Hz for the Basic product.
Chapter 6 58
6-4 kVA Load Characteristics

• Not applicable.
6-5 Input Impedance

• Not applicable.
6-6 Fuse/circuit-breaker Specifications

• If electrical wall outlets are protected from the building distribution network by fused circuit breakers,
no additional protective part is required.
6-7 Electrical Outlets and Ethernet Plugs

Table 4 Number of electrical outlets and Ethernet plugs required
Number of electrical outlets Number of Ethernet plug
MWS 6+1 1 for the workstation 2 1 for the workstation

4 for the monitors 1 for the FSE laptop
1 for the FSE laptop
IDI Keypad 2nd Edition (optional)
CSe 3 1 for the workstation 2 1 for the workstation

1 for additional monitor during maintenance* 1 for the FSE laptop*
1 for the FSE laptop*
DSh 3 1 for the workstation 2 1 for the workstation

1 for additional monitor during maintenance* 1 for the FSE laptop*
1 for the FSE laptop*
MDS 3+1 1 for the workstation 2 1 for the workstation

(monitor) 1 for the monitors 1 for the FSE laptop
1 for the FSE laptop
IDI Keypad 2nd Edition (optional)
*If MWS, CSe and DSh are not installed in the same room.
! Notice:
It is highly recommended to connect Collaboration Server and DICOM Shuttle workstations on the
Hospital Uninterrupted Power Line.
Table 5 Additional power cords available
P/N Component
46-307608P1 Power Cord -- continental European
46-307608P2 Power Cord -- Australian
46-307608P3 Power cord -- British
46-307608P4 Power cord -- Danish
46-307608P5 Power cord -- Indian
46-307608P6 Power cord -- Israeli
59 Chapter 6
P/N Component
46-307608P7 Power cord -- Italian
46-307608P8 Power cord -- Swiss
7 Room Lighting
The ambient light measured by the illuminance in the plane of the review monitors must be less than 20
lux and lower than the maximum value authorized by the local regulation, if applicable.
The image quality cannot be guaranteed with a higher level of ambient light.
! Notice:
For facilities located in France: The ambient light must be between 10 lux and 20 lux.
Therefore, the room lighting should only result from controllable artificial light, excluding natural light.
Artificial light must be stable and controllable ensuring a stable and reproducible illuminance in the
planes of the review monitors. So, continuously adjustable dimmers should not be used.
In order to obtain a room brightness value of 20 lux or less for correct viewing of review monitor images,
the room lights must be equipped with a dimmer switch. Shades and/or drapes must be fitted to
windows.
No lights, furnishings with a shiny surface or bright walls should reflect on the review monitors screens.
In order to prevent reflections on the review monitors screens it is recommendable to use only indirect
lighting on walls, preferably behind the screen. Ceiling lights should be avoided.
8 Physical Characteristics
8-1 Dimensions, Weights and Floor Loading
Table 6 Dimensions, Weights and Floor Loading
Components Dimensions Weight Floor Loading
Depth Width Height kg

mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) (lbs)
HP Z800 Workstation 526 203 445 24  5 Avoid putting on the floor

(20.7) (8.0) (17.5) (52.9 11) to prevent from dust.
DELL T5600 471 172.6 414 14 Avoid putting on the floor

Workstation (18.54) (6.79) (16.3) (30.86) to prevent from dust.
HP Z600 Workstation 440 165 445 17  2 Avoid putting on the floor

(17.3) (6.5) (17.5) (37.4  4.4) to prevent from dust.
HP Compaq DC7900 452 177 447 11.9 Avoid putting on the floor
(17.8) (7.0) (17.6) (26.2) to prevent from dust.
Chapter 6 60
Components Dimensions Weight Floor Loading
Eizo MX191 1MP LCD 205 405 406.5 to 7.2 (15.8) Place on the desk
color monitor 19" (8) (15.9) 427.4 with stand
(16 to 16.8)
Eizo MX300W 4MP 254.7 689 511.5 to 15.7 (34.6) Place on the desk
color monitor 29.8" (10) (27.1) 656.5 with stand
(20.1 to 25.8)
Eizo RX320 3MP 208.2 375.9 523.24 10.3 Avoid putting on the floor
monitor (8.2) (14.8) (20.6) (22.9) to prevent from dust.
Barco Coronis Mammo 217 408 592 13.5 (29.7) Place on the desk
5MP review monitor (8.5) (16.1) (23.3) with stand
Barco Nio 5MP review 250 408 591 12.5 (27.6) Place on the desk
monitor (9.8) (16) (23.2) with stand
Eizo 5MP LCD 230 (9.1, 398 (15.7, 510 to 590 10.9 (24.0) Place on the desk
SMD21511 monitors with stand) with stand) (20.1 to 23.2)
Eizo 5MP LCD GX540 245 (9.7 388 (15.3 512 to 595 11.5 (25.4) Place on the desk
monitors with stand) with stand) (20.2 to 23.4) with stand
Keypad 17.8 10.8 2.54 0.26 Place on the desk

(7) (4.25) (1) (0.57)
8-2 Shipping
Table 7 Shipping
PRODUCT/ HEIGHT x WIDTH x DEPTH weight method of

COMPONENT meters (inches) kg (lbs) shipment
HP Z800 0.60 x 0.80 x 0.40 Carton

(23.6 x 31.5 x 15.7)
DELL T5600 0.39 x 0.62 x 0.55 22.46 Carton

(15.31 x 24.25 x 21.63) (49.51)
19" EIZO color monitor 0.49 x 0.28 x 0.52 Carton

(19.29 x 11 x 20.4)
Barco LCD 5MP review monitors 1 x 0.50 x 0.80 2 x 15 Carton

(39.3 x 19.6 x 31.5) (2 x 33)
Software package 0.05 x 0.2 x 0.26 Carton

(1.9 x 7.8 x 10.2)
EIZO bundle 4MP monitor + Med- 0.65 x 0.38 x 0.81 Carton

FireGL5600 controller board (25.5 x 14.9 x 31.8)
HP Compaq DC7900 0.60 x 0.70 x 0.30 15.72 Carton

(23.6 x 27.5 x 11.8) (34.6)
61 Chapter 6
HP Z600 0.60 x 0.70 x 0.30 Carton

(23.6 x 27.5 x 11.8)
Luminancemeter 0.15 x 0.40 x 0.30 Carton

(5.9 x 15.7 x 11.8)
Keypad 0.05 x 0.15 x 0.25 Carton

(1.96 x 5.9 x 9.8)
Eizo 5MP LCD SMD21511 monitors 0.52 x 0.74 x 0.40 Carton

(20.5 x 29.1 x 15.7)
Eizo 5MP LCD GX540 monitors 0.55 x 0.62 x 0.34 2 x 15 Carton

(21.5 x 24.5 x 13.5) (2 x 33)
Chapter 6 62
9 Telephone Connection
It is recommended that a telephone is provided close to the workstation, to allow convenient dialog with
teleservice technicians.
10 Broadband Connectivity for Remote Maintenance

1. The following information must be collected and sent to the Broadband Connectivity Leader as soon
as possible:
a. SystemID's for each IDI component
b. System IP address/Default Gateway for each IDI component
c. System password, if it is not the IDI standard
d. Site IT contact information.
2. Check if remote connection for supporting purpose is established (ISDN/PPP or DSL/ VPN).
11 Network Configuration
11-1 Interface Requirements and Supported Third-Party Systems
DICOM interfaces and IHE profiles supported by IDI can be found under:
• IDI DICOM Conformance Statement: http://www.imagediagnost.de/conformance
• IDI IHE Integration Statement: http://www.gehealthcare.com/usen/interoperability/ihe.html
• Supported Third-Party Systems: For an up-to-date list of the so far supported third party systems,
refer to the Common Documentation Library (CDL) and search for the document "Validation List":
a. Go to
http://apps.gehealthcare.com/servlet/ClientServlet?REQ=Enter+Documentation+Library
b. Select "Mammo"(1).
c. In the menu "Select all desired Mammo Products" (2), select IDI MWS & NW Solutions (3).
d. Insert the document name "Validation List" (4).
e. Click on [Search].(5)
63 Chapter 6
Illustration 2 Validation List on CDL
2 1
5
f. Select the revision which corresponds to your system version.
11-1-1 Mammography Modalities

11-1-1-1 Requirements
All images sent to or imported in the MammoWorkstation must conform to applicable regulatory
requirements. Image quality must conform to applicable quality guidelines. All modalities must be
certified for softcopy reading.
For images to be displayed modalities must meet certain minimum DICOM requirements. Functionality,
such as automatically sorted images in the Patient Folder, can only be guaranteed when these DICOM
requirements are met. For some CR modalities, the configuration needs to be adapted by the vendor.
The following DICOM parameters must be provided:
1. Accepted Modalities for X-ray mammography
General Series Module Attributes (C.7-5)
Tag Attribute Name Accepted Values
0008,0060 Modality MG | CR* | OT
0018,0015 Body Part Examined BREAST

*.For Fuji-CR there is a "MG-Option", which is to be used instead of CR.
Images from other modalities are not interpreted as X-Ray Mammography. Instead they appear in the
"Additional Series" list.
Chapter 6 64
2. Sorted Patient Folder

General Image Module Attributes (C.7-9)
0020,0020 Patient Orientation P,FL | A,FR | P,L | A,R |

P,F | A,F
Mammography Image Module Attributes (C.8-70)
0020,0062 Image Laterality R|L
CR-Image (C.8-2), X-Ray Image (C.8-26), DX Positioning Module Attr. (C.8-68)
0018,5101 View Position CC | MLO | ML
Note:
For Agfa CR also the Series Description (0008,103E, General Series Module Attributes C.7-5) is
interpreted.
Translation table for standard orientations:
Patient Orientation Image Laterality View Position
P L R CC
A R L CC
P FL R MLO
A FR L MLO
P F R ML
A F L ML
MammoWorkstation supports additional values for patient orientation with automatic flip and rotation of
images for proper display.
If present, the "View Code Sequence" will override all other values:
Code Value Code Meaning Equivalent View View Position in

Position Workstation
R-10242 cranio-caudal CC CC
R-10224 medio-lateral ML ML
65 Chapter 6
Code Value Code Meaning Equivalent View View Position in

Position Workstation
R-10226 medio-lateral MLO MLO

oblique
R-10244 caudo-cranial FB CC
R-10228 latero-medial LM ML
R-10230 latero-medial LMO MLO

oblique
The following "View Modifier Sequences" are supported:
Code Value Code Meaning Image type in Workstation
R-102D6 Magnification Magnification
If none of the above values are set, the MammoWorkstation cannot sort the images according to
laterality and view position. The images will be displayed unsorted in the Patient Folder.
3. Measurements and Scales, Quadrant-Zoom, DICOM-Print

CR-Image Module Attributes (C.8-2) / X-Ray Image Module Attributes (C.8-26)
0018,1164 Imager Pixel Spacing
If the Imager Pixel Spacing value is not available, the Pixel Spacing value will be used instead:
0028,0030 Pixel Spacing
If none of these values is available, the 1:1cm display function will be deactivated. Furthermore, the
scales in the Magnifying Glass and in the measurement function will be deactivated. DICOM print will not
be possible as well.
4. Windowing
VOI LUT Module Attributes (C.11-2)
0028,1050 Window Center
0028,1051 Window Width
0028,1055 Window Center & Width

Explanation
Chapter 6 66
0028,3010 VOI LUT Sequence
If a VOI LUT Sequence is present, it overrides the Window attributes.

If none of these values are set, the MammoWorkstation applies default values.
5. MQSA compliance
For MQSA compliant mammographic image identification, the modality must fill the following DICOM
tags:
0010,0010 Patient Name
0010,0020 Patient ID
0008,0022 Acquisition Date
0008,0032 Acquision Time
0020,0062 Image Laterality
0018,5101 View Position
0008,0080 Institution Name
0008,0081 Institution Address
0008,1070 Operators Name
0018,700A Detector ID or 0018,1007

Cassette ID
0018,1000 Device Serial Number
If the required information is encoded in other DICOM tags, these tags must be added to the display
preferences of MammoWorkstation (see Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference
Configuration on page 395).
11-1-1-2 Supported Third Party Modalities

The Validation List on CDL includes all the modalities in clinical use and compatible with the
MammoWorkstation. MammoWorkstation is dedicated to provide compatibility with all mammography
modalities on the market.
11-1-1-3 Mammography Acquisition Systems

For mammography acquisition systems, provide a list of the systems, the associated IP address and AE
title located at the main facility.
If the installation includes a satellite facility, provide a list of all the mammography acquisition systems,
the associated IP Address and AE title located at the Satellite facility. Generally, satellite facilities are set
up on a different sub net. Therefore, a gateway is required to communicate from the main facility to the
satellite. Please provide the gateway address (see Table 1, Chapter 7).
67 Chapter 6
11-1-2 CAD Display

• If the CAD is manufactured by iCAD, the computer must have been installed in 2004 or later (The
Serial Number will end in 04 or greater). In this case, you will need to contact iCAD and download the
latest available software version.
• If the iCAD was not manufactured in 2004 or later it may need to be replaced. Contactthe next GE
service level for more details.
• MammoWorkstation supports DICOM CAD-SR. Other formats are not supported.
11-1-2-2 Supported Third Party CADs

MammoWorkstation supports DICOM CAD-SR only. Other formats are not supported. For a list of
compatible third-party CAD systems, go to Validation List on CDL.
11-1-2-3 CAD Information

If the facility uses a CAD device, please provide the following information.
CAD IP AE title Sub Net Port Images provided AWS IP AWS AE

name address Mask Number from? (AWS name) address title
1 iCAD 1 3.21.256. iCAD_1 255.255.2 104 Seno Essential 1 3.21.256.20 SENOES

10 52.0
11-1-3 PACS Connection (DICOM Q/R)

See Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403 for explanations on how to
configure archive sources. For seamless PACS integration, the following conditions on the PACS are to
be supported:
• The MammoWorkstation prefers DICOM Q/R using the modern relational query model. The basic
hierarchic query model is also supported, but reduces the query performance of the workstation.
• For prefetch automation, the PACS should support the DICOM Tag Body Part Examined
(0018,0015) in queries.
• For storing of overlays, the PACS must support storing DICOM Grayscale Softcopy Presentation
State documents. (SOP class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.11.1).
• For the integrated reporting to work, the PACS must support storing DICOM Structured Report
documents. (Basic Text SR, SOP class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.88.11).
• For the CAD-display to be stored, the PACS must support storing DICOM CAD documents.
(Mammography CAD SR, SOP class 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.88.50).
Additional useful features for decentralized tele-mammography networks are:
• Rule-based auto-routing to archives and workstations.
• Query-forwarding to secondary archives.
• Extendible with web-server/web-client that supports display of reports in DICOM Structured Report
format.
Chapter 6 68
Note:
For additional information, refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement.
11-1-3-2 Supported Third Party PACS Systems

The systems supported and in clinical use with MammoWorkstation are listed in the Validation List on
CDL.
11-1-4 Printer (DICOM Print)

11-1-5 Requirements
See Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration on page 453 for explanations on how to
configure a printer.
11-1-5-1 Supported Third Party Printers
The printers supported and in clinical use with Image Diagnost MammoWorkstation are listed in the
Validation List on CDL.
11-1-6 DICOM Worklist Server

See Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server on page 429 for explanations on how to
configure a worklist. For seamless integration the following condition on the worklist server has to be
supported:
• For worklist tasks to show a status, the DICOM worklist server must support DICOM Modality
Performed Procedure Step.
11-1-6-2 Supported Third Party Worklist Servers

The servers supported and in clinical use with Image Diagnost MammoWorkstation are listed in the
Validation List on CDL.
11-1-7 Third Party DICOM Application Interfaces

See Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter Configuration on page 507 for explanations on how to
configure adapters to external applications.
11-1-7-2 Supported Third Party DICOM Application Interfaces

The MammoWorkstation supports installation of external applications for general radiology tasks.
The external third-party applications which are supported and in clinical use with Image Diagnost
MammoWorkstation are listed in the Validation List on CDL.
11-1-8 Third Party Applications

11-1-8-1 Third Party Applications
A list of applications which have no noticeable impact on the performance of the MammoWorkstation
can also be found in the Validation List on CDL.
69 Chapter 6
12 General Hardware Requirements

Note:
For the systems with a DBT license, the following requirements apply:
- a minimum of 32 GB;
- Widows 7 64-bit.
12-1 Hardware Requirements for MWS Software

12-1-1 MammoWorkstation software shall be compatible with a PC that fulfills the following minimum
requirements:
• Intel Xeon CPU 2.8 GHz (or equivalent/better)
• 4GB RAM (or better)
• 1x HDD 20 GB space (or better) for the OS
• 2x HDD 60GB capacity, configured as one partition in RAID level 0 for local database cache
• A generic display controller for the control monitor
• Localized professional keyboard and mouse
• Network controller with 1GBit/s (or better)
• A DVD-ROM optical drive
• Windows 7 or XP x64 Professional multilingual.
12-1-2 Recommended Hardware:

• Two Intel Quad-Core Xeon 2.00 GHz processor (or equivalent/better)
• 1x HDD 160GB 7.2k RPM (or better) for the OS
• 2x HDD 500GB 7.2k RPM (or better) configured as one partition in RAID level 0 for the local
database cache
• A generic display controller with standard DVI connector
• DVD+-RW double layer optical drive
• Windows 7 x64Professional multilingual.
Displays: MammoWorkstation software is compatible with a three-monitor (Case 1) or four-monitor

(Case 2) setup:
Case 1:
• one control monitor with at least 1280 × 1024 pixel, AND:
• two 5MP diagnostic review monitors for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammographic images,
OR:
one 10MP diagnostic review monitor for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammographic images.
Case 2:
• one display monitor with at least 1280×1024 pixel, AND:
• two 5MP diagnostic display monitors for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammographic images,
OR:
one 10MP diagnostic display monitor for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammography images,
AND:
Chapter 6 70
• one additional display monitor, not used by MammoWorkstation software. The additional fourth
monitor is reserved for the use of a third party software such as a RIS client.
! Notice:
Diagnostic displays used with MammoWorkstation must be cleared by local regulatory authorities
for use in digital mammography. Vendors evidence of regulatory approval for display systems shall
cover:
- displays,
- display controller,
- calibration equipment and procedures,
- display system QC procedures.
! Notice:
For USA: Evidence of MQSA compliance is required.
12-2 Hardware Requirements for MDS

12-2-1 Mammo Documentation Station software option requires a desktop PC that fulfills the following
minimum requirements:
• One Intel Core 2 Duo processor (or equivalent/better)
• 1x HDD 120GB (or better)
• A display controller with standard DVI connector for the control monitor
• DVD-ROM optical drive
• Windows 7 or XP x64 or x86 Professional multilingual.
Note:
MDS is intended for non-diagnostic usage only and it does not include diagnostic report creation.
Only one non-diagnostic display with at least 1280 × 1024 pixel (or better) is required.

• One Intel Core 2 Duo processor (or equivalent/better)
• 1x HDD 120GB capacity (or better)
• A display controller with standard DVI connector
• DVD+-RW double layer optical drive.
Note:
If no DVD drive is available, the system does not support DICOM Media import or export.
• Windows 7 x86 Professional multilingual.
71 Chapter 6
12-3 Hardware Requirements for Collaboration Server

Note:
The system shall have a Collaboration Server option that enables workflow management services.
Collaboration Server shall operate either:
- if there is only one MammoWorkstation: as part of the MWS, on the same PC;
- if there are multiple MammoWorkstation systems: on a separate PC.
12-3-1 Collaboration Server software option requires a PC that fulfills the following minimum
requirements:
• One Intel Xeon CPU 2.0 GHz (or equivalent)
• 2GB RAM
• 1x HDD 250GB capacity for the OS and the local database cache
• A generic network controller
• DVD-ROM optical drive

• One Intel Dual-Core Xeon 2.00 GHz processor (or equivalent/better)
• 4GB RAM
• 2x HDD 250GB 7.2k RPM for the OS and the local database cache
• Display controller with standard DVI connector for the control monitor
• Windows XP x64 Professional multilingual.
Note:
For the Collaboration Server PC, optionally one control monitor with at least 1280 × 1024 pixel can
be attached.
12-4 Hardware Requirements for DICOM Shuttle PC

12-4-1 DICOM Shuttle software option shall be compatible with a PC that fulfills the following minimum
requirements:
• PC with Intel Xeon CPU 2.8 GHz (or equivalent)
• 2GB RAM
• 1x HDD 20 GB space for the OS and the local database cache
• A generic network controller
• A DVD-ROM optical drive
Chapter 6 72

• One Intel Dual-Core Xeon 2.00 GHz processor (or equivalent or better)
• 4GB RAM
• 2x HDD 250GB 7.2k (or better)
• Display controller with standard DVI connector for the control monitor
• Localized professional keyboard, Mouse
• Windows 7 x64 Professional multilingual.
Note:
For DICOM Shuttle Node, optionally one control monitor with at least 1280 × 1024 pixel can be
attached.
73 Chapter 6
This page is blank.

blank.
Chapter 6 74
Pre-Installation Checklist
Chapter 7 Pre-Installation Checklist
This chapter provides a checklist to prepare on-site installation.

Before you go on site to implement, install, and configure a MammoWorkstation, make sure to follow the
three scenarios described below. This helps you gather all the information necessary and be prepared
accordingly.
- Scenario PRE00 - Pre-purchase Requirements on page 75,
- Scenario PRE01 - Installation Planning Visit on page 76,
- Scenario PRE02 - Pre-delivery Checklist on page 77.
1 Scenario PRE00 - Pre-purchase Requirements
# Action Reference Who? Done?
Operating conditions
1 Check that product specifications are See section Room Climate and Hospital
compatible with altitude and that operating Altitude on page 54 engineer
temperature and humidity can be met.
Room layout
2 Check that an adequate room is available, See section Structural Site planner
with suitable access and lighting. Requirements on page 57.
See section Room Lighting on
page 60
Electrical supply
3 Check availability of suitable supply. See section Electrical Hospital

Requirements on page 58 engineer
Networking
3 Check possibility of connection to hospital N/A Hospital

network engineer
75 Chapter 7
2 Scenario PRE01 - Installation Planning Visit
Storage conditions
1 Check the dimensions and environment of See section Room Climate and Hospital
the pre-installation storage room. Altitude on page 54 engineer
See section IEC60601-1-2
Electromagnetic Standards
Compliance on page 55
See section Shipping on page 61
Room layout
2 Plan and specify layout with adequate See section Structural Site planner
spacing between the station components. Requirements on page 57
Operating conditions
3 Check that operating temperature and See section Room Climate and Heating
humidity requirements will be met, and that Altitude on page 54 engineer
product specifications are compatible with See section Equipment Heat
the altitude of the site Output on page 54
Electromagnetic Interference
4 Check electromagnetic Interference See section IEC60601-1-2 Hospital

environment Electromagnetic Standards engineer, GE
Compliance on page 55 Healthcare
engineer
Ambient Light (for MammoWorkstation)
5 Specify requirements for lightning. See section Room Lighting on Hospital

page 60 engineer, GE
Healthcare
engineer
Structural requirements
6 Check access door width and height. See section Structural Hospital
Requirements on page 57 engineer
Room Layout Planning
7 Plan cable runs; specify ducting, etc. If necessary. Site planner
Electrical requirements
8 Check that room power supply See section Electrical Electrician

requirements will be met. Requirements on page 58
9 Check the line voltage specification. See section Electrical Electrician
Requirements on page 58
Chapter 7 76
10 Check the line frequency specification. See section Electrical Electrician

Requirements on page 58
11 Check the main circuit breaker See section Electrical Electrician
characteristics. Requirements on page 58
Insite connection
12 Specify requirements for Insite broadband Hospital

connection Network
Administrator
Networking
13 Specify network connections and cable Hospital

runs. Network
Administrator
3 Scenario PRE02 - Pre-delivery Checklist
Room Preparation
1 Check room readiness (painting, lighting, See section Structural GE

etc.) and furniture requirements (strength, Requirements on page 57 Healthcare
size). Site planner
Ambient Light (for MammoWorkstation)
2 Check that ambient Light is less than 20 See section Room Lighting on Hospital
Lux in the review room. page 60 engineer, GE
Healthcare
engineer
Electrical Requirements
3 Check that mains outlets are available & See section Electrical Outlets Electrician
active in each room. and Ethernet Plugs on page 59
Networking
4 Check that network outlets are available & See section Electrical Outlets Hospital
active in each room. and Ethernet Plugs on page 59 Network
Administrator
5 Check that network modifications are Hospital

completed and network topology is Network
documented. Administrator
6 Check that IP addresses are fixed, and See Table 1 on page 79 Hospital
AET and ports are defined. Network
Administrator
77 Chapter 7
7 Check that workflow and DICOM Shuttle Hospital

rules are documented. Network
Administrator
8 Check that PACS is able to retrieve "priors" Hospital

without problem. Network
Administrator
9 Check that AET's defined/declared for Hospital

PACS Q/R & WL broker. Network
Administrator
Appointed installation day
10 Check that installation day is defined and

rooms will be available and freely
accessible.
11 Check that PACS administrator will be on PACS

site on installation day. Administrator
12 Check that Network administrator will be Network

on site on installation day. Administrator
13 Check that application training date is

defined.
Chapter 7 78
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
Table 1 Network interfaces (to be filled during pre-delivery visit)
Hostname IP address AET AET Port #

(AET storage if PACS) (for PACS query)
PACS 1
PACS 2
RIS /
Worklist
server 1
RIS /
Worklist
server 2
DICOM
Printer 1
79
DICOM
Printer 2
AWS1
AWS2
AWS3
AWS4
US1
5338446-12-8EN
Revision 1
US2
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
Hostname IP address AET AET Port #
(AET storage if PACS) (for PACS query)
MR1
MR2
Insite /
VPN
router
Gateway
1
MW1
MWS
80
MWS3
MWS4
DSH1
DSH2
DSH3
CSE
5338446-12-8EN
Revision 1
Installation
Chapter 8 Installation
This chapter contains all information necessary for installation of IDI products. Select the right scenario:
- 1. Scenario IST00A - MammoWorkstation Installation Steering Guide on page 82:
- 1-1 Windows XP on page 82,
- 1-2 Windows 7 on page 85,
- 1-2-1 Windows 7 with Barco Monitor on page 85,
- 1-2-2 Windows 7 with EIZO Monitors on page 88.
- 2. Scenario IST00B - Mammo Documentation Station / TechInsight Installation Steering Guide on
page 91:
- 2-2 Windows 7 on page 94.
- 3. Scenario IST00C - DICOM Shuttle, Collaboration Server Installation Steering Guide on
page 97,
- 3-2 Windows 7 on page 99.
! Notice:
Make sure there are at least 10 GB available on the C: drive before you start the installation.
! Notice:
Please be aware, that some installation steps require external communication, which may have
influence on the time needed for the single step. These steps are marked with an hour glass icon.
81 Chapter 8
Installation
1 Scenario IST00A - MammoWorkstation Installation Steering Guide

1-1 Windows XP
Action Job Card Who? Timing
1. Unpacking Job Card IST A01 - Unpacking on page 101 1FE 15’
2. Installation of graphic Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic 1FE 10’
boards and connection Board and Connections to Monitors - HP on page 103
of review monitors
3. Installation of Windows Job Card IST C03 - Installation of Windows XP Professional 1FE 45’
64-bit (64-bit) on page 131
4. Setup of Network Job Card IST A06 - Network Connection Setup on Windows 1FE 15’
Connection XP on page 165
1. Basic Windows Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI on 1FE 15’
Configuration page 185
2. Additional language Job Card IST A19 - Additional Language Files for Windows 1FE 5’
files for Windows XP XP on page 235
3. IDI Publication Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation on page 195 1FE 15’
installation
4. IDI Software Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation on page 197 1FE 20’ up
installation to 2
hours
5. IDI Software licensing Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on page 213 1FE 10’
Note:
License delivery may take 24 hours; installation steps can still be completed, but license code
entry is mandatory to access the application and run functional tests. This can be performed with
the generic installation license with restricted image view.
6. Temporary IDI Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing on 1FE 10’
application licensing page 221
7. Post-Installation Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks on page 207 1FE 10’
Checks
8. VNC installation and Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation on page 263 1FE 15’
configuration
9. Monitors installation Job Card IST C26 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver 1FE 10’
with Graphic Board and QAWeb for Windows XP on page 277
Med. 5MP2FH
Chapter 8 82
Installation
OR: Monitors Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 1FE 10’
installation with Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb on page 293
Graphic Board MXRT-
5400
10. Ambient light Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement on 1FE 10’
measurement page 325
11. Monitors calibration Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration on page 331
1FE 30’
12. Mandatory Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration on page 227 1FE 15’
configuration
13. Desktop theme Job Card IST A18 - Windows Theme Configuration on 1FE 5’
configuration page 231
14. IDI Keypad installation Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for
IDI Keypad X-keys 20 on page 237 1FE 10’
or Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for

15. Local DICOM settings Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database 1FE 10’
and database Configuration on page 381
configuration
16. User accounts creation Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI 1FE 10’
Application on page 385
17. Language and display Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference 1FE 15’
preference Configuration on page 395
configuration
18. DICOM partners Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on 1FE 20’
19. DICOM media import Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration on 1FE 5’
20. Remote control Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization from Third 1FE 20’
configuration Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) on
page 413
21. RIS synchronisation Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from 1FE 30’
MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote Control)
on page 419
22. Connection to a Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server on 1FE 10’
worklist server page 429
83 Chapter 8
Installation
23. DICOM printer Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration on 1FE 10’
24. Measurements Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration on 1FE 10’
calibration page 457
25. Language Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages 1FE 5’

configuration Configuration on DVD/CD on page 459
26. HL7 export Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on page 461 1FE 15’
configuration
27. Unscheduled Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled Reporting Configuration 1FE 60’
Reporting on page 465
Final sequence: required to complete the installation.

28. Acceptance test Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473 1FE 20’
29. Backup of the Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder on 1FE 15’
configuration folder page 479
Chapter 8 84
Installation
1-2 Windows 7
1-2-1 Windows 7 with Barco Monitor
2. Installation of Graphic Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor 1FE 10’
Board (Med. 5MP2FH) Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - HP on
and connection of page 103
monitors or
Job Card IST A86 - Installation of a Review Monitor
Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - DELL on
page 109
3. Installation of Barco Job Card IST A88 - Installation of Barco 5MP Review
5MP review monitors Monitors on page 127
4. Installation of Windows Job Card IST C43 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on 1FE 45’
64-bit HP on page 137
or
Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on
DELL T5600 on page 145
5. Setup of Network Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on 1FE 15’
Connection Windows 7 on page 169
6. Basic Windows Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI on 1FE 15’
7. IDI Publication Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation on 1FE 15’
installation page 195
8. IDI Software installation Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation on page 197 1FE 20’ up
to 2
hours
9. IDI Software licensing Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on page 213 1FE 10’
Note:
entry is mandatory to access the application and run functional tests. This can be performed
with the generic installation license with restricted image view.
10. Temporary IDI Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing 1FE 10’
application licensing on page 221
11. Post-Installation Checks Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks on page 207 1FE 10’
configuration
85 Chapter 8
Installation
13. Monitors installation Job Card IST C29 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver
with Graphic Board and QAWeb for Windows 7 on page 285
Med. 5MP2FH 1FE 10’
OR: Monitors Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 1FE 10’
installation with Graphic Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb on page 293
Board MXRT-5400
15. Monitors calibration Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration on 1FE 30’
page 331
16. Mandatory configuration Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration on page 227 1FE 15’
17. IDI Keypad installation Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for
or Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation

for IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251
18. Local DICOM settings Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database 1FE 10’
and database Configuration on page 381
configuration
19. User accounts creation Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI 1FE 10’
Application on page 385
20. Language and display Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference 1FE 10’
preference Configuration on page 395
configuration
22. DICOM media import Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration 1FE 5’
configuration on page 409
page 413
MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote
Control) on page 419
25. Connection to a worklist Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server on 1FE 10’
server page 429
Chapter 8 86
Installation
28. Language configuration Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages 1FE 5’
Configuration on DVD/CD on page 459
29. HL7 export Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on 1FE
30. Unscheduled Reporting Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled Reporting 1FE 60’
Configuration on page 465

87 Chapter 8
Installation
1-2-2 Windows 7 with EIZO Monitors
2. Installation of EIZO Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor 1FE 10’
Graphic Board Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - HP on
page 103
or
Job Card IST A86 - Installation of a Review Monitor
Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - DELL on
page 109
3. Installation of Eizo Job Card IST A64 - Installation of Eizo 5MP Review
5MP review monitors Monitors on page 119
4. Installation of Job Card IST C43 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on 1FE 45’
Windows 64-bit HP on page 137
or
Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on
DELL T5600 on page 145
5. Setup of Network Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on 1FE 15’
Connection Windows 7 on page 169
installation
installation to 2
hours
9. IDI Software Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on page 213 1FE 10’
licensing
Note:
10. Temporary IDI Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing 1FE 10’
application licensing on page 221
Checks
configuration
Chapter 8 88
Installation
13. Monitors installation Job Card IST C89 - Installation of Graphic Board Drivers
with Graphic Board for Eizo 5MP Review Monitors on page 279
V5800 or W5000
15. Monitors Calibration Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on page 345 1FE 30’
16. Monitors calibration Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Baselines on 1FE 20’
baselines page 357
17. Recommendations Job Card IST A74 - Recommendations for Eizo DIN 1FE 20’
for EIZO DIN Monitors on page 365
monitors
configuration
19. IDI Keypad Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for
installation IDI Keypad X-keys 20 on page 237 1FE 10’
or Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation

for IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251
20. Local DICOM Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database 1FE 10’
settings and Configuration on page 381
database
configuration
21. User accounts Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI 1FE 10’
creation Application on page 385
22. Language and Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference 1FE 10’
display preference Configuration on page 395
configuration
24. DICOM media import Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration 1FE 5’
configuration on page 409
page 413
on page 419
89 Chapter 8
Installation

31. HL7 export Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on 1FE 15’

Chapter 8 90
Installation
2 Scenario IST00B - Mammo Documentation Station / TechInsight Installation

Steering Guide
2-1 Windows XP
2. ATI Med Fire GL Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection 1FE 5’
V5600 board on page 115
installation
3. Installation of Job Card IST C04 - Installation of Windows XP Professional 1FE 35’
Windows 32-bit (32-bit) on page 153
4. Driver and Job Card IST A36 - ATI Driver Setup on page 161 1FE 10’
calibration software
installation
installation
installation to 2
hours
licensing
Note:
Checks
configuration
91 Chapter 8
Installation
14. Monitor MX300 Job Card IST A38 - MX300W Eizo Monitor Calibration on 1FE 20’
15. Monitor MX320 Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration on 1FE 20’
configuration
17. Reporting mask Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for 1FE 5’
configuration Mammo Docu page 229

IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251
database
configuration
configuration
24. DICOM media Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration on 1FE 5’
import configuration page 409
page 413
26. RIS synchronization Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from 1FE 30’
on page 419
Chapter 8 92
Installation
29. Measurements Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration on page 457 1FE 10’
calibration
configuration

93 Chapter 8
Installation
2-2 Windows 7
2. ATI med FireGL Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection 1FE 5’
V5600 board on page 115
installation
3. Installation of Job Card IST C44 - Installation of Windows 7 (32-bit) on HP 1FE 35’
Windows 32-bit on page 157
OR: Installation of Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on

Windows 64-bit (DELL) DELL T5600 on page 145
4. Driver and Job Card IST A36 - ATI Driver Setup on page 161 1FE 10’
calibration software
installation
Connection 7 on page 169
installation
installation to 2
hours
licensing
Note:
Checks
configuration
13. Monitor MX300 Job Card IST A38 - MX300W Eizo Monitor Calibration on 1FE 20’
Chapter 8 94
Installation
14. Monitor MX320 Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration on 1FE 20’
configuration
16. Reporting mask Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for 1FE 5’
configuration Mammo Documentation Station on page 229

IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251
database
configuration
configuration
23. DICOM media Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration on 1FE 5’
import configuration page 409
page 413
25. RIS synchronization Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from 1FE 30’
on page 419
95 Chapter 8
Installation

configuration

Chapter 8 96
Installation
3 Scenario IST00C - DICOM Shuttle, Collaboration Server Installation

Steering Guide
! Notice:
Make sure that all IDI systems have the same languages configured.
Especially check that all servers with no user interaction have the same language configured as
the installed IDI MammoWorkstation and IDI Mammo Documentation Station.
3-1 Windows XP
2. Installation of Job Card IST C04 - Installation of Windows XP Professional 1FE 10’
Windows 32-bit (32-bit) on page 153
installation
7. IDI Software Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation on page 197 1FE 10’
installation
licensing
Note:
Checks
configuration
configuration
97 Chapter 8
Installation
database
configuration
15. Routing rules Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration on 1FE 20’
17. DICOM Shuttle Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration on 1FE 5’
18. DICOM Worklist Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration on 1FE 15’
SCP configuration page 435
19. Worklist broker Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration on 1FE 15’

Chapter 8 98
Installation
3-2 Windows 7
2. Installation of Job Card IST C44 - Installation of Windows 7 (32-bit) on HP 1FE 10’
Windows 32-bit on page 157
OR: Installation of Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on

Windows 64-bit (DELL) DELL T5600 on page 145
3. Setup of Network Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on Windows 7 1FE 15’
Connection on page 169
installation
installation to 2
hours
licensing
Note:
Checks
configuration
configuration
database
configuration
99 Chapter 8
Installation
14. Routing rules Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration on 1FE 20’
16. DICOM Shuttle Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration on 1FE 5’
17. DICOM Worklist Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration on 1FE 15’
SCP configuration page 435
18. Worklist broker Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration on 1FE 15’

Chapter 8 100
Job Card IST A01 - Unpacking
Job Card IST A01 - Unpacking Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all PCs.
2 Personnel Requirements
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Reception
1. Examine the system on reception. Check any shock indicators present. If possible, make a visual
check of all items.
2. If problems occur (items missing, signs of shipping damage, excessive shock, etc.), note them down
on the delivery note before signing for reception.
! Notice:
Mandatory for Quebec: a Glossary is delivered together with each software box. Please hand this
Glossary to the customer.
4 Installation CDs/DVDs Check

Check that the following CDs and DVDs are delivered:
• MammoWorkstation Software DVD v. 4.7.0 (part no. 5327866-16) for all PCs.
• Shipped with Barco Medical Monitors: Barco display driver for Windows XP and display calibration
software CD for MWS.
• Shipped with Eizo Medical Monitors: Eizo display driver CD for MWS.
• MammoWorkstation User Publication DVD (part no. 5391143-7-399) for all PCs.
• MammoWorkstation Service Publication CD (part no. 5419733-4-2EN) for all PCs.
5 Content of the DELL Delivery Package

• DELL workstation T5600
• Power cord
• Mouse
• Keyboard
• Manuals (2x)
• Recovery DVDs (3x)
• DVI to VGA adapter
• Display port to DVI adapter (2x)
101
Job Card IST A01 - Unpacking
This page is blank.
102
Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - HP
Job Card IST A02 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and
Connections to Monitors - HP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation with Barco or Eizo review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Hardware Requirements
1. HP Workstation Base Unit
2. one of the graphic boards:
Barco: - Graphic controller board Barco Med. 5MP2FH

- Graphic controller board Barco MXRT5400
Eizo: - ATI FirePro V5800 1GB Graphics Controller Board or higher,
- ATI FirePro W5000 Graphics Controller Board or higher,
- and all later introduced ATI FirePro graphic boards.
Note:
Those graphic boards can be used for all current and afterwards introduced Eizo
monitors.
4 Safety Precautions
WARNING
1) Shut down the Workstation before opening the CPU Box.
2) Disconnect the power cable.
3) Take the usual precautions against ESD when handling the PCI Cards and electronics.
103
Job Card IST A02 - Installationof a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - HP
5 Installation of the Graphic Board

The workstation PC comes with only one graphic card (for the control monitor).
Note:
If replacing or adding a graphic board, disconnect the two monitor video cables first.
Illustration 1 Graphic position on System board
Graphic Board 1
WARNING
Only trained service technicians are authorized to remove the system cover and access any of
the components inside the system.
Discharge of static electricity!
Static electricity is dangerous for PC components.
Avoid working in areas with high static electricity (avoid carpeted areas). Whenever you are
about to touch the insides of a PC, be sure to ground yourself before touching any interior
components:
- by touching either the power supply or the outside frame of the PC
- by wearing an ESD wrist strap
104
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to open the chassis and open the shutters to access the graphic
boards.
Note:
The built-in ATI V5800 board (1) must be already in place in the upper slot.
2. Slide the small green latch (2) upwards to unlock the metal inserts.
3. Remove the metal insert (3) that corresponds to the graphic board slot (4).
3 4
Note:
Additional advice for Barco Med 5MP2FH: The jumper shall not be placed on the VGA.
105
4. Gently insert the graphic board (5) into the slot (4) while sliding the green latch (2) upwards.
5. Lock the graphic board by sliding the green latch downwards.

6. Close the shutters and chassis.
The physical installation of the second graphic board for the review monitors is complete.
BARCO 5MP2FH EIZO / BARCO MXRT5400
Socket for the

Graphic Board 1
control monitor
Sockets for the Graphic Board 2
review monitor
106
6 Uninstall a Graphic Board from the CPU Box
WARNING
components:
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to open the chassis and open the shutters to access the graphic
boards.
2. Slide the small green latch (1) upwards to unlock the graphic board.
3. Gently remove the defective graphic board.
Note:
Store the defective board in an anti-static bag.
4. Insert the new graphic board into the same slot.
5. Lock the graphic board by sliding the green latch(1) downwards.
Insert the new

Graphic Board
107
6. Close the shutters and chassis.

The physical installation of the graphic board for the review monitors is complete.
7 Calibrate the two review monitors

After the graphic board has been replaced, the monitors must be calibrated. for a detailed description of
the calibration, go to:
- Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration on page 331 or
- Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on page 345.
108
Job Card IST A86 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - DELL
Job Card IST A86 - Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and
Connections to Monitors - DELL Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation with Barco or Eizo review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
1. DELL Workstation Base Unit
2. one of the graphic boards:
Barco: - Graphic controller board Barco Med. 5MP2FH

- Graphic controller board Barco MXRT5400
Eizo: - ATI FirePro V5800 1GB Graphics Controller Board or higher,
- ATI FirePro W5000 Graphics Controller Board or higher,
- and all later introduced ATI FirePro graphic boards.
Note:
Those graphic boards can be used for all current and afterwards introduced Eizo
monitors.
WARNING
109
Job Card IST A86 - Installationof a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - DELL
5 Installation of the Graphic Board

The workstation PC comes with only one graphic card (for the control monitor).
Note:
If replacing or adding a graphic board, disconnect the two monitor video cables first.
Illustration 1 Graphic position on System board
Graphic Board 1
WARNING
components:
110
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to access the graphic boards.
Note:
The built-in ATI W5000 board (1) must be already in place in the upper slot.
2. Press the small blue latch (2) that corresponds to the graphic board slot (4) and slide it outwards to
unlock the metal inserts.
3. Remove the metal insert (3).
2
4
111
4. Gently insert the graphic board (5) into the slot (4).
5. Lock the graphic board by pressing the blue latch inwards.

6. Close the side panel.
The physical installation of the second graphic board for the review monitors is complete.
Socket for the

control monitor
Sockets for the
review monitor
112
6 Uninstall a Graphic Board from the CPU Box
WARNING
components:
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to access the graphic boards.
2. Press the small blue latch (1) and slide it outwards to unlock the graphic board.
3. Gently remove the defective graphic board.
Note:
Store the defective board in an anti-static bag.
4. Insert the new graphic board into the same slot.
5. Lock the graphic board by pressing the blue latch (1) inwards.
Insert the new

Graphic Board
1
6. Close the side panel.

The physical installation of the graphic board for the review monitors is complete.
7 Calibrate the two review monitors

After the graphic board has been replaced, the monitors must be calibrated. for a detailed description of
the calibration, go to:
- Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration on page 331 or
- Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on page 345.
113
This page is blank.
114
Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection
Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MDS with the Eizo MX300W monitor.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
• ATI Med Fire GL V5600 graphics controller board or better.
• DVI cable
• USB cable
4 ATI Board Installation

1. Open the side cover of the PC. (Looks might be slightly different depending on type of IDI workstation
base unit used. For further instructions on installation/replacement of the graphic board, see
according Job Cards)
2. Remove the graphic board and install the ATI board (1) at the same location.
115
Job Card IST A10 - ATI Board Installation and Connection
3. Close the side cover.
5 Connection
1. Connect the monitor to the ATI board using the dual link cable (see picture).
Note:
Use any of both DVI plugs on both the monitor and PC side.
2. Connect the USB cable between the monitor and the PC.
1. USB cable
2. DVI cable
3. Power cord
3
1
2
116
Job Card IST A64 - Installation of Eizo 5MP Review Monitors
Job Card IST A64 - Installation of Eizo 5MP Review Monitors Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS with 5MP Eizo review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Purpose
To install Eizo 5MP review monitors (Unpacking, Positioning, Connection and power up).
4 Supplies
• IDI Workstation Base Unit
• B&W LCD review monitors Eizo SMD 21511 clear base, Kit part no. 5432866
or
• B&W LCD review monitors Eizo SMD 21511 blue base, Kit part no. 5433528
• 2x5MP GX540 Monitor Bundle, Kit part no. 5432871-2
5 Reception and Unpacking

! Notice:
Take care when transporting and unpacking. The LCD panels in particular should be protected
against shocks, scratches and fingerprints.
The LCD monitors weight is approximately 15 kg (33 lb) each. To safely lift and carry the monitors,
position one hand below the bottom of the front mask and the other below the bottom of the back
cover. Place the monitors on a strong table or desk.
1. Examine the scope of delivery on reception. Check any shock indicators present. If possible, make a
visual check of all items.
6 Procedure
6-1 Installation Recommendations
• The room lighting should only result from controllable artificial light, excluding natural light.
• The monitors should be installed such that no lights, furnishings with a shiny surface or bright walls
can be reflected on the screen.
• In order to prevent reflections on the LCD it is recommendable to use only indirect lighting on walls,
preferably behind the screen. Ceiling lights should be avoided.
• The room illuminance should be adjustable to the desired level in a constant and reproducible way.
Continuously adjustable variators should not be used. Maximum illuminance is specified in Job Card
IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement on page 325.
117
Job Card IST A64 - Installation ofEizo 5MP Review Monitors
6-2 Positioning of the Monitors

The customer is allowed to choose the review monitors position compared to LCD control color monitor
as defined below:
Note:
Ask the customer to choose review monitors’ position and position them as defined.
• Position of the right-hand review monitors: review monitors are located on the right side of LCD
control color monitor.
Control color Review Review

monitor 1 monitor monitor Front View
3 2
• Position of the left-hand review monitors: review monitors are located on the left side of LCD
Review Review Control color

monitor monitor monitor 1 Front View
3 2
Note:
The monitors numbers given here will be used as references in the next procedures. These
numbers depend on their position relative to the LCD control color monitor.
118
6-3 Connection of the Monitors to the IDI MammoWorkstation

Access the Monitor Connection Panel
1. Place the display on a stable, horizontal surface.
For the SMD monitors execute the following steps in addition
2. Press on the 2 lockers.
3. Remove rear panel cover.
Press here to unlock
step 2 step 3
6-3-1 USB Cable Connection

Use the delivered USB 2.0 Cables Type A Male to Type B Male 6 ft to connect each of the monitors to
the MammoWorkstation.
! Notice:
The USB connection is mandatory to ensure a successful calibration procedure.
119
6-3-2 DVI Cables Connection

Note:
The display has a DVI-D connection. Use the supplied cable. The picture quality, noise immunity
and radiated interference of the complete system depend on the cable quality and length.
In case of missing or defective cables or adapters, do not buy or use parts other than the ones
specified in the FRU list. If failed to this recommendation you might experience system issues.
Note:
The rear view of the HP Z800 and the DELL T5600 with all monitors connected look like the
following:
HP Z800 DELL T5600
Control
Color
monitor
connected
LCD
review
monitors
connected
Position / Resolution of the Review Monitors

• Connect the first DVI plug of the DVI/DVI cable to the B&W LCD review monitor 2 input DVI
connector:
Note:
Insert the DVI plug through opening the stand, plug in and screw tight.
• Connect the second DVI plug of the DVI/DVI cable to the upper graphic boards DVI connector
located at the CPU box back side.
• Do the same with the review monitor 3.
120
Illustration 1 LCD Review Monitors in Right Position - Rear View:
Luminace
Meter
Monitor 3 Monitor 2 Monitor 1
2k x 2k x 2.5k LCD Control

Upper
DVI 2.5k B&W LCD Color monitor
Connectors B&W Review
LCD
Lower
DVI
Connectors DVI/DVI Cables
Illustration 1 IMPORTANT: Fill in the table below
Monitor 3 Monitor 2 Lumi-

Graphics board Graphics board nance
Meter
Serial Number
Serial Number of replaced parts
Calibration Date (CD)
Calibration Date (CD) of replaced part
N/A
End date calibration validity = CD + 1 year
End date calibration validity = CD + 1 year of
replaced part
Blank fields for LCD monitors serial numbers must be filled in by FE during installation.
6-4 Power Cables Connection

6-4-1 Connect Power Cables to the Monitors
Note:
Power cables must be fitted with proper plugs for the country where the workstation is installed.
121
1. Place power and video cables through the guide and put the guide cover back if applicable.
Note:
Only use the power cables supplied in the delivery. The power cables should be plugged in
separated power distribution outlets, coming from the same power distribution panel.
122
6-4-2 Close the Monitor Connection Panel on the SMD monitors

1. Position the cables in order for them to exit on top or at the bottom of the cover.
2. Position cover onto connection panel, and lock up.
Step 1 Step 2
6-5 Line Voltage Selection

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC FOR THE MONITORS.
6-6 LCD Monitor Power up

The display and the workstation can be switched on in any order.
Note:
If the operation LED does not light up green following switching on, check the system for basic
connection and operation errors before escalating to the next GE service level.
Note:
A screen saver function should be used in order to reduce image sticking which can occur in TFT
displays. Image sticking is the effect where a faint image of the previous screen contents can still
be seen after the display contents have changed. By using a screen saver with permanently
changing screen contents, unnecessary effects of the same image are avoided.
In case of a problem, see also section 4-2 of Job Card TSG A18 - Eizo Monitors Troubleshooting on
page 771.
123
This page is blank.
124
Job Card IST A88 - Installation of Barco 5MP Review Monitors
Job Card IST A88 - Installation of Barco 5MP Review Monitors Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS with Barco review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Purpose
To install Barco 5MP review monitors (Unpacking, Positioning, Connection and power up).
4 Supplies
• Barco Nio 5MP LCD review monitors, Kit part no. 5450693
or
• Barco Mammo Coronis 5MP LCD review monitors, Kit part no. 5437423
5 Reception and Unpacking

! Notice:
Take care when transporting and unpacking. The LCD panels in particular should be protected
against shocks, scratches and fingerprints.
The LCD monitors weight is approximately 15 kg (33 lb) each. To safely lift and carry the monitors,
position one hand below the bottom of the front mask and the other below the bottom of the back
cover. Place the monitors on a strong table or desk.
1. Examine the scope of delivery on reception. Check any shock indicators present. If possible, make a
visual check of all items.
6 Procedure
6-1 Installation Recommendations
• The room lighting should only result from controllable artificial light, excluding natural light.
• The monitors should be installed such that no lights, furnishings with a shiny surface or bright walls
can be reflected on the screen.
• In order to prevent reflections on the LCD it is recommendable to use only indirect lighting on walls,
preferably behind the screen. Ceiling lights should be avoided.
• The room illuminance should be adjustable to the desired level in a constant and reproducible way.
Continuously adjustable variators should not be used. Maximum illuminance is specified in Job Card
IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement on page 325.
125
6-2 Positioning of the Monitors

The customer is allowed to choose the review monitors position compared to LCD control color monitor
as defined below:
Note:
Ask the customer to choose review monitors’ position and position them as defined.
• Position of the right-hand review monitors: review monitors are located on the right side of LCD
Control color Review Review

monitor 1 monitor monitor Front View
2 3
• Position of the left-hand review monitors: review monitors are located on the left side of LCD
Review Review Control color

monitor monitor monitor 1 Front View
3 2
Note:
The monitors numbers given here will be used as references in the next procedures. These
numbers depend on their position relative to the LCD control color monitor.
126
6-3 Connection of the Monitors to the IDI MammoWorkstation

6-3-1 Connect the control monitor:
Connect the control monitor to any port of the first (upper) graphic board.
! Notice:
Handle the connectors with special care as the pins are prone to bend if force is applied when
plugging it in.
6-3-2 Connect the review monitors:

Use any ports of the second (lower) graphic board to connect the review monitors to.
To connect the cables to the monitors there are some further steps that need to be done:
1. You need to unclip (1) the top connectors cover to open it (see example in screenshot below).
2. Unclip the stand cover (2a), then push it downwards (2b), to open it.
1
2b
2a
3. Connect the DVI cables (3) at the rear of the monitors (see example below).
4. Connect the power cables of the monitors (4).
127
5. If the monitor has a cover, then clip it back.

6. Guide the cables through the monitors stand.
7. Close the stand cover pushing it upwards then clipping in onto the stand.
128
Table 2 IMPORTANT: Fill in the table below
Monitor 3 Monitor 2 Lumi-

Graphics board Graphics board nance
Meter
Serial Number
Serial Number of replaced parts
Calibration Date (CD)
Calibration Date (CD) of replaced part
N/A
End date calibration validity = CD + 1 year
End date calibration validity = CD + 1 year of
replaced part
Blank fields for LCD monitors serial numbers must be filled in by FE during installation.
6-4 Line Voltage Selection

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC FOR THE MONITORS.
6-5 LCD Monitor Power up

The display and the workstation can be switched on in any order.
Note:
If the operation LED does not light up green following switching on, check the system for basic
connection and operation errors before escalating to the next GE service level.
Note:
A screen saver function should be used in order to reduce image sticking which can occur in TFT
displays. Image sticking is the effect where a faint image of the previous screen contents can still
be seen after the display contents have changed. By using a screen saver with permanently
changing screen contents, unnecessary effects of the same image are avoided.
In case of a problem, see also section 4-2 of Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors Troubleshooting on
page 777.
129
This page is blank.
130
Job Card IST C03 - Installation of Windows XP Professional (64-bit)
Job Card IST C03 - Installation of Windows XP Professional (64-bit) Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation.
1 Field Engineer
Time:45’
Content of the HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit:
• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.8GT/s QPI, DDR3 800 1st CPU
• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.8GT/s QPI, DDR3 800 2nd CPU
• HP 8GB(8X1GB)DDR3-1333 ECC RAM
OR
HP 8GB(4X2GB)DDR3-1333 ECC RAM
• ATI FirePro V5800 512MB PCIe Graphics
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 1st HDD
• HP 500GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 2nd HDD
• HP 500GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" HDD 3rd HDD
• Air Cooling Solution
• HP Z800 Localization Kit GER
• HP 2x Standard Heatsink Thermal Kit
131
4 Installation of Windows XP (64bit)

1. Connect mouse and keyboard to any USB port. Connect control monitor and power cord to the
computer (network cable may be connected now or later).
2. Press the power button.
A system image stored on a partition of the hard-disk will be launched automatically to perform the
installation. The following screens will be displayed.
3. Perform the following steps through the next screens:

a. Accept the end-user license agreement
b. Customize regional and language options
c. Type your full name and the name of your company organization
d. Adjust date and time zone
4. After an automatic reboot the installation will be complete.

The whole process will take approximately 30 minutes.
132
5 Creation of RAID 0 (Striped Volume)

The OS is installed on Disk 0. Combine Disk 1 and Disk 2 to form a Raid 0 (also called striped volume).
1. Click on Start ➜ right click on My Computer ➜ Manage ➜ Disk Management.
2. Right click on Disk 1 and then on "Delete Partition".
3. Do the same for Disk 2.

The result will be:
4. Right click on Disk 1 and convert the disk to a Dynamic Disk.
133
This screen will be displayed:
5. Select Disk1 and Disk2.

The resulting screen will be:
Note:
Note that "Basic" turned to "Dynamic".
6. Right click on Disk 1(1) and create a New volume.
134
7. Click [Next] in the New Volume Wizard.
8. Choose "Striped" and click [Next].
9. Highlight Disk 2 on the left pane and click [Add].

Then click [Next]
135
10. Choose letter "D".
11. Choose "NTFS" as file system (default setting) and checkmark "Perform a quick format".
12. At the top of the disk management window you can now see that a striped volume (consisting of
Disk 1 and Disk 2) has been created.
The final screen should look like this:
136
Job Card IST C43 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on HP
Job Card IST C43 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on HP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 45’
HP Workstation Base Unit
Note:
Displays: MammoWorkstation software requires a three monitor setup, where there is:
- one display monitor with at least 1280×1024 pixel
- two 5MP diagnostic display monitors for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammographic
images
137
4 Installation of Windows 7 (64bit)

1. Connect mouse and keyboard to any USB port.
Connect control monitor and power cord to the computer (network cable may be connected now or
later).
3. Press F9 to get the boot menu.
4. The following screens will be displayed: Select the Hard Drive as the Boot Device. Change your
setting via the arrow keys.
5. Wait for files being loaded:
138
6. The following screen will be displayed:
7. Select language according to customer specification. Confirm by clicking [Next].

8. Choose a user name for your account (e.g. "ImageDiagnost") and a name for your computer. Confirm
by clicking [Next].
9. Set a password for your account (e.g "idi"). Confirm by clicking [Next].
10. Read and accept the license terms. Confirm by clicking [Next].
11. In the following window select "Ask me later":
139
12. Review your time and date settings. Confirm by clicking [Next].
13. The computer will reboot.

140

The OS is installed on Disk 0. Disk 1 and Disk 2 will be combined to form Raid 0 (also called striped
volume).
1. Click on Start ➜ right click on Computer ➜ Manage ➜ Disk Management.
2. Right click on Disk 1 and then on "Delete Volume".
3. Do the same for Disk 2.

The result will be:
141
4. Right click on Disk 1 (1)and convert the disk to a Dynamic Disk (2).
This screen will be displayed:

5. Select Disk1 and Disk2 and confirm by clicking [OK].
The resulting screen will be:
Note:
Note that "Basic" turned to "Dynamic".
142
6. Right click on Disk 1 and create a New Striped Volume.
7. A wizard "New Striped Volume" will appear. Click [Next].

Then click [Next]
143
9. Select letter "D" and click [Next].
10. Select "NTFS" as file system (default setting) and checkmark "Perform a quick format".
On the next page confirm the process with [Finish].
11. At the top of the disk management window you can now see that a striped volume has been created.
144
Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on DELL T5600
Job Card IST C87 - Installation of Windows 7 (64-bit) on DELL T5600 Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation using DELL T5600 as Workstation Base Unit.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 45’
DELL Workstation Base Unit
Note:
Displays: MammoWorkstation software requires a three monitor setup, where there is:
- one display monitor with at least 1280×1024 pixel
- two 5MP diagnostic display monitors for primary diagnostic interpretation of mammographic
images
145

Connect control monitor and power cord to the computer (network cable may be connected now or
later).
4. Select the general Windows7 settings:
5. Select language, time, and keyboard layout according to customer specification. Confirm by clicking
[Next].
6. Choose a user name for your account (e.g. "ImageDiagnost") and a name for your computer (e.g.
"MWS01"). Confirm by clicking [Next].
7. Set a password for your account (e.g "idi"). Confirm by clicking [Next].
146
147
148

The OS is installed on Disk 0. Disk 1 and Disk 2 will be combined to form Raid 0 (also called striped
volume).
1. Click on Start ➜ right click on Computer ➜ Manage ➜ Disk Management.
2. Opening Disk Management for the first time, a popup opens asking to initialize the disk. Select the
appropriate disks, choose "MBR", and click OK.
3. If Disk 1 is already assigned to a drive letter, right click on the disk and then on "Delete Volume". A
warning will appear telling, that all data will be deleted from the volume. And to externally save files
that should be kept before starting the deletion process. Select Yes.
4. Do the same for Disk 2 if necessary.

5. Right click on Disk 1 and create a New Striped Volume.
149
6. A wizard "New Striped Volume" will appear. Click [Next].

Then click [Next]
150
8. Select letter "D" and click [Next].
9. Select "NTFS" as file system (default setting) and checkmark "Perform a quick format".
On the next page confirm the process with [Finish].
10. A Warning message appears, telling that the selected disks are automatically converted into dynamic
disks. Click Yes
11. At the top of the disk management window you can now see that a striped volume has been created.
151
6 DELL Digital Delivery
If a new window appears asking to "Complete your software installation", click "I don’t agree"
Note:
This application is related to software directly ordered with new workstation from DELL.
152
Job Card IST C04 - Installation of Windows XP Professional (32-bit) Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to:
• MDS / TechInsight
• Collaboration Server
• DICOM Shuttle
1 Field Engineer
Time: 35’
3-1 Hardware Requirements for Collaboration Server and DICOM Shuttle Node
HP Z600 Workstation Base Unit:
• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.80GT/s QPI, DDR3 800MHz
• HP 4GB(2x2GB)DDR3-1333 ECC 1-CPU/RAM
• NVIDIA Quadro NVS 295 256MB PCIe 1st card
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" 1st HDD
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" 2nd HDD
• No Floppy Disk Option
Note:
For DICOM Shuttle PC and Collaboration Server PC, optionally one control monitor with at least
1280×1024 pixel can be attached.
3-2 Hardware Requirements for MDS and DICOM Shuttle Peripher (Local)
HP Compaq dc7900 Base Model Convertible Minitower PC:
• AR471AV- Intel Core 2 Duo E7500 Processor (3M Cache, 2.93 GHz, 1066 MHz FSB)
• 2GB PC2-5300 (DDR2-667)2x1GB Memory
• HP 250GB SATA NCQ SMART IV 1st HDD
• HP 250GB SATA NCQ SMART IV, 2nd HDD
• HP PS/2 2-Button Optical Scroll Mouse
• SATA 16X SuperMulti LightScribe 1st Drive
• dc7800/7900 CMT 1.44MB Floppy Disk Drive
• NVidia GeForce 8400 GS 256MB DH PCIe x1 Card
MDS and DICOM Shuttle peripher (local) software option require a desktop or tablet PC that fulfills the
following minimal requirements:
• One Intel Core 2 Duo 2.33GHz (or better)
153

• 1x HDD SATA II 60GB (or better)
• Display controller with standard DVI connector
• DVD+-RW double layer
• Localized professional keyboard, Mouse
• Windows XP x32 multilingual
Note:
MDS is intended for non-diagnostic usage only. Consequently only one non-diagnostic display with
at least 1280×1024 pixel is required.
4 Installation of Windows XP (32bit)

Note:
For DICOM Shuttle and Collaboration Server, there are no mouse and keyboard delivered with the
computers.
2. Connect control monitor and power cord to the computer (the network cable may be connected now
or later) and switch the monitor on.
A system image stored on a partition of the hard-disk will be launched automatically to perform the
installation.
4. Select language according to customer specification.
5. Accept the end user license agreement:

6. In the following window choose "Not right now":
7. Enter a computer name and description:
154
8. Choose "skip" for "How will your computer connect to the Internet?".
The internet connection will be setup later.
9. Choose "No, not at this time" for "Ready to register with Microsoft?"
Setup is complete.
155
This page is blank.
156
Job Card IST C44 - Installation of Windows 7 (32-bit) on HP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
• MDS /TechInsight
• DICOM Shuttle
1 Field Engineer
Time: 35’
3-1 Hardware Requirements for Collaboration Server and DICOM Shuttle Node
HP Z600 Workstation Base Unit:
• Intel Xeon Processor E5504 QC 2.00 GHz, 80W, 4M cache, 4.80GT/s QPI, DDR3 800MHz
• HP 4GB(2x2GB)DDR3-1333 ECC 1-CPU/RAM
• NVIDIA Quadro NVS 295 256MB PCIe 1st card
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" 1st HDD
• HP 250GB SATA 7200 rpm 3Gb/s 3.5" 2nd HDD
• No Floppy Disk Option
Note:
For DICOM Shuttle PC and Collaboration Server PC, optionally one control monitor with at least
1280×1024 pixel can be attached.
3-2 Hardware Requirements for MDS and DICOM Shuttle Peripher (Local)
HP Compaq dc7900 Base Model Convertible Minitower PC:
• AR471AV- Intel Core 2 Duo E7500 Processor (3M Cache, 2.93 GHz, 1066 MHz FSB)
• 2GB PC2-5300 (DDR2-667)2x1GB Memory
• HP 250GB SATA NCQ SMART IV 1st HDD
• HP 250GB SATA NCQ SMART IV, 2nd HDD
• HP PS/2 2-Button Optical Scroll Mouse
• SATA 16X SuperMulti LightScribe 1st Drive
• dc7800/7900 CMT 1.44MB Floppy Disk Drive
• NVidia GeForce 8400 GS 256MB DH PCIe x1 Card
157

1. Connect mouse and keyboard to any USB port. Connect control monitor and power cord to the
computer (the network cable may be connected now or later).
Press F9 to get the boot menu:
3. The following screens will be displayed: select the Hard Drive as the Boot Device. Change your
setting via the arrow keys.
158
5. The following screen will be displayed:
6. Select language according to customer specification. Confirm by clicking [Next].
7. Choose a user name for your account (e.g. "ImageDiagnost") and a name for your computer. Confirm
by clicking [Next].
8. Set a password for your account(e.g "idi"). Confirm by clicking [Next].
159
13. Setup is complete.
160
Job Card IST A36 - ATI Driver Setup
Job Card IST A36 - ATI Driver Setup Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• ATI Med Fire GL V5600 graphics controller board or better installed.
• ATI driver software CD
4 ATI Driver Setup

1. Insert the ATI driver CD in the PC.
2. Click on Setup application.
3. Click [Next] to install the software.
161
4. Accept the license agreement.
5. Choose Express installation mode and click [Next>].
6. Continue the installation.
162
7. Wait for the software to install.
8. Choose to restart the computer and click [Finish].
163
5 Windows Displays Settings Configuration
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Display, tab "Settings".

The Display field (1) shows which monitor is attached to which graphic card.
2. Adjust the screen resolution (2): 2560x1600 pixel.
164
Job Card IST A06 - Network Connection Setup on Windows XP
Job Card IST A06 - Network Connection Setup on Windows XP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• CAT6 Hospital Network cables must be used for Gigabit speed.
4 Physical Connection
1. Connect the RJ45 connector to one network card ports.
HP Z800
HP Z600 HP DC7900
5 Configuration of IP Address
1. Click on Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Network Connections and right click on "Local area connection"
properties.
Note:
In case the Control Panel window opens in Category View, click Switch to Classic View.
165
Note:
Since there are two network cards, there are also two "Local area connections". Choose the one
that corresponds to the port the network cable is connected to.
2. Scroll down to "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and click on the button [Properties].
3. Enter the static IP address that was provided by the customer (A).
166
Note:
a) All IDI Workstations PCs have to be online and remotely accessible at any time.
b) There is no need to specify DNS servers (B). If the network administrator provides the IP of a
DNS Server, this can be entered here.
167
This page is blank.
168
Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on Windows 7
Job Card IST A07 - Network Connection Setup on Windows 7 Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• CAT6 Hospital Network cables must be used for Gigabit speed.
4 Physical Connection
1. Connect the RJ45 connector to one network card port.
DELL T5600 HP Z800
HP Z600 HP DC7900
5 Configuration of IP Address
1. Click on Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Network and Internet ➜ Network and Sharing Center
2. On the left side click Change adapter settings.
3. Right click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.
169
Note:
In case the workstation has two or more interfaces, make sure to select the correct Local Area
Connection.
4. Checkmark "InternetProtocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click on [Properties].
5. Checkmark "Use the following IP address".

6. Enter the static IP address that was provided by the customer (A).
170
Note:
If the static IP address is not yet available, choose "Obtain an IP address automatically". This
requires that a DHCP server is available in the local network.
Note:
If a dynamic IP address was chosen, make sure to change the dynamic IP address to the static IP
address as provided by the network administrator of the final destination once the configuration is
finished.
Note:
a) All IDI Workstations PCs have to be online and remotely accessible at any time.
b) There is no need to specify DNS servers (B). If the network administrator provides the IP of a
DNS Server, this can be entered here.
171
This page is blank.
172
Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI
Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
NA
4 Run Microsoft Windows Updates

! Notice:
If you are planning to use RIS IC or the IDI RIS IC adapter on this machine, you should not install
the update to Internet Explorer 9. RIS IC can only run on Internet Explorer 8.
1. Ensure that the computer is connected to the internet.

2. Click on Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Windows Update.
3. On the right side, click on [Turn automatic update on].
4. Click on [Check for updates].
5. After checking for updates, click on [Install updates].
173
6. Accept the license terms and click [Finish].

Note:
Depending on the required updates, you are sometimes asked to reboot even though the process
is not complete (i.e. Internet Explorer 7 update).
Verification: To ensure that all updates have been installed, return once more to the windows update and
check for updates.
Note:
If no internet connection is available you must install the Microsoft.net Framework (the manual
installation procedure is described in section Dotnet 4.0 Errors: on page 208).
5 Remote Desktop Activation

Note:
The activation of the remote desktop is optional.
Refer to section 13 Remote Desktop Software for more information.
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security ➜ System ➜ Remote settings (on the left side).
2. Checkmark "Allow connections from computers running any version of remote desktop (less
secure)".
6 Performance Adjustment
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security ➜ System ➜ Advanced system settings - tab
"Advanced".
2. In the tab Advanced go to section Performance and click on [Settings].
174
3. In tab "Visual effects", select "Adjust for best performance".
4. Click [Apply] ➜ the windows appearance will change to windows standard theme.
7 Disable Error Reporting

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security ➜ Action Center.
2. Expand "Maintenance" and select "Settings".
175
3. Checkmark "Never check for solutions (not recommended)".
8 Turn off Automatic Updates

! Notice:
Automatic Windows Updates can have significant impact on the performance of the
MammoWorkstation. It is therefore recommended to turn off Automatic Windows Updates.
However, if the customer requires that Automatic Windows Updates is active, it is the responsibility
of the customer to ensure that the system passes the acceptance test after any Windows Update.
See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
Turn off automatic updates:

1. Select Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Windows Update.
2. On the left side click on "Change settings".
3. Under section "Important updates" ➜ in the drop down menu select "Never check for updates (not
recommended)".
176
9 Power Options Modifications

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Hardware and Sound ➜ Power Options.
2. Expand "Show additional plans".
3. Select "High Performance".

4. Click on "Change Plan Settings".
• In the drop down menu next to "Turn off the display", select the time after which the display shall
be turned off.
Note:
For a four monitor setup it is recommended to set the "Turn off the display" to Never.
5. Click on "Change advanced power settings".

• Expand "Hard disk" ➜ expand "turn off hard disk after" ➜ set "Setting (Minutes)" to "Never".
• (Optional:) Install graphic card driver to deactivate the stand-by (Sleep) mode.
Note:
For further information on installing a specific graphic card driver, refer to the Hardware Installation
Manual.
• Expand "Sleep" ➜ expand "Hibernate after" ➜ set "Setting (Minutes)" to "Never".
177
6. Save the settings by clicking [Save changes].
10 Windows Domain Membership

Note:
If the customer requires the MammoWorkstation to be member of a domain, it is important to
guarantee the following:
- Read + write access for the folders "dbcache" and "ProgramFiles/ImageDiagnost".
- Local admin rights (i.e. to restart services).
11 Antivirus Software
! Notice:
Antivirus software can have significant impact on the performance of the MammoWorkstation. It is
therefore recommended to turn off any antivirus software.
• To turn off the Antivirus software, select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security.
However, if the customer requires that an Antivirus software is running observe the following
instructions:
1. Preparation:
• import and load several cases (note the number of cases)
• pay attention on how long it takes to import and load these cases
2. Procedure:
• Make sure the following folders and files are not scanned by the Antivirus software:
- the IDI Cache folder ("dbcache")
- the Image Diagnost Folder in the Windows Program Files: %IDI_Home%
- all files with ".dcm" extension
- the PostgreSQL Folder in: %IDI_Home%/dbdata
178
• Make sure the following services and applications are - depending on Antivirus software used-
not exclusively locked by the Antivirus software while the workstation is in use:
Folder dbcache
Services ApacheTomcat6forIDI
IDIDakotaClientService
IDDatabase
IDDicomReceiveSCP
IDDicomWorklistSCP
Application MammoWorkstation.exe
! Notice:
Antivirus scan must not be performed while operators are using the MammoWorkstation.
Example: A full scan can be scheduled daily at 11pm.
3. Validation: After installing an Antivirus software, check the performance of the MammoWorkstation
by:
• importing and opening several cases (the same number of cases as before).
• comparing the loading time to the performance prior to the Antivirus software installation.
! Notice:
If the loading time is significantly longer than it was before, it is recommended to uninstall the
Antivirus software. Otherwise the performance of the MammoWorkstation will be impaired.
Note:
In the past, IDI customers have used the following Antivirus Software option:
- Antivirus option by Trend Micro
So far, this option had no noticeable impact on the performance of the MammoWorkstation. This
Antivirus Software has not been validated and due to continuous change and update procedures
every Antivirus Software is subject to, an undisturbed performance can not be assured for the
future.
Note:
If the customer requires that an Antivirus software is running, make sure that the system passes
the acceptance test. See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
179
12 Action Center
2. On the left side click on the "Change Action Center settings":
180
3. Uncheck:
• Windows Updates
• Network Firewall
• Virus Protection
13 Remote Desktop Software

It is indispensable for Image Diagnost to access the workstation PCs remotely for:
• Maintenance
• Updates
• Troubleshooting
• Configuration
• Training issues
It is possible to employ RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol), which is already a component of Windows 7. In
that case, be sure that a user password is set. Otherwise RDP will not work. The disadvantage though, is
that while being connected remotely to a system via RDP no interaction of the user on the other end is
possible. Thus connections for training and demonstration purposes are not viable.
Therefore we recommend a freeware tool such as VNC (see Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation on
page 263). Any other appropriate tool can be used as well.
Note:
After installing a Remote Software tool, make sure the system passes the acceptance test. See
Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
181
14 Change User Account Control Settings

2. On the left side select "Change User Account Control Settings".
3. Change the slider to
"Never notify me when:
• Programs try to install software or make changes to my computer
• I make changes to Windows settings":
4. Apply changes by clicking [OK].
15 Mouse Pointer Properties

Note:
This configuration is only necessary for Windows 7 installation with review monitors.
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Hardware and Sound. In the section Devices and Printers, select
Mouse.
2. A dialog window will open. Select the tab "Pointers".
182
3. In the drop down menu (1), select "Windows Standard (large) (system scheme)".
4. Click [Apply] to implement the configuration. Click [OK] to exit the menu.
183
This page is blank.
184
Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI
Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
NA
4 Run Microsoft Windows Updates

1. Ensure that the computer is connected to the internet.
2. Click on Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Windows Update.
3. Select Express ➜ Download ➜ Install Now
4. When the installation is complete, restart the workstation PC.
Note:
Depending on the required updates, you are sometimes asked to reboot even though the process
is not complete (i.e. Internet Explorer 7 update).
Verification: To ensure that all updates have been installed, return once more to the windows update and
check for updates.
Note:
If no internet connection is available you must install the Microsoft.net Framework (the manual
installation procedure is described in section Dotnet 4.0 Errors: on page 208).
5 Remote Desktop Activation

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System - tab "Remote" .
185
2. Check-mark "Allow users to connect remotely to this computer".
6 Performance Adjustment
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System - tab "Advanced", section "Performance" .
2. Click on button [Settings].
3. In tab "Visual effects" select "Adjust for best performance".
7 Disable Error Reporting

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System - tab "Advanced".
2. Click on button [Error Reporting].
3. In tab "Error Reporting" select "Disable error reporting" and uncheck "But notify me when critical
errors occur".
186
8 Turn off Automatic Updates

! Notice:
Automatic Windows Updates can have significant impact on the performance of the
MammoWorkstation. It is therefore recommended to turn off Automatic Windows Updates.
However, if the customer requires that Automatic Windows Updates is active, it is the responsibility
of the customer to ensure that the system passes the acceptance test after any Windows Update.
See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
187
Turn off automatic updates:

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System - tab "Automatic Updates".
2. Select "Turn off Automatic Updates" .
9 Power Options Modifications

1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Power Options - tab "Power Schemes".
2. Set up the following:
• Power schemes: "Always on"
• Turn off monitor: according to user preference
Note:
For a four monitor setup it is recommended to set the "Turn off monitor" to Never.
• Turn off hard-disks: Never
• System standby: Never
- System hibernates: Never
188
10 Windows Domain Membership

Note:
If the customer requires the MammoWorkstation to be member of a domain, it is important to
guarantee the following:
- Read + write access for the folders "dbcache" and "ProgramFiles/ImageDiagnost".
- Local admin rights (i.e. to restart services).
11 Antivirus Software
! Notice:
Antivirus software can have significant impact on the performance of the MammoWorkstation. It is
therefore recommended to turn off any antivirus software.
• To turn off the Antivirus software, select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Security Center.
However, if the customer requires that an Antivirus software is running observe the following
instructions:
1. Preparation:
• import and load several cases (note the number of cases)
• pay attention on how long it takes to import and load these cases .
2. Procedure:
• Make sure the following folders and files are not scanned by the Antivirus software:
- the IDI Cache folder ("dbcache")
189
- the Image Diagnost Folder in the Windows Program Files

- 64bit systems (MammoWorkstation): C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost
- 32bit systems (DICOM Shuttle, Collaboration Server, MDS): C:\Program Files\
ImageDiagnost
- all files with ".dcm" extension
- the PostgreSQL Folder in:
- C:\Program Files (x86)\Image Diagnost\dbdata
or
- C:\Program Files\Image Diagnost\dbdata
• Make sure the following services and applications are - depending on Antivirus software used-
not exclusively locked by the Antivirus software while the workstation is in use:
Folder dbcache
Services ApacheTomcat6forIDI
IDIDakotaClientService
IDDatabase
IDDicomReceiveSCP
IDDicomWorklistSCP
Application MammoWorkstation.exe
! Notice:
Antivirus scan must not be performed while operators are using the MammoWorkstation.
Example: A full scan can be scheduled daily at 11pm.
3. Validation: After installing an Antivirus software, check the performance of the MammoWorkstation
by:
• importing and opening several cases (the same number of cases as before).
• comparing the loading time to the performance prior to the Antivirus software installation.
! Notice:
If the loading time is significantly longer than it was before, it is recommended to uninstall the
Antivirus software. Otherwise the performance of the MammoWorkstation will be impaired.
Note:
In the past, IDI customers have used the following Antivirus Software option:
- Antivirus option by Trend Micro
So far, this option had no noticeable impact on the performance of the MammoWorkstation. This
Antivirus Software has not been validated and due to continuous change and update procedures
every Antivirus Software is subject to, an undisturbed performance can not be assured for the
future.
Note:
If the customer requires that an Antivirus software is running, make sure that the system passes
the acceptance test. See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
12 Computer Name Setting Addition
190
1. Open File Explorer, right click on MyComputer and select Properties.
2. Select tab Computer Name and click [Change].
3. In Computer Name field, enter the new computer name, then click [OK].
Note:
Type 15 characters max (e.g. "Helens-Shuttle1")
4. Reboot the computer.
191
13 Alert Settings
1. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Security Center.
2. On the left side, click on the "change the way security center alerts me" and uncheck:
• Firewall
• Automatic Updates
• Virus Protection
14 Remote Desktop Software

It is indispensable for Image Diagnostic to acces the workstation PCs remotely for:
• Maintenance
• Updates
• Troubleshooting
• Configuration
• Training issues
It it possible to employ RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol), which is already a component of XP. In that
case, be sure that a user password is set. Otherwise RDP won’t work. The disadvantage though, is that
while being connected remotely to a system via RDP no interaction of the user on the other end is
possible. Thus connections for training and demonstration purposes are not viable.
Therefore we recommend a freeware tool such as VNC (see Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation on
page 263). Any other appropriate tool can be used as well.
Note:
After installing a Remote Software tool, make sure the system passes the acceptance test. See
Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
192
Job Card IST A54 - Pre-installation License Request
Job Card IST A54 - Pre-installation License Request Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5'
3 Requirements
• Internet connection
• IDI Software DVD v.4.7.0
4 Installation Code Generator

Note:
To operate the system, a valid license for Image Diagnost Software is required. The license key
depends on the PC hardware.
To complete the Image Diagnost Software installation, a license code needs to be requested. To request
a license code, you first need to create an installation code.
Image Diagnost provides an installation code generator tool, which simplifies the installation code
creation and speeds up the license request process.
Note:
The installation code generator is on the v.4.7.0 software DVD.
4-1 Generate the Installation Code

1. Insert the v.4.7.0 software DVD.
2. Go to MWSInstallationCode\x86\MWSInstallationCode.exe
3. Click on Start ➜ Run, type in "cmd" and hit [Enter].
4. Drag and drop (1) the "MWSInstallationCode.exe" in the opened Command Line window:
193
Job Card IST A54 - Pre-installation License Request
5. Hit [Enter] ➜ the Installation code will be displayed (1):
6. To request the License Code, continue with Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on
page 213, section 4, steps 7. to 9.
194
Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation
Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 IDI Publication on CD/DVD

Two IDI Publication CDs are provided:
1. MammoWorkstation User Publication DVD.
The MammoWorkstation User Publication DVD contains all User Documentation.
2. MammoWorkstation Service Publication CD.
The MammoWorkstation Service Publication CD contains Service Documentation.
! Notice:
At the end of the installation process, the IDI Publication CD and DVD (User and Service) must be
given to the customer to make sure the customer can consult the CD/DVD on other PCs as well.
Note:
The customer is responsible for regrouping and storing these publication CD-ROMs/DVD in a safe
place. The CD/DVD is needed during the entire life cycle of the MammoWorkstation system.
4 Installing IDI Publications on a Windows PC

Note:
In order to view a publication, the PC must be running a Windows XP/ Windows 7 operating
system, and Acrobat Reader version 7.0 or above must be installed.
To install the publications on a Windows PC, proceed as follows:

1. Insert the Publications CD-ROM (or DVD) into the CD-ROM drive of a Windows PC. An Autorun
Home Page appears giving you the choice between installing the User/Service Publications on the
PC or viewing them directly from the CD-ROM (or DVD).
Note:
The Autorun Home Page is always in English. If the Autorun Home Page does not appear, please
refer to section 4-1 Autorun Home Page Opening Issue.
2. Read the license agreement and click on [I Agree] to get to the next step.
3. Select the option [Install the Class A User Manuals on your PC] / [Install the Class A Service Manual
on your PC] and click on [Install].
4. Before removing the CD-ROM (or DVD), click on the [Exit] button to close the Autorun Home Page.
5. The CD/DVD content will be installed under:
• for Service Documentation: C:\Program Files\GEHC\MammoServicePubs
• for User Documentation: C:\Program Files\GEHC\MammoUserPubs
195
Job Card IST A11 - IDI Publication Installation
4-1 Autorun Home Page Opening Issue

The windows operating system on your PC may be configured with the Autorun feature disabled. If the
Autorun feature is disabled on your PC, the Autorun Home Page will not automatically appear when you
insert the CD-ROM (or DVD).
If the Autorun Home Page does not appear on your PC, browse the root of the CD-ROM (or DVD) and
double click on the Autorun.exe file. The Autorun Home Page will then appear.
196
Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation
Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’ up to 2 hours
3 IDI Application Installation

The MammoWorkstation Software DVD contains all MammoWorkstation software and the
MammoWorkstation Software Installation Manual.
! Notice:
Make sure there are at least 10 GB available on the C: drive before you start the installation.
1. Insert the MammoWorkstation Software DVD.

2. Follow the instructions of the MammoWorkstation software setup program and execute
Setup_ImageDiagnost_[version].exe. The installation folder will have the following path:
C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost
! Notice:
For Windows 7: Always start the MammoWorkstation as Administrator:
- Right click on "Setup_ImageDiagnost_[version]_[…].exe and click Run as administrator.
- Confirm "User Account Control" query.
197
3. Start the installation by clicking on [Next].
4. Accept the License Agreement by clicking [I Agree].
5. In the text field, write the following path:

d:\dbcache
and click [Next] to start the installation. The folder "dbcache" will be automatically created at this
address.
Note:
Please be aware that the cache folder must be on a separate partition. For more information on
how to create a volume, go to:
- Windows 7: Creation of RAID 0 (Striped Volume) on page 141
- Windows XP: Creation of RAID 0 (Striped Volume) on page 133
198
6. On the next screen, decide whether you want to automatically set up the firewall and click [Next].
Note:
For recommended Firewall settings, go to:
- Windows 7: Firewall on page 822.
- Windows XP: Firewall on page 829.
7. On the “Setup DICOMDIR with sample files” screen decide if you want to set up the DICOMDIR with
sample files.
Note:
If the “Setup DICOMDIR with sample files” is checked, a Samples Source will be added to the
Datasource of the system. This consists of demo patients with demo images for different system
199
options. For more information on how to access the demo images, go to Job Card CFG C72 -
Loading Sample Images from IDI Software DVD.
8. Once you have decided, click on [Install]:
200
9. Click on [Show details] to follow the installation procedure details.
Note:
The step launching Microsoft .Net 4 installer might take up to two hours. If Microsoft .Net 4 is
already installed on the system, then this step will be skipped.
10. The following message might be displayed:

a. For Windows XP: Click on [No] ➜ the installation procedure will continue without starting the
IDDicomReceiveSCP service. This will require a restart at the end of the installation procedure.
b. For Windows 7: Click on [Yes] ➜ the system will retry to start the IDDicomReceiveSCP service.
Note:
If retrying to start the IDDicomReceiveSCP service was not successful, the warning will be
displayed again ➜ click on [No]. This will require a restart at the end of the installation procedure.
201
11. The following message might also be displayed.

IDDicomWorklistSCP service. This will require a restart at the end of the installation procedure.
b. For Windows 7: Click on [Yes] ➜ the system will retry to start the IDDicomWorklistSCP service. If
retrying to start the IDDicomWorklistSCP service was not successful, the warning will be
12. Click [Finish] to close the Image Diagnost 4.7.0 Setup Wizard.
13. In some cases, a reboot might be required. See Reboot Messages: on page 208.
202
14. When the installation process is complete:

a. The Installation_4.7.0.log file will pop up on the screen. For the moment, the file can be closed.
b. The GE Windows themes: the Personalization (on Windows 7) or the Display Properties window
(on Windows XP) will also pop up, displaying a couple of GE Windows themes:
- On Windows 7: A GE theme is automatically applied to the system during the installation
process, so the Personalization window can be closed. If this step was not successful during
the installation, an error will show in the Installation log file and the theme needs to be
manually applied (see GE Windows Theme Errors: on page 209). However, the GE theme is
applied only to the current Windows account, and it must be manually applied to the other
user accounts.
- On Windows XP: A GE theme is not automatically applied during the installation. In order to
activate a GE theme, choose the desired theme from the Display Properties window and click
[OK] or [Apply]. This will have to be repeated manually on all user accounts.
Note:
The GE theme can be changed at any time without affecting the IDI software functionality.
c. The license screen:
- On Windows 7, the license screen will appear automatically.
- On Windows XP, the system must be restarted before continuing with the license procedure.
For the license procedure, go to Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on page 213.
Note:
To complete the installation of a DICOM Shuttle, refer to Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle
Configuration on page 433.
15. The next step:
- On Windows 7: go to Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks on page 207 to check for
errors that might have occurred during the installation process.
- On Windows XP: first proceed with the Image Mastering API installation as described below,
and then go to Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks on page 207 to check for errors
that might have occurred during the installation process.
4 Image Mastering API v2.0 Installation for Windows XP

The installation of the Image Mastering API v2.0 is not necessary on Windows 7.
Note:
Installing Image Mastering API v2.0 software is mandatory to make use of the features "Patient
CD" and "DICOM CD" within the IDI application.
- The Image Mastering API v2.0 is automatically copied on the local disk once the Software
installation process is complete. A copy of Image Mastering API v2.0 should be found at:
C:/install/installer/imapi
- If it cannot be found on the local disk, this can be copied manually from the IDI Software DVD
(folder imapi). Then follow the procedures below:
• On Windows XP 64-bit, you need to install the 64-bit version of Image Mastering API v2.0.
• On Windows XP 32-bit, you need to install the 32-bit version of Image Mastering API v2.0.
203
Note:
Make sure to choose the correct language for the Image Mastering API v.2.0 corresponding to your
Windows operating system.
1. Launch the Image Mastering API v2.0 installer. At the beginning a warning will be displayed. Click
[Run].
2. The Installation Wizard will be displayed. Click [Next].
204
3. Accept the license and click [Next].
4. The software will be installed.

a. On Windows XP 32-bit, the wizard needs to restart Windows to apply the changes. If you decide
to restart later, tick the Do not restart now checkbox(1).
Click [Finish] to exit the Software Update Installation Wizard.
b. On Windows XP 64-bit, click [Finish] to exit the Software Update Installation Wizard.
205
This page is blank.
206
Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks
Job Card IST A15 - Post-Installation Checks Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
The following steps must be done when the software installation process is complete.
Note:
While waiting for the IDI license, the system configuration and system test can be carried out by
following these steps to register with a generic license (for procedures, see Job Card IST M14 -
Temporary IDI Application Licensing on page 221).
4 Unsuccessful installation
If the installation process fails for any reason, escalate to the next GE service level.
Please have the information included in the temporary Installation log file within reach.
Note:
This file can be found at the following address: %TEMP%
207
5 Complete Installation
5-1 Check the Installation Log File for Errors
For a more accurate verification of the installation process, log out of the Windows Administrator account
and perform the checks while logged in to the user account.
5-1-1 Installation Log File Overview
On the user account, go to: %IDI_Home%\log and open the Installation_4.7.0 (10868).log file.
Note:
The name of the file might vary, depending on the release and build number of the software.
This log file informs you whether the installation process encountered any errors.
! Notice:
If one of the lines starts with "ERROR" or "WARNING" instead of "INFO" and you are not sure how
to fix the error, please escalate to the next GE service level for assistance.
5-1-2 Service Errors:

The following "WARNING" message is the result of the services IDDicomWorklistSCP and
IDDicomReceiveSCP, that could not be started earlier in the installation process. The presence of these
messages requires a restart of the system:
- WARNING: Service not started, system will require a restart.
5-1-3 Reboot Messages:

In some cases, a reboot might be required before carrying out with the following steps. Check the
Installation log file for corresponding messages:
- INFO: A restart is required to complete the installation.
- INFO: A restart is required to complete the installation.
5-1-4 Dotnet 4.0 Errors:

The following error messages are related to the faulty installation of Dotnet 4.0:
- ERROR: A fatal error occurred during installation of .Net 4.
208
- ERROR: The computer does not meet system requirements of .Net 4.
When at least one of these messages are present in the installation log file, try to manually run the
Windows Dotnet 4.0 installer:
a. Go to: C:\install\installer\microsoft\windows_dotnet_4.0
b. Execute the dotNetFx40_Full_x86_x64.exe.
c. Click [Yes] when being asked if you would like to install Microsoft.Net Framework 4.0 Package
d. The software will be installed.
Note:
If this fails, please escalate to the next GE service level.
5-1-5 IPv6 Errors:

The following message is included in the installation log file when IPv6 is successfully deactivated during
the installation process:
INFO: IPv6 support is going to be disabled.
INFO: netsh returned: Ok.
Note:
Any other message related to IPv6 indicates an unsuccessful action and will require a manual
deactivation of the IPv6:
- Windows 7: Deactivate IPv6 on page 824.
- Windows XP: Deactivate IPv6 on page 831.
5-1-6 Windows User Account Errors:

If any errors in the installation log file are related to the creation of Windows user accounts, this step will
have to be performed manually.
- Windows 7: Windows User Account Creation on page 819.
- Windows XP: Windows User Account Creation on page 825.
5-1-7 GE Windows Theme Errors:

The GE Windows theme is automatically applied by the 4.7.0 installer, but only to the account on which
the installation is performed. Therefore, regardless of Windows theme-related messages in the log file, a
GE theme will always have to be applied manually to the user account. For details on how to apply a GE
theme, please refer to Job Card IST A18 - Windows Theme Configuration on page 231.
5-1-8 Firewall Settings

To make sure that the recommended firewall settings are applied, go to:
- Windows 7: Firewall on page 822.
- Windows XP: Firewall on page 829.
! Notice:
Once the verification is over, copy and paste all the information from this installation file into the
Acceptance Test (see Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473).
209
5-2 Environment Variable %IDI_HOME%

Verify the existence of the environment variable %IDI_HOME%
For Windows 7:
1. Right click on "My Computer"
2. Select Properties.
3. Select Advanced system settings.
4. Select the "Advanced" tab.
5. Click on the "Environment Variable" button.
For Windows XP:
1. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System
2. Select the "Advanced" tab.
3. Click on the "Environment Variable" button.
! Notice:
Do not change or delete this environment variable!
6 Folder for Custom Files

To make sure to keep your proprietary files (e.g. batch files, sql files, notes, interface command files,
case collections, etc.) the setup automatically creates a folder named custom under: %IDI_HOME%
Please move all customized files / scripts to this folder and make sure to also change the links to the
moved files.
Note:
The existence of this folder is important to make sure to keep your proprietary files during the next
installation procedure. The folder %IDI_Home%\custom will be kept during the installation
procedure.
210
7 New Database Technologies

Up to IDI software version 4.6.0, IDI used the MySQL 4.0.13 database. Starting with IDI software version
4.6.1, IDI uses the PostgreSQL database.
Important information regarding the new PostgreSQL database:
• PostgreSQL is automatically installed to: %IDI_Home%\thirdparty\PGSQL-9.1
• PostgreSQL datafiles are placed in: %IDI_Home%\dbdata
• The PostgreSQL service is named IDDatabase
The PostgreSQL service is listening on port 27778.
Note:
PostgreSQL is not using the default service name, the default port or the default folder, so there is
no interfering with a probably existing default PostgreSQL installation.
If you are familiar with SQL, you can use pgAdmin III. To access pgAdmin III, go to:
Start ➜ ImageDiagnost ➜ Tools ➜ pgAdmin.
211
This page is blank.
212
Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing
Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:10’
Note:
To operate the system, a valid license for Image Diagnost Software is required. The license key
depends on the PC hardware.
4 Installation Code Creation

Note:
If any of the IDI systems handles DBT images, make sure to request a DBT license for the DICOM
Shuttles included in the network.
The installation code describes the hardware and system environment.

1. Start the MammoWorkstation application ➜ the License screen will be displayed.
213
2. Click on [Display license agreement].
3. Click [Accept].
214
4. Click on [Request license].
Module Description
MammoWorkstation Workstation particularly designed for diagnostic

reading.
CD Viewer This option is not relevant for the actual workstations.
This is the license the CD viewer uses.
Mammo DS Workstation particularly designed for anamnesis and
clinical documentation.
Centricity Imaging Viewer PACS Viewer / Universal Viewer
V5.0
Reporting Module Enables the user to see the "Report" tab in the
software, in order to create reports and synchronize
them via HL7 or with MPPS. It is also needed to
receive reports.
215
Module Description
Quick Negative Only valid for MRS integration.

Feature to use Negative reporting.
Workflow Module Allows IDI to query external workflows. Without this
module the software cannot retrieve worklists.
Backlight creation Allows post processing of RAW images with Backlight.
Premium View creation Enables post processing of GE-RAW images with
Premium View
DBT Digital Breast Tomosynthesis - Tomo
Allows receiving of Tomo objects (Slabs, Planes,
RAW, V-Preview).
Allows manual export of Slabs and Planes.
V-Preview Extended Addition to DBT Module
Functionality Removes "not for diagnosis" label in V-Preview.
Allows receiving and manual export of Tomo objects
(Slabs, Planes, RAW, V-Preview).
NOT ALLOWED IN ALL COUNTRIES
CollaborationServer Activates WorklistSCP, which allows task creation.
Enables Worklist Broker configuration, which allows
systems to query worklists for CS.
DicomShuttle Allows Broker and Worklist query - equal to
Collaboration Server.
5. The “Installation Code” will be displayed:
Installation Code
6. Copy this code.

7. Connect to the Internet (from any PC) and go to: http://www.imagediagnost.de/support/license.html
8. Fill in all fields. To obtain a license, perform the following:
- identify yourself,
- identify the customer order with the purchased options, and
216
- provide the "Installation Code" created above.
Note:
For a MWS standalone license request (single MammoWorkstation including a Collaboration
Server), use MammoWorkstation (stand-alone) as the Ordered system configuration:
Note:
The following Licensing options from the WebPage correspond to different names in the License
screen of your workstation.
- "Tomo" corresponds to "DBT"
- "PACS Viewer" corresponds to "Centricity Imaging Viewer V5.0".
9. Press [Send] to send the completed form.
217
! Notice:
License codes are only issued during Munich office hours: Monday to Friday, 8:00-17:00 (CET).
! Notice:
The license is sent to the e-mail address provided in the form. Make sure to spell your e-mail
address correctly. For further inquiries, send an e-mail to idilicense@ge.com.
10. Enter the license code in the License Code field and click on [Finished].
Note:
For a MWS standalone license request, ensure that the Collaboration Server checkbox is checked.
218
11. Click [OK].

The Services will be restarted:
12. Start the MammoWorkstation application again ➜ the Calibration window will be displayed:
Note:
For further information on Calibration, refer to Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration on
page 457.
13. Click [OK]. The Services will be restarted.
14. Continue with Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration on page 227.
219
This page is blank.
220
Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing
Job Card IST M14 - Temporary IDI Application Licensing Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
While the field engineer is waiting for the IDI license, he can continue the system configuration and
system test using the generic license LICENSE-ONLYFOR-INSTALL.
4 Generic License Installation

1. Open the IDI software.
2. Login to Settings and click on [Display license agreement].
221
3. Click [Accept].
4. Click on [Request license] and type LICENSE-ONLYFOR-INSTALL in the License code field:
222
5. Click on [Finish], choose which system you need and click [OK]:
6. On the Configuration window, click [Apply] and [OK] and wait for the services to be restarted.
7. Make sure that the MWSTray is started.
a. To check this, move the mouse cursor over the MWS icon, which will be displayed in the
notification area of the Windows taskbar.
The message MWSTray MWSTray@username@PCname connected should appear.
b. If no MWS icon is visible, go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray.
A MWS icon should then appear in the notification area of the Windows taskbar.
c. If the MWS icon is visible but marked with an error icon, check if the Apache Tomcat service is
started:
- Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage.
- On the Computer Management window, go to Services and Applications ➜ Services.
Alternatively, go to Start ➜ Run, open services.msc
- The Apache Tomcat service must be started:
223
- If the Apache Tomcat service is not started, click on [Start] the service.
- Check if the error icon on the MWS icon has disappeared.

- Make sure that the MWSTray is started.
5 Restrictions
After installing the generic license, when logging in to IDI-Viewing application, images will be displayed
with the following restricted view.
224
Note:
Whenever the system receives DICOM files or
queries a DICOM worklist, the following popup
message will appear every 10 minutes:
There is no known way to circumvent this

blockage.
Therefore, avoid importing too many images.
! Notice:
In case the captcha popup dialog is not correctly displayed, refer to Job Card TSG C09 - Captcha
Dialog Troubleshooting on page 759.
225
6 Generic License Replacement

Once the configuration and testing are complete, make sure to use register with a real IDI license.
1. Login to Settings and go to the License tab:
2. Click on [Display license agreement] and then on [Request license].
3. Replace the generic license with the official license string and click [Finished].
226
Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration
Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Configuration
1. Login to Settings. The default credentials are:
- Name: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
2. On the tab "Local", fill in the following fields:
1. Name of station: this name is used as the station name in DICOM evidence documents (such as
reports or presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo Documentation
Station.
2. Name of institution: this name is used as the institution's name in PDF and DICOM evidence
documents (such as reports or presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo
Documentation Station.
1
2
3
227
Job Card IST A16 - Mandatory Configuration
3. Institution Address: this address is used as the institution's address in PDF and DICOM evidence
documents (such as reports or presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo
4. Own AE Title (Other DICOM partners, e.g. a PACS archive, must know this AE Title.)
5. The path to the folder "dbcache" that you inserted during the installation procedure will be
indicated.
Note:
The file cache must be on a separate partition. For MammoWorkstation this is a dedicated RAID
0 partition.
6. Establish the cache size.
Keep the cache as small as possible.
You can calculate the required cache size from the types of documents and the amount of
examinations they do:
- On an MWS/MDS you should have all images and reports (~200 MB per patient) for the last
three weeks. Therefore the cache size should be 200 MB x amount of exams per three weeks.
! Notice:
The MWS will be slowed down by a huge cache. Consequently, keep the cache as small as
possible while holding all documents the physician needs.
- On DSH the cache must only hold the documents that are routed at the moment. Therefore
the cache size should be the approximately the data amount that is required for three days.
- On CS you typically have only SR and PR documents stored. These are about 1 MB per
patient. Therefore a 5 GB cache should be sufficient.
! Notice:
On CS and DSH the cache size cannot be too small. If a document has not completed all
forwarding- / export- steps it will not expire. Consequently, the bigger you make the cache the
slower you database will react.
3. Click [OK] after completion ➜ the services will be restarted.
4 Verification (MammoWorkstation)
1. Login to MammoWorkstation using
- Login: "demo"
- Password: "demo"
This completes the mandatory configuration.
228
Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for Mammo Documentation Station
Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for Mammo Documentation
Station Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MDS / TechInsight.
1 Field Engineer
Time:5’
3 Introduction
If the Reporting Module is licensed, the Reporting mask in the IDI application will be available.
While setting up a Mammo Documentation Station, the Reporting Mask Type needs to be adapted to
meet the requirements of the Mammo Documentation Station.
4 Configure Reporting Mask Type

1. Go to Support Interface.
2. Open the Configuration Folder.
3. Edit the MammoWorkstation.ini.
4. Look for section [Modality Settings].

5. Edit the following tags and replace the default parameters:
Tags with default parameters for MWS:
• ReportingWorkflow = STD
• ReportingMaskType = REPORTING
Tags after modification for MDS:
• ReportingWorkflow = STD (For Germany, put "MASC2" or "MAMMASOFT")
• ReportingMaskType = AQUISITIONDOCU
or
• ReportingMaskType = CLINICALDOCU
Note:
In the CLINICALDOCU view, the Imaging Parameters, which are required in the
AQIUSITIONDOCU, don't need to be filled in.
229
Job Card IST A17 - Reporting Mask Configuration for Mammo Documentation Station
6. Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
230
Job Card IST A18 - Windows Theme Configuration
Job Card IST A18 - Windows Theme Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS and MDS.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Procedure
Note:
In Windows 7, a GE theme is automatically applied during the IDI software installation process. If
this step was skipped during the installation, one of the GE themes can be applied manually.
This is not a mandatory step and can be changed at any time, without affecting the functionality of
the IDI software.
3-1 Manual GE Theme Application in Windows 7:

1. From the Windows Desktop right-click menu, select Personalize:
231
2. From the Personalization window, choose the desired GE theme:
3. Click [Apply] to validate your choice. This step might last up to 10 seconds.
3-2 Manual GE Theme Application in Windows XP:

1. From the Windows Desktop right-click menu, select Properties:
232
2. From the Display Properties window, choose the desired GE theme:
3. Click [Apply] to validate your choice. This step might last up to 10 seconds.
233
This page is blank.
234
Job Card IST A19 - Additional Language Files for Windows XP
Job Card IST A19 - Additional Language Files for Windows XP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
Note:
This job card only applies to countries where either East Asian languages or complex script and
right-to-left languages are used.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Install Additional Language Files

Note:
Under Windows 7 the East Asian languages and complex script and left to right languages are
already installed by default.
1. Go Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Regional and Language Options.

2. Go to the tab Languages.
3. Enable the check box next to Install files for East Asian languages.
➜ at the dialog box informing you about the required space for these language files, click [OK].
235
Job Card IST A19 - Additional Language Files for Windows XP
4. Enable the check box next to Install files for complex script and right-to-left languages (including
Thai).
➜ at the dialog box informing you about the required space for these language files, click [OK].
5. Click [Apply].
6. After installation, you will be asked to restart your computer. Click [Yes].
236
Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 20
Job Card IST C48 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad
X-keys 20 Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to systems with Windows XP and Windows 7.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• IDI keypad, P/N 5314876
4 Installation
Note:
Make sure that the right file version is used:
- On a 64-bit Windows, use the following version:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\ keypad\ [yyyymmdd]_keypad_default_64.mw3
(e.g. 20200617_keypad_default_64.mw3).
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\ keypad\ [yyyymmdd]_keypad_default_32.mw3
(e.g. 20200617_keypad_default_32.mw3).
Make sure that the correct keypad version 1.0.1.13 of MacroWorks 3 keypad is used. This version is
included in the MammoWorkstation Software version 4.7.0.
237
1. Go to C:\install\xkeys_keypad_x64_1.0.1.13\MW3InstallerWeb.exe.
2. Start the MWS3InstallerWeb.exe:
a. For Windows XP: Double-click on the installation file MWS3InstallerWeb.exe from the install
folder.
b. For Windows 7: Right click on the installation file MW3InstallerWeb.exe from the install folder and
click "Run as administrator":
3. Accept the License Agreement by clicking [I Agree]:
4. Click [Next].
238
5. Click [Install].
6. After the installation is complete, click [Close].

7. After the MacroWorks3 setup is complete, you will be asked to restart your computer. Click [Yes].
8. After the restart, attach the keypad via USB. You can choose any available USB port.
9. Windows will automatically install the device drivers.
10. An icon named "X-keys MacroWorks 3" will be visible in the system tray.
This icon indicates that the device driver has been correctly installed and loaded.
5 Verification of Installation
1. Right click on the icon to display the context menu.
The displayed context menu must look like the following:
239
2. In case the system tray icon is not visible, reactivate it by going to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ P.I.
Engineering ➜ MacroWorks 3 ➜ MacroWorks 3.
3. If this fails, right click on the taskbar and open the Task Manager.
240
4. Highlight the process "MacroWorks3.exe" on the tab "Processes" and click on [End Process] (1).
11
5. Restart MacroWorks3 as described above.
241
6 Configuration
! Notice:
For the GE PACS License, the keypad shortcuts regarding process control (ALT-X, ALT-N, ALT-
B, ALT-K, Alt-PgDn/Ctrl-A) will have limited functionality. These shortcuts have to be configured
according to the Imaging Viewer service documentation and will behave as described in this
documentation.
1. To start the configuration, double-click on the icon in MacroWorks 3 icon in the system-tray to open
the MacroWorks 3 Graphical User Interface.
2. Click on File ➜ Open

3. A File dialog will open.
4. Navigate to the following folder and select the appropriate script:
242
- On a 64-bit Windows, navigate to

%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad and select the file
20100617_keypad_default_64.mw3
- On a 32-bit Windows, go to:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad and select the file
20100617_keypad_default_32.mw3
5. Click on [Open].
6. The Select Device window will open.

Make sure to select the device you are using (e.g. X-keys Desktop MWII") in the drop-down menu
and click [Apply].
7. On the top of the MacroWorks3 window, click on the drop-down menu and select your device (1)
Note:
Make sure the entry with Virtual in front of the device name is NOT selected.
243
Note:
The name of your device (e.g. "X-keys Desktop MWII") is written on the back of the keypad.
8. The "Closing Script!" window appears. In the drop-down menu (1) select your device (e.g."X-keys
Desktop MWII" etc.) and click [Assign] (2).
Note:
The name of your device (e.g."X-keys Desktop MWII" etc.) is written on the back of the keypad.
1
2
244
7 Verification of Configuration
1. Once the X-keys layout has been loaded, check that shortcuts are assigned to each key.
a. The following layout will be displayed:
b. Select Zoom View ➜ the shortcuts assigned to the single keys will be visible.
Note:
The following table shows an example of X-keys settings:
Table 3
Alt-Cursor up Shift-AltCursor up 2(number of MLO protocol) 3(number of CC protocol)
Alt Cursor down Shift-Alt-Cursor down Alt-d Alt-e
Alt-Cursor left Alt-Cursor right Alt-f Alt-i
Alt-j Alt-q Alt-y Alt-r
Alt-Page down Alt-Page up Alt- - Alt-n
2. Come back to this section for validation purpose as soon as images have been imported into the
"dbcache".
245
The shortcut configuration setting shown in the task before is equal to the following labels which can
be added to the keys on the keypad:
Spare keys
(if no reporting)
Note:
Available commands are listed at the end of the operator manual.
The keypad layout can be customized using the MacroWorks 3 software. Labels for spare keys are
provided in %IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation/keypad/.
! Notice:
Correction for Germany only:
The key "enter acr density" is configured with the action "zoom all" due to German specific
keyboard setting.
This key must be re-configured. Follow the instruction in section 8 Customizing the Keypad Layout
to reassign the ACR command to this specific key.
246
8 Customizing the Keypad Layout

To change a key assignment on the keypad, do the following:
1. Start the X-keys GUI.
2. There are two ways to configure this specific key:
a. First configuration option:
- Select Zoom View (1).
- Double click on the key you wish to reprogram.
- Enable the radio button Keystrokes (2).
- Select [Record] (3) to assign a new command to this specific key.
1 3
- Press e.g. [Alt-X] ➜ the result should look like the following (1):
3 2
- Click [Pause] (2).

- Click [Save] (3).
The key is configured.
247
b. Second Configuration option:

- Navigate to
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad.
This page is blank.
- In the X-keys GUI, select Zoom View (1):
1 3
2 4
- Double click on the key you want to customize (2)

- Enable the radio button "Shortcuts" (3).
- Select the path (4) with the mouse ➜ the path will then be visible in the Details row (5).
248
- Select the desired .exe file in %IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad with the mouse.

- Drag the selected .exe file into the Details row (5).
- Click on [Save] (6).
Note:
For further questions, consult the P.I. Engineering helpfile: Go to Start ➜ P.I. Engineering ➜
MacroWorks3 ➜ MacroWorks 3 Help.
249
This page is blank.
250
Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 24Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to systems with operating system Windows XP and Windows 7.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• IDI keypad, P/N 5314876-2
4 Installation
Note:
Make sure that the right file version is used:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\ keypad\IDI_xk24_64.mw3.
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\ keypad\IDI_xk24_32.mw3.
Make sure that the correct keypad version 1.0.1.13 of MacroWorks 3 keypad is used. This version is
included in the MammoWorkstation Software version 4.7.0.
251
1. Go to C:\install\xkeys_keypad_x64_1.0.1.13\MW3InstallerWeb.exe.
2. Start the MWS3InstallerWeb.exe:
a. For Windows XP: Double click on the installation file MWS3InstallerWeb.exe from the install
folder.
b. For Windows 7: Right click on the installation file MW3InstallerWeb.exe from the install folder and
click "Run as administrator":
3. Accept the License Agreement by clicking [I Agree]:
4. Click [Next].
252
5. Click [Install].
6. After the installation is complete, click [Close].

7. After the MacroWorks3 setup is complete, you will be asked to restart your computer. Click [Yes].
8. After the restart, attach the keypad via USB. You can choose any available USB port.
9. Windows will automatically install the device drivers.
10. An icon named "X-keys MacroWorks 3" will be visible in the system tray.
This icon indicates that the device driver has been correctly installed and loaded.
5 Verification of Installation
1. Right click on the icon to display the context menu.
The displayed context menu must look like the following:
253
2. In case the system tray icon is not visible, reactivate it by going to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ P.I.
Engineering ➜ MacroWorks 3 ➜ MacroWorks 3.
3. If this fails, right click on the taskbar and open the Task Manager.
254
4. Highlight the process "MacroWorks3.exe" on the tab "Processes" and click on [End Process] (1).
11
5. Restart MacroWorks3 as described above.
255
6 Configuration
! Notice:
For the GE PACS License, the keypad shortcuts regarding process control (ALT-X, ALT-N, ALT-
B, ALT-K, Alt-PgDn/Ctrl-A) will have limited functionality. These shortcuts have to be configured
according to the Imaging Viewer service documentation and will behave as described in this
documentation.
1. To start the configuration, double-click on the icon in MacroWorks 3 icon in the system-tray to open
the MacroWorks 3 Graphical User Interface.
2. Click on File ➜ Open

3. A File dialog will open.
4. Navigate to the following folder and select the appropriate script:
256
- On a 64-bit Windows, navigate to

%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad and select the file IDI_xk24_64.mw3
- On a 32-bit Windows, go to:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad and select the file IDI_xk24_32.mw3
5. Click on [Open].
6. The Select Device window will open.

Make sure to select the device you are using (X-keys XK-24) in the drop-down menu and click
[Apply].
7. On the top of the MacroWorks3 window, click on the drop-down menu and change Virtual X-keys XK-
24 (1) to X-keys XK-24.
257
Note:
Make sure the entry with Virtual in front of the device name is NOT selected.
8. The "Closing Script!" window appears. In the drop-down menu (1) select the device X-keys XK-24
and click [Assign] (2).
1
2
7 Verification of Configuration
1. Once the X-keys layout has been loaded, check that shortcuts are assigned to each key.
a. The following layout will be displayed:
! Notice:
If the Script has not been applied, i.e. the buttons of the keypad in the configuration window are
blank (not checkmarked), please refer to Job Card TSG A22 - X-keys 24 Keypad Troubleshooting
on page 803.
b. Select Zoom View ➜ the shortcuts assigned to the single keys will be visible.
258
2. Come back to this section for validation purpose as soon as images have been imported into the
"dbcache".
259
The shortcut configuration setting shown above is equal to the following labels which can be added to
the keys on the keypad:
Note:
Available commands are listed in the operator manual.
The keypad layout can be customized using the MacroWorks 3 software. Labels for spare keys are
included in the keypad scope of delivery.
260
8 Customizing the Keypad Layout

To change a key assignment on the keypad, do the following:
1. Start the X-keys GUI.
2. There are two ways to configure this specific key:
a. First configuration option:
- Select Zoom View (1).
- Double click on the key you wish to reprogram.
- Enable the radio button Keystrokes (2).
- Select [Record] (3) to assign a new command to this specific key.
1 3
2
- Press e.g. [Alt-X] ➜ the result should look like the following (1):
3 2
- Click [Pause] (2).

- Click [Save] (3).
261
b. Second Configuration option:

- Navigate to the following folder and select the appropriate script:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad
- In the X-keys GUI, select Zoom View (1):
1 3
4
2
- Double click on the key you want to customize (2)

- Enable the radio button "Shortcut" (3).
- Select the path (4) with the mouse ➜ the path will then be visible in the Details row (5).
- Select the desired .exe file in
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\keypad
- Drag the selected .exe file into the Details row (5).
- Click on [Save] (6) ➜ The key is configured.
Note:
For further questions, consult the P.I. Engineering helpfile: Go to Start ➜ P.I. Engineering ➜
MacroWorks3 ➜ MacroWorks 3 Help.
262
Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation
Job Card IST C60 - VNC Installation Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all PCs with Operating Systems Windows 7 and Windows XP.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• IDI software application DVD.
4 Introduction
Virtual Network Computing (VNC) allows the user to view and fully interact with another computer.
VNC consists of two components: a server, which runs on the computer you want to remotely access,
and a viewer, which runs on the your computer.
A remote desktop software (such as VNC) must be available to diagnose and fix problems.
5 Installation Prerequisite
Make sure that no VNC software is installed.
Uninstall all previous versions of RealVNC or UltraVNC before installing the new UltraVNC version.
6 Installation
1. Go to C:\install\installer\UltraVNC
2. Execute the Install_UVNC.bat:

• for Windows 7: Right click on the batch file Install_UVNC.bat and select "Run as Administrator".
263
• for Windows XP: double click on the Install_UVNC.bat.

➜ The installation routine will install the UltraVNC tool including the default settings automatically:
3. The VNC setup will start.

4. A File Download window will open.
Click [Cancel] to avoid downloading additional software.
5. Click [Yes] to confirm the order NOT to download additional software:
264
6. The following warning message will be displayed.

Click [OK].
7. The Installation process will start:
Note:
The UltraVNC settings are configured automatically including the default password for remote
connections: 1dsupp0rt.
! Notice:
In case an error message appears during installation, the installation was aborted.
Refer to Job Card TSG A04 - Ultra VNC Troubleshooting on page 745.
265
7 Installation Check
Perform the following procedure steps to verify the UltraVNC installation:
1. Click on Start ➜ All Programs ➜ UltraVNC ➜ UltraVNC Viewer:
2. Enter localhost in VNC Server text box (1) and click on [Connect](2):
3. Enter the default password 1dsupp0rt:
4. The VNC window will show the current screen of the system in front of you. If the test to localhost is
successful, this will result in an endless loop of VNC-windows showing your desktop. This is ok and
you can just close the top-most VNC-window.
266
8 Remote Support with Ultra VNC

8-1 New UltraVNC Toolbar
The new UltraVNC toolbar will look like the following:
The following table will explain the single icons of the new UltraVNC toolbar in detail:
Icon Action triggered
Lock / Unlock Windows system ➜ Send “Ctrl-Alt-Del”
command
Activate full screen of UltraVNC window
Open Connection Options window:
• Change color depth and encoding

• Scale viewer
Screen refresh
Send “Start” to open Start menu
267

Send custom key (e.g. Alt - X ➜ close patient) to control
the IDI MammoWorkstation.
Note:
A detailed list of valid keyboard shortcuts can be
found in the MammoWorkstation Operator Manual
(part no. 5376138-7-1EN).
Show VNC Viewer Status:
Close VNC connection
Hide VNC toolbar
Toggle Remote Input and Remote Blank monitor ➜

block display and keyboard on remote system
File transfer (disabled)
Select single window (disabled)
Select full desktop
268

Chat ➜ Activates text messaging between IDI system
and Remote Service Engineer
Note:
In case the chat is open during a VNC session,
[Minimize] the chat window to be able to see
ongoing process on the Ultra VNC window in the
background.
8-2 UltraVNC at IDI MammoWorkstation

A new feature of UltraVNC allows to work in single monitor mode and in multi monitor mode.
For the IDI MammoWorkstation, the single monitor mode will allow the Service Engineer to work only on
the control monitor.
In case the Service Engineer wants to look at the review monitors as well, the multi monitor mode must
be activated.
8-2-1 Activate the Multi-monitor Mode
1. Click on to activate the multi monitoring.

2. Wait for the screen to refresh.
3. Activate remote blank monitor by clicking on .
4. If required, scale viewer in settings by clicking on .
Note:
By using the "Toggle Remote Input" , the user onsite will see a blank monitor.
This setting will increase the performance for the remote user tremendously.
269
8-2-2 Deactivate the Multi-monitor Mode
1. Click on to deactivate the multi monitoring.

2. Wait for the screen to refresh.
3. Deactivate remote blank monitor by clicking on .
4. If required, scale viewer in settings by clicking on .
8-3 Restart UltraVNC Service

In case the UltraVNC service is down or no connection can be established, use the IDI Support Interface
to restart the UltraVNC service:
2. Open the Root Folder (1).
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on [Launch command] (2):
270
4. Stop the Ultra VNC service:

Enter the command "net stop uvnc_service" and click on [Launch]:
Expected result:
5. Start the Ultra VNC service:

Enter the command "net start uvnc_service" and click on [Launch]:
Expected result:]
271
This page is blank.
272
Job Card IST C89 - Installation of Graphic Board Drivers for Eizo 5MP Review Monitors
Job Card IST C89 - Installation of Graphic Board Drivers for Eizo 5MP Review
Monitors Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Purpose
To install graphics board drivers for Eizo 5MP review monitors (from CD or Online).
4 Supplies
• Graphics Board V5800 with 5MP Eizo Monitors GX540
• Graphics Board W5000 with 5MP Monitors SMD21511
5 Check if graphic board drivers are installed

• The graphic driver should be installed automatically.
• Always check in your Device-Manager that the driver for your graphic board is installed. If not, as
shown in the image below, see the next steps.
273
• If the graphic board drivers are not installed on your device, please get the latest EIZO-driver for
W5000/V5800. You have two options to install them:
6 Install graphic boards drivers from CD

1. Open disc in Windows Explorer and run the Autorun.exe.
2. Depending on the graphic board used, choose “FirePro W5000” or “V5800” from the FirePro 3D
Series section on the first screen and wait for the installer verification to complete.
3. Confirm the Installation Folder by clicking “Install”.

4. On the Welcome screen, select the language to be used and click “Next”.
5. Select “Install” as Installation Operation.
274
6. In the Installer Welcome screen choose "Express" and click "Next".
7. Read the End User License Agreement and click "Accept".

8. Wait for the system analysis and installation to finish, and click "Finish" to close the Install
Manager.
9. After reboot, check the Device Manager, that the warning sign disappeared.
7 Install graphic boards drivers from IDI Service community

Obtain them from IDI Service community (http://supportcentral.ge.com/products/
sup_products.asp?prod_id=204517) in Support Central. The driver is named
EIZO_Win7_Vista_8.982.8.3.zip.
Follow these steps in order to install the drivers:
1. Unzip the file and start the Setup.exe.
2. Click "Run" when asked if you want to run this file.
3. On the Welcome screen, select the language to be used and click "Next".
4. Select "Install" as Installation Operation.
5. In the Installer Welcome screen choose "Custom" and click "Next".
6. Click "Yes" on the pop-up window asking to create the installation folder.
7. Wait for the system analysis to finish.
8. On the Customize Install screen, deselect "Catalyst Pro Control Center", then click "Next".
9. To start the installation please read and accept the End User License Agreement and click "Next".
10. When asked if you like to install this device software, click "Install".
11. Wait for the installation of the components to finish and click "Finish" to close the Install Manager.
12. Select "No" when asked to reboot.
275
13. In the Device Manager, check that the warning sign disappeared, then reboot the system.
Note:
For Windows 7, the desired resolution will be possible to select automatically.

• Adjust the resolution for each B&W monitor to 2048*2560
• Update the monitors location from Windows Display Settings to match the correct physical
position:
Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Appearance and Personalization ➜ Adjust screen resolution.
• Drag the monitor icons to match the correct physical position.
Illustration 1 LCD Review Monitors in Right Position - Rear View:
Luminace
Meter
Monitor 3 Monitor 2 Monitor 1
2k x 2k x 2.5k LCD Control

Upper
DVI 2.5k B&W LCD Color monitor
Connectors B&W Review
LCD
Lower
DVI
Connectors DVI/DVI Cables
276
Job Card IST C26 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows XP
Job Card IST C26 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows
XP Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• Graphic Board Med. 5MP2FH
• Barco Software CD
• Barco monitors connected.
Note:
More information regarding the monitors installation is available on:
- http://gein.euro.med.ge.com:8081/engineering/bluehouse/docs/IDI/IDIntro2/
B4100577_02_userguide[1].pdf for Barco Coronis 5MP monitors
B410580_00_userguide[1].pdf for Barco Nio monitors.
4 Monitors Driver Installation

1. Load the software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts automatically.
Note:
If the installer doesn't start automatically, go to CD and start Setup.exe.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen:
277
Note:
All softwares listed will be installed.
3. Accept the License Agreement for the MediCal QAWeb Agent installation.
4. Click [Next] several times, then [Install] and [Finish].

5. To install the Graphics Device Driver, select the BarcoMed 5MP2FH graphic board and click [Next].
6. Check Enable the DualView device.
278
7. Click [Next].
8. Select the Static gray palette with NO system colors and the following options (1).
279
9. Unckeck the option Disable RGB To Static Gray Color Translation (2).
10. Finish the installation:
280
Note:
If after the reboot, the desktop icons are on one Barco monitor, unplug both DVI cables at the video
board outputs and restart the computer.
Note:
BARCO drivers and QAWeb Agent must have been installed.
In case Medical Pro software has been installed instead of QAWeb Agent, uninstall Medical Pro
and install QAWeb Agent from the Barco software CD.
281

Since the DualView option was selected, the following window will be displayed:
2. Right click on the icon for the monitor that the windows desktop should be extended to and choose
"Attached".
3. Adjust the screen resolution (2):
• icon 1: 1280x1024 pixel
4. Check "Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor" (3).
282
5. Adjust the position of the monitors: drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your
monitors.
Right-hand review monitors position Left-hand review monitors position
This will also determine how the mouse will behave, i.e. in which direction it moves and at which point
it can pass from one monitor to another.
! Notice:
Do not modify the position of monitor icons 2 and 3 (an example is given below), otherwise the
workstation will show some strange behavior.
283
This page is blank.
284
Job Card IST C29 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows 7
Job Card IST C29 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and QAWeb for Windows
7 Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• Graphic Board Med. 5MP2FH
• Image Diagnost Software DVD
Note:

1. Go to C:\install\installer\BarcoWin7\K5407791-04.00_5.6.3.0_6.6.3.zip
2. Unzip the zip file.
1. Start the Setup.exe.
Note:
Every software listed will be installed.
285
3. Click [Next] to start the installation.
4. To install the Graphics Device Driver, select the BarcoMed 5MP2FH graphic board and click [Next].
5. Check Enable the DualView device.
286
6. Click [Next].
7. Select the Static gray palette with NO system colors and the following options (1).
8. Uncheck the option Disable RGB To Static Gray Color Translation (2).
287
9. [Finish] the installation:
10. Confirm the Windows Security Window by clicking [Install].
11. Click [Finish].
288
Note:
If after the reboot, the desktop icons are on one Barco monitor, unplug both DVI cables at the video
board outputs and restart the computer.
Note:
BARCO driver must have been installed.

Note:
The below described display settings configuration does not apply to a four monitor setup. For
more information on four monitor configuration, refer to Job Card IST A58 - Four Monitor
Configuration for Windows 7 and Med. 5MP2FH on page 311.
Note:
Using the graphic board Med5MP2FH, you will not be able to see the 5MP monitors in the
Windows monitor configuration.
Instead you must use the below described tool to configure the monitors.
1. Navigate to the Barco installation directory (e.g: C:\Program Files\Barco (1)).

2. Double click on the "BarcoPnPSetup.ini" (2) ➜ a Notepad will open (3).
3. According to your display setup, six different commands can be configured.
289
5-1 Barco Review Monitors on the RIGHT Side

If the two Barco review monitors are setup on the right side of the control color monitor, the following
three setup options (with their respective command) are possible:
1. To align all displays on the top, the"setting alignTop" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop -extendedMiddle -identify
Control color
monitor 1
Barco Barco
review review
monitor 2 monitor 3
2. To align all displays centrically, the "setting -alignTop[768]" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop[768] -extendedMiddle -identify
Control color Barco Barco

monitor 1 review review
monitor 2 monitor 3
3. To align all displays on the bottom, the "setting -alignBottom" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignBottom -extendedMiddle -identify
Barco Barco
review review
Control color monitor 2 monitor 3
monitor 1
4. Save the file: Select File ➜ Save.

5. Restart the system.
Note:
It is possible to leave the parameter "-identify" out. This will avoid the pop-up of a white display at
each system start.
290
5-2 Barco Review Monitors on the LEFT Side

If the two Barco review monitors are setup on the left side of the control color monitor, the following three
setup options (with their respective command) are possible:
1. To align all displays on the top, the "setting alignTop" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop -extendedLeft -identify
Control color
monitor 1
Barco Barco
review review
monitor 2 monitor 3
2. To align all displays centrically, the "setting -alignTop[768]" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop[768] -extendedLeft -identify
Barco Barco Control color

review review monitor 1
monitor 2 monitor 3
3. To align all displays on the bottom, the "setting -alignBottom" command needs to be configured:
-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignBottom -extendedLeft -identify
Barco Barco
review review
monitor 2 monitor 3
Control color
monitor 1
4. Save the file: Select File ➜ Save.

Note:
It is possible to leave the parameter "-identify" out. This will avoid the pop-up of a white display at
each system start.
6. After the restart, check if the mouse is going over the displays in the right order.
If this is not the case, change the cable connection accordingly.
291
7. Start the MammoWorkstation application:

a. if the Patient Manager is displayed on the left Barco review monitor, go to step 8.
b. if the Patient Monitor is displayed on the control monitor, skip to step 11.
8. If the Patient Manager is displayed on the left review monitor, do the following:
a. Close and exit the MammoWorkstation application.
b. Go to Support Interface.
c. Open the Configuration Folder.
d. Edit the MammoWorkstation.ini.
e. Look for the section [ITViewer].

f. Change the parameters of the tags "Width" and "Height" as follows:
[ITViewer] [ITViewer]
Width = 0 Width = 4096
Height = 0 Height = 2560
g. Click on [Save] to save the changes applied to the MammoWorkstation.ini.

10. Start the MammoWorkstation application and check if the Patient Manager is correctly displayed on
the control color monitor on the right side.
Note:
After the restart, start the MammoWorkstation again. The setting should be displayed correctly.
292
Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb
Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and
QAWeb Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• Graphic Board MXRT-5400
• Barco Software CD
Note:
4 Installation of Barco CD Contents

1. Insert the Barco Software CD.
2. Click on Run Setup.exe.
293

Note:
Every software listed will be installed.
4-1 Barco QAWeb Installation

2. Accept the License Agreement and click [Next].
294
3. Enter your information. Click [Next>].
4. Confirm the target Installation Folder by clicking [Next>].
295
5. Click [Install] to begin the QAWeb Agent installation.
6. Click [Finish]. The QAWeb Agent has been installed.
296
4-2 Barco Display Controller Driver Installation - MXRT

2. Accept the License Agreement and click [Next].
3. To install the Graphics Device Driver, select the Barco MXRT Display Controller Driver graphic board
and click [Next].
297
4. Click on [Install].
5. Windows 7 will reboot the system automatically, unless you click on [Reboot Later]. The following
screen appears in this case:
298
6. If you click on [Reboot Later], the screen below appears:
Note:
After the reboot, the control monitor resolution can be very low. Adjust it to 1280x1024.
Note:
BARCO driver must have been installed. To check if the driver has been installed, open the Device
Manager ➜ Display adapters Barco MXRT5400 (WDDM v1.1) should be displayed.
299

Note:
The below described display settings configurations do not apply to a four monitor setup. For more
information on four monitor configuration, refer to Job Card IST C82 - Four Monitor Configuration
for Windows XP and MXRT-5400 on page 307 or Job Card IST C84 - Four Monitor Configuration
for Windows 7 and MXRT-5400 on page 315.
5-1 Configuration for Windows 7

Update the monitors location from Windows Display Settings to match the correct physical position:
1. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Appearance and Personalization ➜ Adjust screen resolution.
2. Drag the monitor icons to match the correct physical position.
5-2 Configuration for Windows XP

Note:
This only applies when the MWS is running on version 4.6.0 or older.
Since the DualView option was selected, the following window will be displayed:
300
"Attached".
301
monitors.
Right-hand review monitors position Left-hand review monitors position
! Notice:
Do not modify the position of monitor icons 2 and 3 (an example is given below), otherwise the
workstation will show some strange behavior.
Note:
If you experience one of the following two issues, refer to Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors
Troubleshooting:
- missing drivers for Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400;
- wrongly installed driver for the card.
302
Job Card IST A56 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and Med. 5MP2FH
Job Card IST A56 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and Med.
5MP2FH Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit or XW8600.
• HDMI to DVI Adapter
4 Prerequisites
• Set the screen saver to blank.
• Set the "Turn off monitor" to Never.
Refer to Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI in the Service Manual for more
information.
5 Hardware Setup
Note:
A four monitor solution is only possible with Barco monitors and a HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit.
1. Install the HDMI to DVI adapter.
303
2. Connect the four monitors.
HDMI to DVI
Adapter for con-
trol monitor
Note:
For more information on how to connect review and control monitors, refer to Job Card IST A02 -
Installation of a Review Monitor Graphic Board and Connections to Monitors - HP on page 103.
3. Adjust the physical position of the monitors (e.g. the picture below).

The following window will be displayed:
304
"Attached".
monitors.
! Notice:
Do not modify the position of monitor icons 2 and 3, otherwise the workstation will show some
strange behavior.
305
This page is blank.
306
Job Card IST C82 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and MXRT-5400
Job Card IST C82 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows XP and
MXRT-5400 Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit.
4 Prerequisites
• Set the “Turn off monitor” to Never.
Refer to Job Card IST A05 - Windows XP Configuration for IDI on page 185 for more information.
5 Hardware Setup
Note:
HDMI to DVI Adapter

for control monitor
307
Note:

"Attached".
308
monitors.
! Notice:
strange behavior.
309
This page is blank.
310
Job Card IST A58 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and Med. 5MP2FH
Job Card IST A58 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and Med. 5MP2FHChapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit.
4 Prerequisites
• Set the "Turn off the display" to Never.
Refer to Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI on page 173 for more information.
5 Hardware Setup
Note:
Note:
Install the Barco driver version 6.6.x (or a higher version).
311
HDMI to DVI Adapter

for control monitor
Note:
6 Displays Settings Configuration

1. Navigate to the Barco installation directory (e.g: C:\Program Files\Barco (1)).
312
2. Double-click on the "BarcoPnPSetup.ini" (2) ➜ a Notepad will open (3).
3. According to your display setup, five different commands can be configured:

The following five setup options (with their respective command) are possible:
a. Both Barco displays are set up between the two color displays.
➜ To align all displays (except for the outer right display) on the bottom, the following command
needs to be configured:
"-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignBottom -extendedMiddle -
identify"
b. Both Barco displays are set up on the left side of the two color displays.
➜ To align all displays on the bottom, the following command needs to be configured:
"-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignBottom -extendedLeft -identify"
c. Both Barco displays are set up on the left side of the 2 color displays.
➜ To align all displays on the top, the following command needs to be configured:
"-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop -extendedLeft -identify"
d. Both Barco displays are set up on the right side of the 2 color displays.
➜ To align all displays on the bottom, the following command needs to be configured:
"-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignBottom -extendedRight -identify"
e. Both Barco displays are set up on the right side of the 2 color displays.
➜ To align all displays on the top, the following command needs to be configured:
"-initialize -extendedInitialize -alignTop -extendedRight -identify"
4. Create a batch-file called "ApplyDriver.bat".
a. Create a text document:
- Right click anywhere on your desktop ➜ a dialog will open.
313
- Select New ➜ Text document ➜ a text document will be created on your desktop (1).
b. Open this document (double click) and type in the following two lines:
PING 1.1.1.1 -n 1 -w 60000 >NUL
C:\Windows\System32\BarcoPnPSetup.exe -initialize
c. Save the document as ApplyDriver.
d. Convert the document to a .bat file:
- Delete the appendix ".txt" and type ".bat" instead.
5. Move the "ApplyDriver.bat" into the Startup folder:

a. Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Startup.
b. Right click on Startup ➜ a dialog will open.
c. Click on Open.
d. Drag and drop the batch-file ("ApplyDriver.bat") into the Startup folder.
The batch-file ("ApplyDriver.bat") will now automatically be started after every Window login.
314
Job Card IST C84 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and MXRT-5400
Job Card IST C84 - Four Monitor Configuration for Windows 7 and MXRT-5400Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
• IDI Workstation Base Unit.
• Display port to DVI Adapter
4 Prerequisites
• Set the "Turn off the display" to Never.
Refer to Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI on page 173 for more information.
5 Hardware Setup
Note:
A four monitor solution is only possible with Barco monitors and a HP Workstation Z800 or DELL
T5600 Base Unit.
Note:
Install the Barco driver version 1.x (or a higher version).
1. Install the display port to DVI adapter.
Display port to DVI

Adapter for control moni-
315
Note:
For more information on how to connect review and control monitors, refer to Job Card IST C80 -
Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb on page 293.

"Attached".
316

monitors.
! Notice:
strange behavior.
317
This page is blank.
318
Job Card IST A27 - 3 MP Eizo Monitors Driver Installation and Display Settings
Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation using 3MP Eizo Monitors with Matrox graphics cards.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• Eizo Software CD.
• Eizo monitors connected.
Note:
To connect the 3MP Eizo monitor, a DMS-59 Male to Dual DVI Female connector is required.
4 Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 Installation

Note:
It is mandatory to install Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (x46) for Eizo monitors Driver Installation.
1. Execute the Setup.exe.
2. The Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (x46) Setup window will open.
Click [Next] to start the installation.
319
3. Check "I accept the terms of the License Agreement".

Click [Install].
4. Click [Finish]. The installation is complete.

1. Load the software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts automatically.
Note:
If the installer doesn't start automatically, go to CD and start Setup.exe.
320
3. The Software listed will be installed: Matrox Display Driver, Mediacl Series, version 1.13.00.158.
4. To enable independent mode for your Matrox graphics hardware, check the box and click [Next].
321
5. Click [Next] to begin the installation.
6. The installation is complete.

1. Select Start ➜ Settings ➜ Control Panel ➜ MatroxPowerDesk-HF.
2. Select monitor Adjustments.
322
3. Select a device in the view on the left. Click Adjust orientation.
323
This page is blank.
324
Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement
Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement Chapter 8
1 Applicability
WARNING
The ambient light measured by the illuminance in the plane of the monitors must be less than 10
lux. If the ambient light is greater than this value, the user should be aware that image quality
cannot be guaranteed.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
Note:
The tolerated lux value may vary according to country specific regulations.
• The ambient light measured by the illuminance in the plane of the monitors must be less than 20 lux
and lower than local regulation if applicable. If the ambient light is greater than this value, the user
should be aware that image quality cannot be guaranteed.
• For facilities located in France:
The ambient light must be between 10 lux and 20 lux.
In this procedure, the measurement of the illuminance (Fr. Eclairement) (unit: lux) specified in the
French protocol may be replaced by the measurement of the luminance (unit: cd/m2) of a reference
gray card, followed by the appropriate conversion. The tolerance and method of conversion is
provided below.
However, users must have a calibrated illuminance Meter ("luxmeter") and check compliance daily. It
is recommended to check that both methods and instruments are in good agreement.
4 Tools
4-1 Illuminance Meter (Luxmeter)
• A calibrated illuminance meter (luxmeter) with the following specifications:
Accuracy of ± 5% over the range 0,1 to 120 lux.
Preferably, use an illuminance meter with a detachable (remote) sensor.
Note:
If no calibrated illuminance meter (luxmeter) is available, perform the procedure using the Serial
Spotmeter (Wellhöffer) and the Reference Gray Card.
325
4-2 Serial Spotmeter (Wellhöffer)

• Use the serial Spotmeter P/N 2319223 (Tool for Field Engineers) with the cannon (additional tube to
reduce the scattered light), as shown below:
Note:
For Europe only, the additional reference num-
ber 0223 is available. It can be used to order the
tool. It includes the serial Spotmeter with a
Cannon
transportation case and accessories.
Wellhöffer serial Spotmeter with cannon.
4-3 Gray Reference Card

• Reference gray card (18%) or equivalent, P/N: 2110360. It must be free from dust or scratches and
be under valid period.
5 Prerequisites
Position the monitors in working conditions as follows:
• Optimize monitors position and angulation for best viewing conditions.
• Distance between the monitors and the user in working position should be about 50 cm.
• Check that no light sources, furniture with shiny surfaces or bright walls can reflect on the screens.
• Room lighting should be made exclusively by stable and controllable artificial light ensuring a stable
and reproducible illuminance in the planes of the monitors.
• Special care shall be given to the viewboxes present in the room, which must be in the state used for
diagnostic (on or off) and, if on, filled with films and shuttered in a way representative of medical diag-
nostic procedures.
• For good Quality Control, it is advised (and mandatory in some countries) to note carefully all light
sources with their positions and adjustments allowing to reach the illuminance level the calibration
has been made under.
WARNING
If there is natural lighting, this procedure cannot be accurate. It is impossible to ensure good
performance with ambient light which is not stable, and in which intensity is generally very high.
The monitors should not be moved during this procedure and after calibration.
326
6 Procedure
6-1 Measurement of the Illumination in the Monitor Plane
This measurement can be performed either directly using a calibrated illuminance meter or indirectly
using the serial Spotmeter and the neutral reference gray card.
6-1-1 Method 1 - Using the Serial Spotmeter
1. Turn off the monitors by using the power switch button at the bottom of the monitors.
2. Position the Gray Reference Card on the left screen.
3. Use the serial Spotmeter in Away mode,
Away mode
A
selected
Cd/m²
Away/Direct mode run

button selector don/off stop SMfit ACT
S t t
Spotmeter human interface
4. Use it with the cannon at a distance of about 40cm - 50cm from the Gray Reference Card,
LCD review mon-
itor
Gray Reference Card
Power Switch
5. Make sure no shadow (yours for example) or light reflection (your light color clothes for example) can
affect the measurement,
6. Read the luminance value displayed on the serial Spotmeter and record the measured light value ML
(in cd/m2) in the following table,
7. Remove the Reference Gray Card and position it on the right screen,
8. Repeat the steps 3 to 6 on the right monitor.
9. The value used to determine the ambient light in the room is the greater of the two values.
327
10. Calculate the illuminance IA (in lux). (Remind, 1fL = 3.43 cd/m2, 1 foot Candle = 10.7 lux):
Measured value Retained Acceptance Acceptance Criteria
value Criteria (France)
left right
monitor monitor
ML (cd/m2) ML  1.14 cd/m2 0.57 cd/m²  ML  1.14
IA (lux) IA  20 lux 10 lux  IA 20 lux

= 17.5 x ML
11. Remove the Gray Reference Card.

*The IA (lux) value for each monitor will be used in Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on
page 345 when calculating the Lmax and Lmin values for the Eizo LCD review monitors.
6-1-2 Method 2 - Using an Illuminance Meter
The Reference Gray Card is not used in this case.
1. Preferably the monitors should be off.
2. Hold the illuminance meter in the plane of each monitor, the light sensor facing the room; make sure
no shadow (yours for example) or light reflection (your light color clothes for example) can affect the
measurement; in particular, if the sensor is part of the meter (no remote sensor), and the meter
handheld, be careful not to influence the measurement with your hand.
3. Measure the illuminance IA (lux) in the plane of each monitor and write the values in the following
table. The value that will be further used is the greater of the two values.
The acceptance criteria are exemplary, so please check your local regulations for the values applying
to your system.
Measured value Retained Acceptance Acceptance Criteria
value Criteria (France)
left right
monitor monitor
IA (lux) IA  20 lux 10 lux  IA 20 lux
*The IA (lux) value for each monitor will be used in Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on
page 345 when calculating the Lmax and Lmin values for the Eizo LCD review monitors.
328
6-2 Measurement of the Effect of the Ambient Light

6-2-1 Method 1 - Measurement of the Influence of Ambient Light Using the serial Spotmeter
1. Be sure you removed the Gray Reference Card and that the monitors are off.
2. Use the Spotmeter in Away mode (as described in step #1) with the cannon at a distance of about
40cm - 50cm from the monitor front face,
Power Switch
3. Measure the luminance of the turned off monitors and write the values in the following table in cd/m2:
Luminance measured on the LEFT Luminance measured on the RIGHT *Maximum ALV
grayscale review monitor (cd/m2) grayscale review monitor (cd/m2) (cd/m²)
= ALVleft = ALVright
*The value computed here will be used in Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on page 345.
329
This page is blank.
330
Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration
Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors Calibration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation systems with Barco monitors (graphic card Board Med.
5MP2FH or MXRT-5400).
1 Field Engineer
Time: 30’
3 Requirements
• For Coronis Mammo monitors, the internal sensor is used for calibration.
• For NIO monitors, a sensor (P/N 5257196) is delivered with the monitors.
• IDI Software DVD.
• Barco Software CD, including QAWeb Agent v1.06 or higher.
Note:
For Windows XP, the QAWeb Agent is installed at the same time as the Barco driver.
For Windows 7, the QAWeb Agent must be installed manually.
4 Install QAWeb Agent for Windows 7

1. Insert the Barco Software CD.
2. Run the QAWeb Agent Setup.exe.
331
4. Accept the License Agreement. Click [Next>].
5. Enter your information. Click [Next>].
6. Confirm the target Installation Folder by clicking [Next>].
332
7. Click [Install]. The QAWeb Agent will be installed.
8. Click [Finish]. The QAWeb Agent has been installed.
333
5 Calibration Sensor Driver Installation

! Notice:
The following procedure describes the calibration with the BARCO tools delivered, but it is
recommended to use an external calibrated luminance meter to perform the calibration (e.g.
Wellhöffer Serial Spotmeter P/N 2319223 tool for Field Engineers).
1. Plug the sensor.

Note:
At the end of calibration, the sensor may remain plugged.
If it has been removed and re-plugged to another USB port, a message may be displayed to search
for installation software. In this case, answer "No" and try plugging it to another USB port until no
message is displayed.
2. The sensor will be detected and the installation software will display the following windows:
3. Select the Advanced installation and click [Next].

4. Check the installation location is: C:/Program files/BARCO/QAWebAgent/Drivers/BarcoLCDsensor.
Click [Next].
334
5. Click [Finish].
Note:
In case the sensor is not automatically detected, follow the next steps to install the sensor
manually:
1. Go to Other Devices in the Device Manager window.
335
2. Right-click on Calibrator and select Update Driver Software. A screen for installing the driver
software should appear:
3. Select Browse my computer for driver software, then follow the path shown above to select
BarcoLCDsensor and click [OK].
336
4. Click on [Next].
5. Click on [Install].
6. Click on [Close].
6 Monitors Calibration
1. Start the Medical QAWeb application from the Desktop icon or from the Windows
menu Programs ➜ Barco ➜ Medical QA Web Agent.
2. Wait until the Status button gets a green tick.

3. In the main menu, select Configuration.
Note:
The selection will be active once the Status button gets a green check mark.
337
4. In the Displays tab, select the device to calibrate.
338
5. In the Calibration tab, click on the [Calibrate] button.
6. Login as advanced user (password: advanced).
7. In the Calibration Window, click on [Advanced] to extend the window.
According to the QAWeb software version, the following windows will open:
- QAWeb software version 1.06.01
- QAWeb software version 1.07
- QAWeb software version 1.10
339
a. For QAWeb software version 1.06.01:
Select the proper application settings:

- X-Ray Diagnostic Reading Room (max 10 Lux) for Reading Room.
- Check Absolute luminance: Please confirm with the medical technician or the doctor their
preferred luminance. Recommended values are 600 cd/m² for brighter white and 400 cd/m²
for darker white.
- Check Full Calibration.
- Uncheck No Ambient Light Compensation.
b. For QAWeb software version 1.07:

340
- Check Absolute luminance: Please confirm with the medical technician or the doctor their
preferred luminance. Recommended values are 600 cd/m² for brighter white and 400 cd/m²
for darker white.
- Check Black Luminance and Contrast Ratio: 400
(Black luminance = Lmin = Lmax / Contrast ratio).
c. For QAWeb software version 1.10:

- Check Absolute luminance: 400 Cd/m2
- Check Black Luminance and Contrast Ratio: 400
(Black luminance = Lmin = Lmax / Contrast ratio).
8. Click on the [Calibrate] button.
341
9. Follow the instructions:

a. Calibrate the sensor on a flat/opaque surface.
b. Place the sensor in the center of the square displayed on the screen to calibrate the first monitor.
c. Calibrate the second monitor the same way.
d. At the end of the calibration, the following success message should be displayed:
7 Compliance check
This action measures the display curve and checks if it complies to the target specification.
1. In the main menu, select Status.
2. Make sure the external luminance meter is still connected to USB port for NIO monitors.
3. Click on Run to start the Compliance test.
4. Follow the instructions of the application to measure the compliance curve of both monitors.
342
5. At the end of the test, check the compliance test status and curve.
Note:
The resulting curve should be
within the specification limits.
343
This page is blank.
344
Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration
Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation systems with Eizo monitors.
2 Personal Requirements
1 Field Engineer
Time: 30’
3 Requirements
In order to perform this procedure, the field engineer needs:
1. Advanced Serial Luminance Meter (ASML) delivered with the Eizo monitors (PN: 5237201)
2. Access to RadiCS installer (v. 4.2.1 or higher):
- download the entire folder available on GE Libraries.
- store this folder on an USB drive.
Note:
Connection to a GE network is required for this download.
4 RadiCS Installation
Note:
Before you start the installation, make sure that no keypad-related program is working:
- right-click on the taskbar and select the Start Task Manager;
- on the Processes tab, check if Keypad_adapter_V1.exe is on the list;
345
- if it is displayed, select it and click on [End Process].
1. Download the entire RadiCS folder from the GE Libraries. Copy it on the system.
2. Double-click on Launcher.exe.
3. On the RadiCS window, select [Install RadiCS]
346
4. On the following screen, click on [Next] and then accept the End User License Agreement.
5. On the password screen, type the password: advanced.
6. On the next screen select the desired language.
347
7. On the Destination Folder screen, leave the default path and click on [Next].
8. Click on [Install] to begin the installation and [Finish], once this is completed.
5 Identify Monitors
1. On the Windows Start menu, click on RadiCS:
348
2. On the RadiCS window, click on the [Advanced Mode] and insert the password advanced again.
3. Click on [Monitor List] and then on [Monitor Detection].
4. Click [OK] on this pop-up window:
349
5. On the next screen, select the option as shown below and then click on [Next]:
6. On the Monitor Setup screen, select the corresponding monitor.

Note:
If a monitor is not listed in the next screen, select Other Monitor and manually fill in the required
information about the monitor to be registered. This information should be available directly on the
monitor or on its documentation.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each monitor.

8. A list of all connected monitors should be rendered on the left hand side.
350
6 Monitors Baseline Values

1. In the Monitor List window, select the two Eizo monitors (deselect the control monitor, if already
selected) and enable Manage for both monitors:
351
2. Click on the first Eizo monitor’s CAL sub-section. The section on the right will display data
corresponding to the selected monitor.
3. In this section, check if the Baseline Values are set correctly.

The values below are exemplary, please check your local regulations for the correct values.
Note:
If the values are not the same, click on [Change] and manually correct the values.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other Eizo monitor.
5. Do not close the RadiCS application.
352
7 Monitors Calibration
Note:
Before performing the following steps, make sure that no screensaver is enabled on the system.
1. Plug in the Eizo Sensor Tool.
2. On the RadiCS application, click on [Others] → [Configuration] → [Sensor]:
3. Make sure the Eizo Sensor is selected and then click on [Apply].
353
4. After the sensor has been checked, go to the [Main Menu] and click on [Calibration]:
5. Click [OK] on the pop-up window:
354
6. Place the sensor tool in the center of the square displayed on the monitor, as shown below:
7. Click on [Proceed]:
Note:
The calibration may take a few minutes.
355
8. If the calibration is successfully completed, a result window will be displayed:.

Note down the Lmax and Lmin values from the Measurement Result section. The values will be
needed when executing Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light Measurement on page 325.
9. After the results have been verified, click on [Exit].

10. When all monitors are registered in the RadiCS software, click on [Finished].
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 in order to calibrate the other monitor.
12. Turn off the system.
13. Disconnect the Eizo Sensor Tool from the system.
14. Turn on the system.
356
Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Baselines
Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Baselines Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all Eizo 5MP monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Purpose
• This procedure must be done after a first Installation or after a Software Reload from Cold.
• It consists of doing monitors Luminance measurements. These luminance measurements will be
used as baselines by the medical physicist for comparison with the measurements he will perform
during further Quality Checks.
4 Tools for Eizo Monitors Calibration

• The Advanced Serial Luminance Meter (ASML) delivered with the Eizo monitors (PN: 5237201):
• RadiCS installer (v. 4.2.1 or higher):

- download the entire folder available on GE Libraries.
- store this folder on an USB drive.
Note:
Connection to a GE network is required for this download.
- install the RadiCS tool as described in Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors Calibration on
page 345, section 4 RadiCS Installation.
5 Prerequisites
Note:
Make sure to have screen saver and auto lock to OFF before performing the monitor calibration.
The procedures below must have been completed in order to proceed:
• Installation of Eizo 5MP review monitors: Job Card IST A64 - Installation of Eizo 5MP Review
Monitors on page 117.
• Power up the monitors for at least 30 minutes to allow them to stabilize.
6 Calibration Procedure
357
1. Connect the Advanced Serial Luminance Meter to the system.

2. Go to the Windows Start menu and click on RadiCS:
3. On the RadiCS window, click on the [Advanced Mode] and insert the password advanced.
4. Click on [Monitor List].

5. If the monitors are not listed in the [Monitor List], then follow the next steps.
If the monitors are already listed, then skip to step 12.
358
6. Click on [Monitor Detection].
7. On the pop-up window, click [OK]:
8. On the next screen, select the option as shown below and then click on [Next]:
9. On the Monitor Setup screen, select the corresponding monitor.
359
Note:
If a monitor is not listed in the next screen, select Other Monitor and manually fill in the required
information about the monitor to be registered. This information should be available on the back
side of the monitor or in its documentation.
10. Repeat steps 7. to 9 for each monitor.

11. Before performing the following step, make sure that all the monitors are listed (as shown in the
screenshot below) and check the "Manage" checkbox for all the monitors.
If not all monitors are listed, then repeat steps 4. to 10..
360
12. On the RadiCS software, click on [Others] → select Manual Measurement/Pattern Indication.
13. On the next window, select the monitor to be tested and the option Measurement Pattern (1):
1
3
14. On the same screen, (2) first check the grayscale checkboxes for Fore- and Background Color, and
then use either the slide bar or manually input the desired luminance level in the input field to select a
background pixel value of 180 and select a foreground pixel value of 255.
15. Click on [Display] (3) ➜ the Eizo monitor will display a white square centered on a gray background.
361
16. Place the Luminance Meter tool in the center of the rectangle and click on [Measure] (4).
Note:
The luminance measurements are listed in log area of the screen.
17. When the measurement is finished, note the luminance L255.
a. Compute L20% = 0.2 x L255.
362
b. Set the background pixel value so that the measured background luminance is as close as
possible to L20%.
c. For each of the following five measurements, place the luminance meter on the center of the
central square and hold it in contact with the monitor screen:
- Select a foreground pixel value of 10 and measure the associated luminance. Record the
luminance as the L10 luminance level for the monitor in the Chart on page 363.
d. Click [OK] to go back to the Workstation Status window.
Note:
For the Eizo 5MP monitors, select the next monitor to be tested and click on Luminance
measurement from Quality Management menu.
Repeat steps 12. to 16. and record the luminance values in the Chart on page 363.
e. To end the measurements, click on [Exit].
f. Fill out the below Chart “Luminance baseline” for all Eizo monitors.
! Notice:
The Serial Luminance Meter needs time to integrate light for low luminance measurement, please
wait for a while before considering a value as a valid measurement.
Chart "Luminance baseline" for Eizo 5MP review monitors.
Facility:
Room:
Date:
Luminance Units:
Date of Baseline Setting:

Baseline Luminance
Luminance level Left monitor Right monitor
L10
L60
L120
L180
L255
18. Exit RadiCS.
363
19. Unplug the Serial Luminance Meter.

20. Give the customer the information which has been filled out in the table above and inform them that it
is important to store it for future reference.
364
Job Card IST A74 - Recommendations for Eizo DIN Monitors
Job Card IST A74 - Recommendations for Eizo DIN Monitors Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This Job Card only applies to Eizo review monitors in Germany, Austria, Netherlands and Switzerland.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Purpose
Following installation or after changes of imaging equipment in Germany, Austria, Netherlands and
Switzerland, Manufacturer/User must pass an Acceptance Test to make sure the equipment produces
consistently similar images.
The purpose of this Job Card is to:
• allow the Field Engineer to perform the monitors homogeneity assessment described in step 13 of
“ACCEPTANCE TEST LOG for GE Medical Systems for Image Reproduction Equipment pursuant to
DIN V 6868-57” document with accurate measurements
• provide the right image reference for the measurement.
4 Applicable Documents
• ACCEPTANCE TEST LOG for GE Medical Systems for Image Reproduction Equipment pursuant to
DIN V 6868-57 document. Latest revision of this document is available on GE Medical Systems AW
Installed Base intranet at: http://aw-ib.euro.med.ge.com/consulte.php?id=418
• This Service Manual.
5 Tools Required
One of the following tools is required:
• 1 x Serial Spotmeter (Wellhofer LX+) - PN: 2319223, or
• 1 x Advanced Serial Luminance meter LCD for Eizo monitors - PN: 5237201.
6 Prerequisites
Note:
Make sure to perform the prerequisites before starting the “ACCEPTANCE TEST LOG for GE
Medical Systems for Image Reproduction Equipment pursuant to DIN V 6868-57”.
• Monitor(s) must be calibrated.
• Monitor(s) must be powered up at least for 30 minutes.
• Serial luminance meter must be under calibration period.
• RadiCS must be installed (for details on the installation, go to Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors
Calibration on page 345).
365
7 Homogeneity Assessment Procedure (Step 13)

The procedure below explains how to perform the step 13 of the ACCEPTANCE TEST LOG for GE
Medical Systems for Image Reproduction Equipment pursuant to DIN V 6868-57” document in order to
do get accurate measurements.
This procedure must be performed after step 12 and before step 14 of the ACCEPTANCE TEST LOG.
7-1 Procedure for Eizo Monitors

1. Launch RadiCS and go to [Advanced Mode]:
2. Log in by using the password advanced.

3. Connect the Advanced Serial Luminance meter to the workstation.
Note:
Make sure that the RadiCS is configured as described in Job Card IST A85 - Eizo Monitors
Calibration on page 345, section Monitors Baseline Values on page 351.
366
4. Click on the [Others] drop-down menu and select [Manual Measurement/Pattern

Indication].
5. Select the monitor to be tested (1):
6. Make sure that [Preset Pattern] is selected (2).

7. In the area below - (3), scroll to section DIN and select DIN Uniformity Check.
8. Click on [Display] (4).
367
9. Place the Luminance Meter tool in the center of the circle as shown below:
10. On the Spotmeter remove the cannon and install the foam protector provided with the tool:
Note:
For Europe only, the additional reference number 0223 is available. It can
be used to order the tool. It includes the Spotmeter with a transportation
case and accessories.
Wellhoffer Serial Spotmeter

without cannon and with foam.
368
11. Do not forget to place the foam ring (shadow mask) around the sensor in order to avoid the room light
to make the measurement erroneous.
12. Measure the luminance in the center of the 5 areas defined by the arrows.
Note:
The luminance meter must be perfectly perpendicular to the screen plan. Do not press the
luminance meter too much against the LCD screens, it could bias the measurement.
13. Deviations between each of the measured values in the corners and the measured value in the
center are to be logged and must not exceed the limit values defined by DIN V 6868-57” document.
14. Once the measures are done, click the [OK] button to close Test patterns window.
15. Disconnect the measurement device and store it in a safe place.
369
This page is blank.
370
Job Card IST A38 - MX300W Eizo Monitor Calibration
Job Card IST A38 - MX300W Eizo Monitor Calibration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Tools
• LCD sensor
• RadiCS LE software installed.
5 RadiCS LE Software Installation

1. Insert RadiCS LE software CD.
2. In the Eizo LCD Utility Disk Setup, select Install RadiCSLE menu.
3. Select the language for installation.
371
4. Click [Next>].
5. Accept the license agreement.
6. Choose the software language.
372
7. Click [Install] to start installation
6 Calibration
1. Start RadiCS LE software.
2. Plug the sensor: the sensor driver starts its installation.
3. Select Yes, this time only and click [Next>].
373
4. Select automatic installation and click [Next>].
5. Click [Finish].
6. Select Configuration ➜ Wizard ➜ monitor setup.
374
7. The following message is displayed:
8. Check the monitors and LCD sensor connections, then click [OK].
9. In the monitor Setup (1) window, select Independent, then click [Next>].
10. In the monitor Setup (2) window,

click [Select monitor].
The monitor window opens.
11. Select the monitor and click [OK].

12. In the monitor Setup (2) window,
click [Finish].
375
13. In the main menu, select Configuration ➜ monitor. The monitor window opens
14. In the monitor window, right-click on the monitor installed and select the Calibration settings menu.
15. Choose the following calibration settings and click [OK].
Note:
When USB cable is connected, Color is automatically set to 7500 K.
376
16. Place the sensor in the middle of the screen and click [Proceed] in the main window.
17. Click [OK].
18. Click [Proceed] to start the calibration.
377
At the end of calibration, the calibration curve and measurement results are displayed:
378
Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration
Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MDS/TechInsight with Eizo RX320 monitor.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Tools
• LCD sensor.
• RadiCS LE software CD delivered with RX320 Eizo monitor.
5 Preliminary Steps
1. Turn on the monitor 30 minutes at least before starting the calibration.
2. Insert the CD in the CD driver.
3. Install RadiCS LE software from the CD.
6 Calibration
Follow the RadiCS LE software user manual instructions to perform the monitor calibration.
379
Job Card IST A42 - RX320 Eizo Monitor Calibration
This page is blank.
380
Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database Configuration
Job Card CFG C02 - Local DICOM Settings and Database ConfigurationChapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 "Local" Tab Overview
1
2
3 4
8 9
13
5 6
7
12
10
11
1. Insert a descriptive name for the station. The length must not exceed 16 characters. This name will
appear on the login screen.
This name is used as the station name in DICOM evidence documents (such as reports or
presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo Documentation Station.
2. Insert the institution’s name.
This name is used as the institution’s name in PDF and DICOM evidence documents (such as
reports or presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo Documentation Station.
3. Insert the Institution address.
This address is used as the institution’s address in PDF and DICOM evidence documents (such as
reports or presentation states) created with MammoWorkstation or Mammo Documentation Station.
381
4. Displays the local computer’s name (on which the application is installed). Other DICOM partners,
e.g. a PACS, must know this name.
5. The AE Title of the local DICOM storage SCP. Other DICOM partners, e.g. a PACS archive, must
know this AE Title.
6. Use C-ECHO to test the availability of the local DICOM Storage SCP. A green checkmark implies
that the SCP is active. If verification fails, a red cross appears. Typical cause for failure during
installation is an invalid license.
7. Port for the local DICOM Storage SCP. Port 104 is the standard port used for DICOM
communication. Keep this port unless the network administrator of the customer site tells you
otherwise. Other DICOM partners, e.g., a PACS, must know this AE Title.
8. The Image Diagnost authentication server provides user accounts for MammoWorkstation and
Mammo Documentation Station. It also manages the administrator accounts for all other IDI
products.
The location of the authentication server depends on the availability of a Collaboration Server:
a. If there is no Collaboration Server:
For a stand-alone installation, the authentication server is part of the local installation, i.e.,
"localhost". It is already preconfigured. There is nothing to do.
b. If there is a Collaboration Server:

In this case, the Collaboration Server provides a central authentication service for all
workstations. Instead of "localhost", enter the IP number of the Collaboration Server:
- On each MDS, MWS and DSH go to Support Interface.
(user: admin; password: admin)
- Open the Configuration Folder.
- Edit the GlobalConfig.ini .

- Add the IP address of the Collaboration Server into the following parameters:
"AuthenticationServer"
"NotifyWorklistURL"
"PatIndexServerURL"
382
- Replace the xxx.yyy.zzz (see screenshot below) with the IP of the Collaboration Server.
- Save the applied configuration by clicking [Save].

- Restart the Apache Tomcat Service.
Note:
When logging on to the MWS, MDS or DSH, the Collaboration Server user database will now be
contacted for authentication.
9. Verify network connectivity to the authentication server. A green checkmark reflects a proper network
connection.
10. The path to the local file cache. This is the folder "dbcache" (created earlier).
The file cache must be on a separate partition. For MammoWorkstation this is a dedicated RAID 0
partition.
11. Set the size that will be reserved for local database, i.e., the space that the folder "dbcache" can
allocate.
At least 20% of the hard-disk must remain free.
12. For MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station only:
If active, the user can search the local database (cache). This is recommended only for
demonstration purpose, if no PACS archive is available or the if PACS archive does not provide
appropriate DICOM Q/R services.
Normally, only worklist and PACS sources are available to the user. This has the advantage that the
user has access to the complete patient information and that evidence documents (reports,
presentation states) are automatically stored in the PACS archive. MammoWorkstation takes care of
prefetching images from the PACS and keeping a copy of these images on the local database
(cache).
13. If you use a remote DICOM server instead of your local cache database, tick the box "Use remote
DICOM Server" ➜ the text input field becomes active.
Indicate the Server name of your remote DICOM Server.
383
This page is blank.
384
Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI Application
Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts Creation for the IDI Application Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
The Image Diagnost user manager allows identification of physicians working with the
MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station. The accounts of administrators with access to
settings are managed.
The location of the user manager depends on the availability of a Collaboration Server:
a. There is no Collaboration Server: For a stand-alone installation, the user manager is part of the
local installation. User accounts are managed on the local PC. In this case, the User Manager
URL refers to "localhost".
b. There is a Collaboration Server: In this case, the Collaboration Server manages user accounts
centrally. In this case, the User Manager URL refers to the IP number of the Collaboration Server:
Note:
The tab "Local" in "Settings" displays the currently configured authentication server that provides
the User Manager.
4 User Account Creation

1. Open the User Manager by entering this URL: http://localhost:8080/CollServerWebGUI.
Note:
In case of centrally managed systems, use http://<CollaborationServer>:8080/CollServerWebGUI,
where <Collaboration Server> is replaced by the IP address of the Collaboration Server.
Alternatively, go to the Supportinterface: http://localhost:8080/supportinterface (replace "localhost"
with the IP address of the Collaboration Server if there is one, e.g. http://192.168.1.76:8080/
supportinterface.
2. Select [Collaboration Server Admin]:

• Select “ADMINISTRATION”.
The default Login is "admin", password
"admin".
• Select [USERS AND ROLES].
385
3. Create accounts for

MammoWorkstation users:
• Click on [Create a new USER].
• Fill in the mandatory fields.
- ID: choose an appropriate ID.
When starting the application,
the ID will be the Name of the
user account.
- Name: choose an appropriate
name. The name is not going
to be used when staring the
application.
- Password: choose an
appropriate password.
- Rad Code: leave empty
- Supervisions: the default
setting is 0. If you need to
configure this setting, contact
the next GE service level.
- Status: Select Active
- Role members: choose a
group to which the created
user shall belong. Indicate if
the worklist task assigned to
this specific user shall be
Public to all other users in this
group or if the tasks should be
Hidden and therefore only be visible to this specific user.
- Authorization to access TASKs: Select the tasks this specific user is allowed to carry out. To
select several tasks, press [Ctrl] and contemporarily select the desired tasks with the mouse.
• Confirm with [Save USER] when finished.
Note:
Only users with the role "admin" can configure the MammoWorkstation.
At least one user must have the admin role. So do not delete the admin account.
4. To validate the account creation, start MammoWorkstation and login with the just created account.
Note:
In the application login window, the Name will be the ID of the User account creation window.
386
5 Role and Task Configuration for a Combined MammoWorkstation /

Collaboration Server
2. Select [Collaboration Server Admin]:
• Select "ADMINISTRATION".
The default Login is "admin", password "admin".
• Select [USERS AND ROLES].
• Select [Create a new ROLE].
- Enter an appropriate ID for your role (e.g. Breast Care Center).

- Enter an appropriate description for your role (e.g. Breast Care Center).
387
• Once the role is created, it will be displayed in the User account creation window and can be
selected as a ROLE member:
5-1 Create a Worklist upon Import of Images

This option is especially interesting for sites that do the reporting externally. They need to keep track of
images that have entered the IDI MammoWorkstation. Each imported study/ image must therefore create
a worklist task.
The configuration steps encompass modifications within the GUI (graphical user interface) as well as
within xml files:
5-1-1 Modifications within GUI

1. Login to Settings. The default credentials are:
- Login: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
388
2. Go to tab Routing.
- Choose the rule "Create worklist on import". The AE title of this rule is AE_MAMMO_WL(1).
- Check the box "Notify Collaboration Server" (2) and insert the right IP address (3) of the
Note:
The IP address can either be "localhost" if the workstation includes a Collaboration Server, or the
IP address of a separate Collaboration Server.
2
3
The modality needs to be configured to send images to the AE title " AE_MAMMO_WL". The reception of
images at this AE title triggers a notification being sent to the Collaboration Server. The Collaboration
Server then creates a worklist task.
5-1-2 Modifications within xml Files

The default behaviour is that a Single Reading task is created for Demo User.
The default settings can be modified:
389
Note:
Make sure the IDI application including the logon screen is closed, otherwise changes in
configuration files won't take any effect.
1 22
33
2. Select Configuration Folder (1).
- Click on WfConf.xml (2) to open the file and search for the tag:
<worklist_definitions description= [...]>
Note:
The parameter of this tag states which file contains the active worklist definitions. The default file
is WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
- Go back to the Configuration Folder.

- Checkmark "WorklistDefinitions.en.xml" (3) and click on edit.
- Search for the following section:
<item_creation>
<in_conjunction_with>
<local_aetitle>AE_MAMMO_WL</local_aetitle>
</in_conjunction_with>
<apply_preset_params>
<wl_order_task_type_code>SINGLE_READING</wl_order_task_type_code>
<wl_order_task_type_description>Reading</
wl_order_task_type_description>
<sps_performing_actor_name>Demo User</sps_performing_actor_name>
<sps_class_uid>1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31</sps_class_uid>
<sps_status>SCHEDULED</sps_status>
</apply_preset_params>
</item_creation>
390
This section is responsible for the creation of a SINGLE_READING task scheduled for Demo User when
an image is sent to the AE title AE_MAMMO_WL. This reading task will be available to any user that is
authorized to access the task READING and that is a member of the same group as the Demo User.
All available task types/task descriptions that can be applied to

<wl_order_task_type_code>task_type_code</wl_order_task_type_code>
and
<wl_order_task_type_description>task_type_description<
/wl_order_task_type_description>
are listed below:
task_type_code task_type_description
KVSCREENING_TASK_2 Anamnesis
KVSCREENING_TASK_2B Clinical Documentation
KVSCREENING_TASK_3 First Reading
KVSCREENING_TASK_4 Second Reading
KVSCREENING_TASK_5 Supervision
KVSCREENING_TASK_6 Consensus Reading
KVSCREENING_TASK_7 Assessment
DIGITIZE Digitize Film
PRIORS Request Priors
CONSULTATION Consultation
UNSCHEDULED_REPORTING Unscheduled Reporting
SINGLE_READING Reading
DOUBLE_READING_1 Reading 1
DOUBLE_READING_2 Reading 2
When modifying the WorklistDefinition.en.xml file, it is mandatory to make use of these predefined task
types. Certain task types include a listener that will create a consecutive task after completion of the
previous one.
Example: After a "First Reading" task is completed, a "Second Reading" task will automatically be
created. The Second Reading will be followed by a "Consensus Reading" task if the findings of First
Reading and Second Reading were different.
Example of a valid modification:

If you want to create a First Reading task for the user "Site XXX", the section in the
WorklistDefinitions.en.xml file has to be modified as shown below:
<item_creation>
391
<wl_order_task_type_code>KVSCREENING_TASK_3</
wl_order_task_type_code>
<wl_order_task_type_description>First Reading<
<sps_performing_actor_name>Site XXX</sps_performing_actor_name>
</item_creation>
3. Restart Apache Tomcat service.
5-1-3 Verification
1. Login to MammoWorkstation.
2. Send any patient to the rule "Create worklist on import".
Note:
It does not matter if the images received on the rule "Create worklist on import" were sent from
outside (modality) or from within the IDI workstation. The effect is the same.
4. Select Findings Summary(1).
392
5. Select Worklist Status (2).
393
6. Choose "Scheduled" for Task Status.

7. Click [Search].
1
2
If a First Reading task for User "Site XXX" was created (see image above), the configuration is correct.
394
Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference Configuration
Job Card CFG C06 - Language and Display Preference Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 “Preferences” Tab Overview

To get to the Preferences tab, log in to the MWS Settings:
3
4 1
5
2
6
8
7
10
There are two types of settings:

- user-specific settings - (1) and (2):
- visible in the upper right corner;
- affect only the respective user account;
- accessible only from the user account;
- for more information, go to section 4 User-specific Settings.
- global settings:
- all the active settings on the Preferences tab;
- affect all the system users;
395
- might require to exit the software and log in again for the new settings to be applied;
- for more information, go to section 5 Global Settings.
4 User-specific Settings
1. Configurable mouse tools:
- The left mouse button can be configured to have a certain default action for every user. From the
drop-down menu, a default action can be assigned to the left mouse button. In order for the settings
to take place, reopen the current patient.
- The middle mouse button (mouse wheel) can also be configured to have a certain default action for
every user. This option is disabled by default due to certain limitations. For more details, go to section
8 Enabling the Middle Mouse Button.
Note:
Whenever a new action is selected from the toolbar, the default action of the left button will be
canceled.
- The double click default function can be switched between the Investigation and the PullUpfront
mode:
- Investigation mode: this function can be used for comparing an image of a patient to the
corresponding priors.
- PullUpfront mode: when using this mode, a double click will make an image visible in full screen.
2. Prevent reporting if only prior images are available (older than 180 days) - this option limits the
creation of reports and annotations on prior images. The number of days is set by default to 180. To
change the number of days that defines a prior image, go to section 7 Time Configuration for the
Outdated Study Warning.
5 Global Settings
3. Language: select the language for the user interface.
4. Brightness: Adjust the brightness of the user interface.
5. "Track viewed images warning" - if checked, a warning message will appear if the user did not
review all new images in full screen.
! Notice:
This warning display may be mandatory in your country (e.g. US). Check the regulation before
canceling this warning. For further information, go to section 6 Track Viewed Images Warning
Removal.
6. Adjust the display font size of the user interface.
Note:
For MDS, the font size must be reduced from the default 13 down to 7.
7. Display image information - starting with version 4.7.0, different modality-specific overlays have
been introduced. A non-removable Default modality is available, which provides minimum
configuration settings.
Note:
Since multiple information overlays are possible, the system will select the overlay on a first-match
basis.
8. Add New Modality Type - this section allows creation of a new personalized type of overlay sets.
396
9. Overlay Information - edit the patient and image information displayed on the upped and lower
corners of each image. The default setting can be restored with the button [Reset to Standard].
Conversely, the content can be deleted by clicking on [Clear content].
Note:
The first line, containing Patient ID and Patient’s Name, is mandatory. Consequently, this line is
grayed out and cannot be edited.
The format for each line consists of
a. A text string (e.g. Patient [%s] %s)
Note:
The string may contain placeholders to insert DICOM values. Use %s to indicate a placeholder.
Placeholders are substituted by the DICOM values specified in subsequent arguments.
Note:
DICOM tags within sequences cannot be addressed and can therefore not be displayed as image
annotations.
b. DICOM tag IDs as arguments: The string is followed by a comma separated list of DICOM tag IDs
as arguments.
Note:
For DICOM tag xxxx,yyyy write xxxx-yyyy.
- General DICOM Attributes

You can personalize the different types of overlay set by using the DICOM attributes, such as the
following:
Note:
The entry in bold script in the column Displayed image information in Preferences tab - Text string
and DICOM tag ID is the one corresponding to the attribute. Additional text was only added for
easier localization of the quoted attribute.
Displayed image information in Preferences tab

DICOM tag Attribute Text string DICOM tag ID
0010,0020 Patient ID Patient [%s] %s 10-20, 10-10
0010,0010 Patient's Name Patient [%s] %s 10-20, 10-10
0010,0030 Patient's Birth Date DOB %y, Age %s 10-30, 10-1010
0010,1010 Patient's Age DOB %y, Age %s 10-30, 10-1010
0008,0060 Modality %s, Acq date %y %t 8-60, 8-22, 8-32
0008,0022 Acquisition Date %s, Acq date %y %t 8-60, 8-22, 8-32
0008,0032 Acquisition Time %s, Acq date %y %t 8-60, 8-22, 8-32
0020,0010 Study ID StudyID %s, SeriesNR %d, 20-10, 20-11, 20-13
ImageNR %d
0020,0011 Series Number StudyID %s, SeriesNR %d, 20-10, 20-11, 20-13
ImageNR %d
0020,0013 Image/Instance Number StudyID %s, SeriesNR %d, 20-10, 20-11, 20-13
ImageNR %d
0028,0011 Columns %dx%dx%d, %s %s 28-11, 28-10, 28-101, 28-1400,
18-1401
397

0028,0010 Rows %dx%dx%d, %s %s 28-11, 28-10, 28-101, 28-1400,
18-1401
0028,0101 Bits Stored %dx%dx%d, %s %s 28-11, 28-10, 28-101, 28-1400,
18-1401
0018,1400 Acquisition Device %dx%dx%d, %s %s 28-11, 28-10, 28-101, 28-1400,
Processing Description 18-1401
0018,1401 Acquisition Device %dx%dx%d, %s %s 28-11, 28-10, 28-101, 28-1400,
Processing Code 18-1401
0008,1070 Operator's Name Operator %s 8-1070
0018,0060 Peak Voltage Output KVP %fkV, Exp %fmAs %fms, 18-60, 18-1152, 18-1150, 18-
S-Value: %f 6000
0018,1150 Exposure Time KVP %fkV, Exp %fmAs %fms, 18-60, 18-1152, 18-1150, 18-
S-Value: %f 6000
0018,1152 Exposure KVP %fkV, Exp %fmAs %fms, 18-60, 18-1152, 18-1150, 18-
S-Value: %f 6000
0018,1405 Relative X-ray X-Ray rel %f, ED %fmGy, OD 18-1405, 40-8302, 40-316, 18-
Exposure %fdGy, Angle %f 1510
0040,8302 Entrance Dose X-Ray rel %f, ED %fmGy, OD 18-1405, 40-8302, 40-316, 18-
%fdGy, Angle %f 1510
0040,0316 Organ Dose X-Ray rel %f, ED %fmGy, OD 18-1405, 40-8302, 40-316, 18-
0018,1510 Position. Primary Angle X-Ray rel %f, ED %fmGy, OD 18-1405, 40-8302, 40-316, 18-
0018,1191 Anode Target Material A/F %s/%s, D %fmm, Fcomp 18-1191,18-7050, 18-11A0, 18-
%fN 11A2
0018,7050 Filter Material A/F %s/%s, D %fmm, Fcomp 18-1191,18-7050, 18-11A0, 18-
%fN 11A2
0018,11A0 Body Part Thickness A/F %s/%s, D %fmm, Fcomp 18-1191,18-7050, 18-11A0, 18-
%fN 11A2
0018,11A2 Compression Force A/F %s/%s, D %fmm, Fcomp 18-1191,18-7050, 18-11A0, 18-
%fN 11A2
0018,700A Detector ID DetID %s, last calibration %y 18-700A, 18-700C
0018,700C Date of last Calibration DetID %s, last calibration %y 18-700A, 18-700C
0008,0080 Institution Name Inst %s, %s 8-80, 8-81
0008,0081 Institution Address Inst %s, %s 8-80, 8-81
0008,0070 Manufacturer %s, %s, SN %s 8-70, 8-1090, 18-1000
0008,1090 Manufacturer Model %s, %s, SN %s 8-70, 8-1090, 18-1000
Name
0018,1000 Device Serial Number %s, %s, SN %s 8-70, 8-1090, 18-1000
398
- German Screening Attributes

For German Screening it is recommended to add:

0018,6000 Sensitivity KVP %fkV, Exp %fmAs %fms, S-Value: %f 18-60, 18-1152, 18-1150, 18-6000
- Magnification Factor Attributes

For displaying the Magnification Factor, add the following:
Note:
It is recommended to add the Magnification Factor DICOM tag behind the below indicated line:

0018,1114 Magnificat KVP %fkV, Exp %fmAs %fms, S-Value: 18-60, 18-1152, 18-1150, 18-
ion Factor %f, Mag %fx 6000,18-1114
- CESM Attributes
0018,0010 Contrast Bolus Agent Contrast agent: %s,Volume %fml, 18-10, 18-1041, 18-1049, 18-
Concentration %f, start time %t 1042
0018,1041 Contrast Bolus Volume Contrast agent: %s,Volume %fml, 18-10, 18-1041, 18-1049, 18-
Concentration %f, start time %t 1042
0018,1049 Bolus Ingredient Contrast agent: %s,Volume %fml, 18-10, 18-1041, 18-1049, 18-
Concentration Concentration %f, start time %t 1042
0018,1042 Contrast Bolus Start Contrast agent: %s,Volume %fml, 18-10, 18-1049, 18-1041, 18-
Time Concentration %f, start time %t 1042
0045,10A2 Entrance Dose in mGy CESM dose: ED(LE\HE) %smGy, 45-10A2, 45-10A1
for source images OD(LE\HE %sdGy
0045,10A1 Organ Dose for source CESM info: ED(LE\HE) %smGy, 45-10A2, 45-10A1
images OD(LE\HE %sdGy
399
10. Apply - after making changes in the Preferences tab, click [Apply] and then [OK].
The services will be restarted.
6 Track Viewed Images Warning Removal

A warning appears when closing a case without reviewing all new images
! Notice:
This warning display may be mandatory in your country (e.g. US).
Check the regulation before applying the following:
To cancel the display of this warning:
1. Login to MammoWorkstation ➜ Settings.
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Select the tab Preferences.
3. Uncheck the following option: "Track viewed images: Show warning upon closing a case in case
some images were not reviewed in full screen resolution ".
400
7 Time Configuration for the Outdated Study Warning

Reading from worklist or PACS search, a warning message appears:
• in the Image Folder whenever the most recent study is older than 180 days:
• if the Image Folder is not displayed when opening a patient, then the following window will pop
up:
Note:
The time range is configurable by service.
! Notice:
This warning display may be mandatory in your country (e.g. US).
Check the local regulation before changing the following:
To change the number of days that defines a prior image (the default is 180):
401
3. Edit MammoWorkstation.ini.
4. In the section [Modality Settings], change the line DaysMinAgeForPriorStudy = 180 to

the number of days required in your region.
Note:
If you want to cancel the older images being shown as priors, then set the following value:
DaysMinAgeForPriorStudy = 99999.
5. Save the file.
6. Restart the Apache Tomcat service:
8 Enabling the Middle Mouse Button

Note:
The configurable middle mouse button is not compatible with the IDI Keypad Second Edition and
it should not be enabled on a system which includes this keypad.
To enable the middle mouse button, follow these steps:

4. In the section [ITViewer], look for the following tag:

MidMouseButtonConfigurable = 0
5. Replace the default value with 1.
402
Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration
Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Introduction
Partners are external DICOM devices the Image Diagnost applications communicate with. Partners can
provide a source and/or a destination. Typical partners are a local or remote PACS, other
MammoWorkstation systems, or a routing target such as DICOM Shuttle.
MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station support as source: DICOM Storage SCP,
DICOM Query-Retrieve SCP, and DICOM-Media (DICOMDIR). Destinations can be DICOM Storage
SCU or DICOM-Media.
Collaboration Server and DICOM Shuttle support as source: DICOM Storage SCP. Destinations can be
DICOM Storage SCU.
4 “Communication” Tab Overview
3
4
5
6
7
8
14 9
1
10
11
12
13
403
1. List of all DICOM partners that have been configured.

2. Create new DICOM partners or delete existing ones. For partner type "DICOM Media", see Job Card
CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration on page 409.
3. Name of the DICOM partner.
4. Optional description of the DICOM partner.
5. TCP/IP address of the DICOM partner. Use [Ping] to verify that the IP is reachable.
6. Only for MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station:
If the DICOM partner supports DICOM Query and Retrieve service, MammoWorkstation can query
patient information and retrieve images from this partner.
Note:
MWS does not support Q/R (it can only be a destination).
7. AE title of the partner DICOM Q/R SCP. Use [C-ECHO] to verify the presence of a DICOM SCP.
8. Port number of the partner DICOM Q/R SCP.
9. Select the type of Query/Retrieve model supported by the DICOM partner. Study-Root + Relational
provides the best performance. Select this if supported by the PACS.
10. The DICOM partner provides DICOM Storage SCP service. It can be target of send-actions.
AE title and port number of the Storage SCP.
Use [C-ECHO] to verify the presence of a DICOM SCP.
11. Choose if images are to be compressed when sent.
Options are: None, JPEG 2000 lossless, JPEG 2000 1:10, JPEG 2000 1:15.
12. Define where the evidence documents created on MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation
Station (reports/DICOM SR and presentation states/DICOM PR/DICOM encapsulated PDF (DOC))
should be sent.
The default is the partner itself. I.e., for cases from a PACS source, the reports would be sent back to
the same PACS.
Sometimes, an alternative target is required.
Example: The destination could be included on a routing rule on the DICOM Shuttle.
- This rule could contain preconditions e.g. only PR/SR (and/or DOC) depending on what the
archive accepts.
- This rule could contain a list of other members of a screening unit and the PACS.
The evidence documents would then be distributed amongst all recipients in that list.
Note:
For further information on Routing rules, refer to Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration
on page 421.
13. The DICOM partner provides DICOM Storage Commitment SCP.
14. If you want to do a third party move, you must enter the AE title of the MOVE Destination in this filed.
15. Click [OK] after completion to save the applied changes ➜ the services will be restarted.
16. Verification
404
Verify your configuration using the [Ping] and [C-ECHO] functions.

Verification status:
• : Verification in progress
• : The Partner is reachable
• : No service found.
405
This page is blank.
406
Job Card CFG C72 - Loading Sample Images from IDI Software DVD
Job Card CFG C72 - Loading Sample Images from IDI Software DVD Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Purpose
To demonstrate the functionality of the MammoWorkstation or Mammo Documentation Station before
configuring the PACS, you can use the samples cases available on the IDI Software DVD.
4 Procedure
! Notice:
Do not copy the sample images from the Image Diagnost Software DVD on the local HDD.
4-1 Samples loaded during SW installation

1. During the software installation, there is an option to load the samples automatically. For more
details, go to step 7. in the Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation.
2. If this option has been checked during installation, then a “Samples” source should be available in
the [Data source] list:
3. Click on [Prefetch] to view the sample cases.
4-2 Samples loaded directly from the DVD

1. Insert the Image Diagnost Software DVD in the DVD drive of the system.
2. Login to the [Settings] of the IDI application.
407
Job Card CFG C72 - Loading Sample Images from IDI Software DVD
3. On the [Communication] tab, click on the plus sign to add a new DicomDIR Media:
4. Click [OK].
5. In the [Partner Name], insert title “Samples”.
6. In the [Path] field, enter the DVD drive and click [OK].
7. On the [Communication] tab, click [OK].
8. Login to the IDI application.
9. On the [Search] tab, select the “Samples” Data Source and prefetch the desired sample cases.
! Notice:
After using the Sample cases, please delete the “Samples” Data Source as follows:
- login to the [Settings] of the IDI application;
- on the [Communication] tab, select the “Samples” source from the [Partner] window;
- click on the minus sign to remove it;
- click [OK] to restart the services.
408
Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration
Job Card CFG C10 - DICOM Media Import Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Prerequisite
Ensure that your data source is a DICOM Media. This requires that the data source (CD/DVD/folder) is
organized in conformance to the DICOM Media format standard. To verify this, check that this structure
can be seen in the root folder. The root folder must show a file "DICOMDIR":
Note:
To import DICOM images that are not in a DICOM structured media, use the tool "Import files from
disk" accessible from menu Start ➜ Program Files ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools.
4 Procedure
1. Insert any CD in the CD driver of the MammoWorkstation.
2. Enter the settings of the MammoWorkstation and select the tab "Communication".
3. Configure a new DICOM Partner (DICOMDIR Media).
4. Insert the path to your CD/DVD-drive or to a folder holding the images for the import.
Note:
Ensure that the path directs to the "DICOMDIR" file. In case of a DICOM CD/DVD, use the path of
the drive, e.g., "E:\".
409
5. Click [OK] after completion to implement your configuration ➜ the services will be restarted.
5 Validation
1. Login as a user to MammoWorkstation and perform a seek mode on the DICOM Partner holding the
data as shown below (Interval of time "unlimited").
The images are still on the DICOM media and not yet in the local cache. The prefetch status is
therefore displayed red.
410
2. Click [Prefetch] to load the images from the DICOM media onto the local database (cache). To select
several cases at once, press [Ctrl] and contemporaneously select the desired cases with the mouse
cursor.
After the import is finished, the images will have a green prefetch status.
411
This page is blank.
412
Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization from Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control)
Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization from Third Party Client to
MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Introduction
MammoWorkstation supports context synchronization between a third party client and
MammoWorkstation. For example, a third party client may be a RIS, MIS or SIS application. This section
describes desktop synchronization of the current context from the third party client to the
MammoWorkstation.
To verify proper configuration and perform an end to end test, access to the third party client is required.
4 "Remote Control" Tab Overview
1
2
413
1. Allows other applications (RIS, MIS, SIS, etc.) to synchronize the context with the
MammoWorkstation. Images for the current context will be shown in MammoWorkstation.
2. Specify which source is queried for images, in case of a remote control event. This should be the
PACS associated with the RIS application that remote controls MammoWorkstation.
5 Validation
5-1 Allow Remote Control
1. To allow remote control by other applications, login to the settings, go to tab Remote Control and
enable this feature.
5-2 URL Invocation

The system to be validated (e.g. RIS) opens the following URL:
http://<host>:8080/ReceiverService/idimwscontrol.jsp?
with appropriate query parameters, which forwards the call to the back-end service.
Query parameters specify the loadType and the loadCurrent parameters:

Possible parameters are:
- LoadType=PATID ;
Content in loadCurrent = Patient ID
- LoadType=STUDYUID;
Content in loadCurrent = Study instance UID
414
- LoadType=ACCNR;
Content in loadCurrent = Accession number
For test reasons, try one of the three URL invocation options:
1. Patient ID:
• The RIS Client must call
http://localhost:8080/ReceiverService/idimwscontrol.jsp?loadType=PATID&
loadCurrent=patient-id, with the Patient ID as loadCurrent parameter.
• Validate the URL invocation by using the Internet Explorer:
• If the call was successful, the Internet Explorer displays the message:
IDI_REMOTE_CONTROL_EVENT_OK
•
This call invokes the display of the patient with the Patient ID XXXXXXX on the
MammoWorkstation.
2. Study Instance UID:
http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/idimwscontrol.jsp?loadType=
STUDYUID&loadCurrent=study-uid, with the StudyUID as loadCurrent parameter.
• To get the Study Instance UID:
- Go to Support Interface - default login: admin/admin
- Select Import Processes (1)
3
1
- Select MG for Modality. (2)
415
- Press Search.(3) ➜ a list will be displayed.
- Select an arbitrary File path(4) ➜ the DICOM File Header Listing will be displayed.
- Search for the Study Instance UID, with the Tag 0020,000D
• Validate the URL invocation by using the Internet Explorer
•If the call was successful, the Internet Explorer displays the message:
• This call invokes the display of the patient with the StudyUID XXXXXXXXXXXX on the
MammoWorkstation.
3. Accession Number
http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/idimwscontrol.jsp?
loadType=ACCNR&loadCurrent=accession, with the Accession Number as loadCurrent
parameter.
• To get the Accession Number:
- Go to Support Interface.
- Select Import Processes (1)
3
1
- Select MG for Modality. (2)
416
- Press Search (3) ➜ a list will be displayed.
- Select an arbitrary File path (4) ➜ the DICOM File Header Listing will be displayed.
- Search for the Accession Number: Tag 0008,0050
• Validate the URL invocation by using the Internet Explorer:
• If the call was successful, the Internet Explorer displays the message:
• This call invokes the display of the patient with the Accession Number XXXXXXXXXXXX on the
MammoWorkstation.
5-3 RemoteControl.exe
The system to be validated (e.g. RIS) opens the following tool:MWSRemoteControl.exe.
The MWSRemoteControl.exe tool is provided by Image Diagnost:

➜ Go to %IDI_Home%\CacheController
1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type "cmd" and hit [Enter].

2. Drag and drop (1) the "MWSRemoteControl.exe" in the opened Command Line window.
417
Note:
For opening a case on the MammoWorkstation, the case must be clearly identified by one of the
following query parameters:
- Patient ID: --patient-by-id XXXXX
- Study Instance UID: --patient-by-study-uid XXXX
- Accession number: --patient-by-accession-number XXXX
3. Type in e.g. --patient-by-id XXXXX.
4. Hit [Enter].
5. This call invokes the display of the patient with the Patient ID XXXXX on the MammoWorkstation
! Notice:
To learn more about possible commands executed with the RemoteControl.exe tool:
- Go to Start ➜ Run, type "cmd" and hit [Enter].
- Drag and drop the "MWSRemoteControl.exe" in the opened Command Line window.
- Type in --help.
- The following window will be displayed:
! Notice:
If multiple calls to MWSRemoteControl.exe are made, a delay should be made between each call,
since the call is not waiting for the action to be completed.
418
Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote Control)
Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from MammoWorkstation to Third

Party Client (Remote Control) Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS and MDS
1 Field Engineer
Time: 30’
3 Introduction
MammoWorkstation supports context synchronization between a third party client and the
MammoWorkstation. For example, a third party client may be a RIS, MIS or SIS application.
This section describes desktop synchronization of the current context from the MammoWorkstation to
the third party client.
To verify proper configuration and perform an end to end test, access to the third party client is required
4 "Remote Control" Tab Overview
1
2
3
1. Activate remote control: Allows the MammoWorkstation to synchronize the context with another
application (RIS, MIS, SIS, etc.).
2. Enter the file system path to the external binary.
Note:
If you are using a batch file to call the third party application, please start the third party application
using the Windows command "Start" in the batch file.
If you are not using the Windows command "Start" in the batch file, the batch file never terminates.
For further information, please contact the next GE service level.
3. Enter the Remote command parameters, the application you want to remotely control asks for.
Note:
Contact the vendor of the application for further detail on specifically required Remote command
parameters.
419
Job Card CFG C13 - Desktop Synchronization from MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote Control)
For the open study event, the command line arguments, the binary is called with, can be parameterized.
For Study Instance UID, Accession Number and Patient ID, wildcards can be used. Wildcards in the
parameter list are replaced by the values of the current context.
• [study]: wildcard for the Study Instance UID.
E.g.: -STUDYID [study]
• [accno]: wildcard for the Accession -Number.
E.g.: -ACCESSIONNR [accno]
• [patid]: wildcard for the Patient-ID.
E.g.: -PATIENTID [patid]
Note:
The default parameter is -STUDYID[study][accno]: The remotely accessed application will
receive the Study Instance UID as well as the Accession-Number.
Note:
All parameters are used with quotes around. e.g. if you define call.exe --study [study] -- acc [accno]
this will result in the call call.exe --study "123" --acc "456"
So please check with the 3rd party software if they can handle quotes.
420
Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration
Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to DICOM Shuttle and Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Introduction
Routing rules allow associating actions to storage AE titles. If a document is sent to the rule AE title, the
rule is executed.
4 "Routing" Tab Overview
2
3
44
55
66
77
99
1. List of all rules created. Create a new rule with the [plus] button.
Note:
Do NOT delete any of the default routing rules. Only modifications are allowed.
2. The display name of the rule. This should be descriptive.
3. AE title of the rule.
Note:
Always reference a rule by it’s AE title.
Rule display names are only relevant for the user interface.
421
4. Optionally, formulate a precondition under which this rule is executed. If the precondition is not met,
no action takes place.
Preconditions can contain "and" and "or" relations.
Example:
a. Click [New] for a new precondition.
b. Enter the DICOM tag and value and whether this condition is to be met (==) or not (!=).
c. Add an "and" related precondition:

- To add an "and" related precondition to this precondition, select (i.e. highlight) the first created
precondition and select [New] once more.
- Enter the second DICOM tag and value and wether this condition is to be met (==) or not (!=).
This precondition means that the rule only processes documents where the DICOM tag
0008,0060 has the value "SR" the DICOM tag 0018,7050 has the value Ag. All other
documents will be ignored.
d. Add an "or" related precondition.
- To add an "or" related precondition, make sure none of the previously created precondition is
selected (i.e. highlighted) and select [New].
- Enter the second DICOM tag and value and wether this condition is to be met (==) or not (!=).
This precondition means that the rule only processes documents where the DICOM tag
0008,0060 has the value "SR" or "PR". All other documents will be ignored.
422
5. Change DICOM Header.

a. It is possible to change DICOM tags of incoming documents.
WARNING
Use this option only if you are exactly aware of the consequences.
Modification of DICOM header information for incoming documents may destroy image and/or
patient data. A user must be exactly aware of the consequences when using this option
There are many DICOM tags that shall not be modified. In certain situations changing a tag requires
changing other tags as well, e.g., the instance UID.
b. Define one or more actions. Each action can have a precondition of its own.
Formulate the tags and values that need to be corrected. Refer to section How to Correct Patient
Demographics on page 844 for details
6. Checkmark "Notify Collaboration Server" if a worklist entry is to be created when an image is
received by the rule.
An example is the default rule "Create worklist on import" with the AE title "AE_MAMMO_WL".
Leave "localhost" if the Collaboration Server is installed on this PC workstation. If the Collaboration
Server is not installed on this PC, enter the Name or IP address of the Collaboration Server.
7. Option to maintain a MPI (Master Patient Index) to anonymize patient’s identity towards external
targets (i.e. external diagnostic readings) and keeping track of the true identity internally. (Do not
use.)
8. Determine if images are decompressed when imported.
Must always be checked for all rules on MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station.
On a DICOM Shuttle, images typically remain untouched in compressed format for further routing.
423
9. Configure send actions.

a. Click [New] to add targets to the send action.
The "Forward to" drop down menu lists all available destination DICOM partners (see Job Card CFG
C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403).
Note:
When adding a new DICOM partner the IDI application has to be terminated and restarted in order
for the new target to be visible on the "Forward to" drop down menu.
b. Choose the compression rate.
- Compression = 0 ➜ images will not be compressed.
Images with no compression are allowed for primary diagnostic interpretation.
- Compression = 1 ➜ images will be compressed using a lossless compression.
Note:
Please check local regulations if lossless compressed images are allowed for primary diagnostic
interpretation in your country.
- Compression = 2 - 999 ➜ images will be compressed lossy with the given factor.
Lossy compressed images are not allowed for primary diagnostic interpretation. This
compression ratio is only allowed for priors.
c. Choose whether the send action is to take place immediately or at a specific time.
424
5 Configuration Example: Image Distribution

The following example shows the configuration needed to distribute the incoming images to different
DICOM nodes.
1. Define a rule:
Example:
Any image sent to the routing rule "LOC_XX" (any location) will be sent to the recipients below (see
the list in section "Send action" (1)) unless it does not meet the precondition.
2. Define the precondition:

Example:
Only images with a patient ID (DICOM Tag 0010,0020) not starting with "1.2" should be forwarded
according to the rule above:
425
3. Change DICOM Header.

Example:
• In case the source sending the images uses tags that are not compliant with the DICOM
standard, corrections can be automated with this feature.
• In case some tags have to be modified due to requirements of the workflow, corrections can be
automated with this feature.
Tag view position is

18,1051 or 18,5101
Tag laterality is 20,60

or 20,62
The document does not contain the correct DICOM tags. Instead a private tag (0019,0010) is
provided. The rule corrects the DICOM header tags for view position and laterality.
6 Configuration Example: SR Distribution

The following use case in this example demands routing rules configuration on different nodes.
Use Case:
After the reading for a client has been completed on a selected MWS/MDS, a report (SR) is being
created on this machine. This SR needs to be sent to a rule (listed on DSH) that distributes the SRs to all
other machines MWS/MDS (and especially to the Collaboration Server).
The following example shows the configurations needed to distribute the SR to different DICOM nodes.
426
1. Define a distribution rule on DSH to

distribute the incoming SR to all MWS/
MDS:
a. Login on DSH and go to tab "Routing".
b. Create a new routing rule on DSH for
each MWS/MDS where SRs can be
created as shown in the following
screenshot "SR_From_B4".
c. In the field "Send action", add recipients
(in this case all MWS/MDS except the
MWS, where the SR was created).
2. Define a distribution rule on each MWS/MDS to send the created SR to the DICOM Shuttle.
a. Define a new partner on the MDS/
MWS
- Login on each MDS and MWS
that creates SR and go to tab
"Communication".
- Create a new partner (which will
be the DICOM Shuttle) and for
the target, choose the name of
the routing rule (configured in the
screenshot above) hosted on the
DICOM Shuttle "SR_FROM_B4".
- Test connectivity with ping and
[C-ECHO].
- Click [Apply].
427
b. Define a new partner on the MDS/

MWS
- Go to tab "Communication" and
switch to "Cache" as shown in
the screenshot below.
- For destination, choose in the
drop down menu the new
created partner "SR_FROM_B4"
responsible for the SR sending.
This will result in all SR documents being automatically sent to the distribution rule on the DSH (which
then sends it to the CS and all other machines except the one where the SR was generated).
428
Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server
Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a Worklist Server Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS, MDS, DICOM Shuttle with WorklistBroker, Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction: What Is a Worklist?

When a client enters the medical practice of a physician (radiologist), all relevant data (name, ID, date of
birth, etc.) are entered into a database. This is usually a RIS (Radiology Information System) or any
other proprietary system.
All clients, of whom a mammography is to be taken, are added to a list – referred to as "worklist". The
worklist is then transferred to the mammography modality. This is more convenient and prevents
misspellings (especially with long patient IDs).
Typically the worklist server is a RIS/HIS/SIS information system. The Image Diagnost Collaboration
Server is a special worklist server that adds user and group awareness to DICOM worklists.
4 "Worklist & RIS" Tab Overview
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 11
12
13
14
15
16
429
1. Overview of configured worklists. Create a new worklist with the plus button.
2. Display name of the worklist.
3. The ID is generated automatically and cannot be changed.
4. Description of the worklist.
5. AE title used to identify myself (Calling AE title).
If left blank, this is the same as the local AE title (tab Local).
To access a worklist scheduled for a specific modality, the AE title of the modality can be entered
here.
6. TCP/IP address of the worklist server. Use [Ping] to verify network connection.
7. AE title of the worklist server SCP. Use [C-ECHO] to verify DICOM connection.
8. Port on which the worklist server SCP listens.
9. Search Keys: Filter the worklist from the worklist server by the desired criteria.
Note:
The Image Diagnost Workflow-Broker provides client side filtering. In case the worklist server does
not support a search key, i.e., the server provides too many entries, the application locally filters
the answer and removes the surplus entries.
A list of typical DICOM search keys is provided in the dialog:
Allowed search keys are:
Schedules Procedure Step
>Scheduled Station AE Title (0040,0001)
430
>Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date (0040,0002)
>Scheduled Procedure Step Start (0040,0003)

Time
>Modality (0008,0060)
>Scheduled Procedure Step ID (0040,0009)
Requested Procedure
Requested Procedure Description (0032,1060)
Requested Procedure ID (0040,1001)
Study Instance UID (0020,000D)
Imaging Service Request
Accession Number (0008,0050)
Requesting Physician (0032,1032)
Referring Physician’s Name (0008,0090)
Patient Identification
Patient’s Name (0010,0010)
Patient ID (0010,0020)
Other Patient ID’s (0010,1000)
Patient Demographic
Patients Birth Date (0010,0030)
Patient’s Sex (0010,0040)
10. Enable "PPS" if the workflow server accepts DICOM Performed Procedure Steps (PPS). In that case
MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station can commit worklist task status, i.e., the
worklist server knows when to close the task.
Note:
Must always be checked in case of a Collaboration Server.
11. Check "MammoWorkstation" if you configure a worklist for MammoWorkstation or Mammo
Documentation Station. The worklist will then be available to the user in the Worklist tab of the
Patient Manager.
12. Associated archive: location where the MWS will search for images corresponding to the worklist
task.
Note:
The local cache will always be searched no matter what this field contains.
Usually, this field contains the PACS archive that is used in combination with the RIS. Each worklist
can be associated to its own source.
Only under certain circumstances the local cache is configured (if the archive cannot perform Q/R
tasks or is exceptionally slow). It is then recommended to prefetch images from the PACS before
performing reading tasks.
431
13. Check "Image Diagnost Collaboration Server" if the worklist is provided by a Collaboration Server. In
that case, the worklist contains additional user and group information.
(only available with license module "Workflow").
14. Query mode: Always select "Current tasks" for Collaboration Server.
(The option "Free search in worklist" is private.)
Setting for a Collaboration Server managed task creation:
Setting for a RIS (or any other) managed task creation:
Note:
Even though "Free search in worklist" is greyed out it has to be selected.
15. Check "WorklistBroker" to activate the worklist broker mode. In that case the worklist is stored in the
local WorklistBroker and is available from the WorklistBroker DICOM Worklist SCP.
Note:
For further information refer to Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration on page 437.
16. Adjust port for HL7 communication.

Note:
For further information, see Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on page 461.
432
Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration
Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to DICOM Shuttle.
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Introduction
To improve the performance of a DICOM Shuttle, two configurations can be modified.
4 Deactivate ROI Calculation

3. Edit CcConf.xml.
4. Look for the following tag: <allow_roi_calculation description=[...]>, and set the value
of this tag to 0:
5. After any modification in the CcConf.xml, restart the Apache Tomcat service.
433
Job Card CFG C17 - DICOM Shuttle Configuration
5 Deactivate the Icon Preview Calculation

1. Go to Support Interface..
3. Edit the CcConf.xml.
- Look for the following tag: <icon_width_pix description=[...]>, and set the value of this
tag to 0:
434
Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration
Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to DICOM Shuttle with WorklistBroker and Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Introduction
The local DICOM Worklist SCP provides DICOM modality Worklist to external devices. The DICOM
Shuttle WorklistBroker provides worklists for modalities. The Collaboration Server provides worklists for
MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station.
4 Configuration
4-1 Worklist SCP
The default configuration of the local Worklist SCP is:
AE-Title: AE_WORK
TCP/IP port: 4005
1. Keep this AE-Title and port unless the network administrator of the customer site tells you otherwise.
Other DICOM partners, e.g. a modality, must know this AE Title.
2. To edit the local Worklist SCP parameters:
- Edit IDWorklistSCP.xml
- Edit the following two tags:
435
Job Card CFG C18 - DICOM Worklist SCP Configuration
4-2 Activate the Worklist

3. To activate the worklist:
- Edit WfConf.xml
- Set the value of the following tag <mwl_find_connection_is_active description=
[...]> to 1
4-3 Adjust Query Cycle Time

4. If necessary, refresh the time adjustment (in minutes):
- Edit WfConf.xml
- Set the value of the tag <mwl_find_query_cycle description=[...]> to an appropriate
value (in minutes)
Example (default value is 5):
436
Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration
Job Card CFG C20 - WorklistBroker Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to DICOM Shuttle with WorklistBroker and Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Introduction
The ImageDiagnost WorklistBroker has two functions:
1. Merge several worklists from external worklist servers into one single worklist and present this
worklist to a mammography station.
2. Duplicate an existing worklist in order to present it to more than one mammography station.
The WorklistBroker is part of the functional range of the DICOM Shuttle. It is a separate piece of software
though and has to be licensed separately.
The WorklistBroker acts as a DICOM Worklist SCU when querying Worklist from remote worklist server
such as a RIS. It uses the DICOM Worklist SCP to provide worklists to modalities or MammoWorkstation
and Mammo Documentation Station.
4 Worklist Broker - Merge Several Worklists

1. The worklist for the mammography station (Mammo) might come from different sources (RIS, PIS or
any other). Many mammography stations are only capable of accepting a worklist from one single
source. Consequently only Worklist 1 would be displayed at the mammography station. Patient
information of Worklist 2 and Worklist 3 would have to be typed in manually. The Image Diagnost
worklist broker can compensate this deficiency.
437
2. Different worklist sources are merged into one single worklist.
3. Configuration Example:
The screenshots below shows 2 worklists from 2 different sources (RIS_WORKLIST1 and
RIS_WORKLIST2).
Both reference the same worklist rule "EXTERNAL_TASK," which means that they are implicitly
merged into one single worklist.
438
The EXTERNAL_TASK rule states the target (Mammography station) of the merged worklist. It will
be displayed at the mammography station "ANY_X_RAY_MASCHINE".
Click on [Edit] to enter the details:
Worklist
target
439
5 WorklistBroker: Duplicate an Existing Worklist

1. In this scenario one worklist is to be presented to several mammography stations. Copies of the
worklist rule item „DIST2MAMMO123“ (distribute to mammography stations 1, 2 and 3) are created.
Each worklist rule item specifies a different target.
2. Configuration Example:
The screenshots below shows one worklist (RIS_WORKLIST1), which references the worklist rule
item "DIST2MAMMO123". Two copies of this worklist rule item are created. Each item states a
different target.
440
a. Click [Edit rules] and create two copies of the existing rule so that there will be three instances.
target 1
Create
or
delete
target 2
target 3
b. Combine the two functions of the worklist broker to merge several worklists into one single
worklist and present it to several mammography stations.
441
This page is blank.
442
Job Card CFG C25 - Configuration for Storage Commit
Job Card CFG C25 - Configuration for Storage Commit Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to PACS and MWS/MDS.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 45’
3 Workflow of Storage Commit Process

The storage commit process consists in receiving a confirmation that the data has arrived to the receiver
system. Such a process minimizes the risk of image data loss and it can be configured between the
MWS/MDS and the PACS.
1. MWS/MDS sends data (SR, PR, etc.) to the PACS (document archive), along with a request for
storage commit.
2. When the PACS receives the data, it will send a storage commit response to the MWS/MDS, to
confirm receiving the data.
1. data to archive
+
storage commit request
2. storage commit response
4 Configuration of the Storage Commit Process

Note:
All necessary configurations can be done within the IDI MammoWorkstation GUI:
• Login to Settings. The default credentials are:
- Name: admin
- Password: admin
443
Configure a PACS (document archive) that will archive the DICOM documents. The PACS (document
archive) must support DICOM Storage Commit.
Note:
Contact the PACS (document archive) provider to ensure that DICOM Storage Commit is
supported.
1. Go to the tab "Communication".
Note:
For more information on configuration of a DICOM partner on the “Communication” tab, refer to
Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403.
2. Setup an additional DICOM Partner "Remote DICOM archive" via the Select archive type dialog:
444
3. Configure the new DICOM partner as usual.

Checkmark the box "Supports Dicom storage commitment" and fill in the appropriate DICOM AE-Title
and the appropriate TCP Port.
4. Click [OK] to implement the applied configurations.

5. Restart the services.
5 Verification
To verify whether the storage commit process works, do the following:
1. Login to the MWS software.
2. On the Control monitor, click on [Status] → Send State:
445
3. Check the status of a newly created report/finding.

! Notice:
Do not create any fake reports on real cases to test this!
4. If the files have been successfully sent to the PACS archive, the following message will be displayed.
Note:
The time required from the PACS to confirm the storage commit might vary depending on the time
interval configured on the PACS archive to send back an answer.
6 Troubleshooting
If the status message does not change to "Send Completed", then the items could not be successfully
transfered to the PACS and will thus be saved in the MWS Cache.
In order to find out why the PACS could not confirm receiving the data, do the following:
- check the message displayed in the Status column (see screenshot above);
- check the PACS logs.
If the issue is on the PACS side, contact the PACS support team.
If the issue could not be addressed, contact the next GE service level.
446
Job Card CFG A82 - Setting up Stand-alone MWS Including CS
Job Card CFG A82 - Setting up Stand-alone MWS Including CS Chapter 8
1 Applicability
2 Personnel requirements
1 Field Engineer
3 Hardware requirements
Note:
A valid license for Image Diagnost Software is required to operate. The license key depends on
the PC hardware.
4 Preliminary steps
1. Install system as usual following the installation scenario.
2. Order license as usual but add that the CS license must be included.
3. Enter code and ensure that CS is active.
If not, send an email to the person who did provide the license.
447
5 Settings
1. Restart IDDicomWorklistSCP in the service panel:
- restart the IDDicomWorklistSCP service.
448
2. Log in to MWS settings and configure the Worklist:
- Be sure that everything is just on the standard settings.

- the Worklist name and associated archive (PACS for example) might be changed.
Note:
If not, be aware that all reports are only being stored in the cache and not sent out automatically.
449
4. Configure a role (group) in the usermanager:
450
5. Create user ID and choose the following parameters:

- Standard User as a name,
- Breast Care Center as ROLE member,
- Reading as authorized to access TASKs.
6. Edit Item in Worklistdefinition.en.xml in %IDI_HOME%/config (changes marked bold):

<item_creation>
<wl_order_task_type_code>SINGLE_READING</wl_order_task_type_code>
<wl_order_task_type_description>Reading</
<sps_performing_actor_name>Standard User</sps_performing_actor_name>
</item_creation>
7. Restart Apache Tomcat in the service panel.
451
Note:
First possible configuration is finished:
a. Sending an image to the AE AE_MAMMO_WL will create a "Reading" task in the
b. Once the user "Standard User" with the ID "idi" logs in, he can select the task "Reading" from
the current task worklist in the role/group "Breast Care Center":
452
Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration
Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 "Print" Tab Overview
11
22
44
55
1. Display name of the printer.

2. Enter a description of the printer.
3. TCP/IP address of the printer ➜ Use [Ping] to verify TCP/IP connectivity.
4. AE title of the printer SCP ➜ Use [C-ECHO] to verify DICOM connectivity.
5. Port of the printer SCP.
6. Test the printer availability by clicking on [Printer test] ➜The result will be displayed in the text field next
to the [Printer test] button.
! Notice:
Restart the MWS to activate the printer settings.
453
4 Verification
1. Press [Check Printer] to perform basic functionality and connectivity test of the printer.
The output shall describe the printer name and supported formats.
2. In case the printer is not identified, MammoWorkstation provides default values and the printer name
is "default printer".
In this case:
a. Start the MammoWorkstation and open a patient.
b. Click on the [Print] button and press [Info].
A popup window will appear showing the DICOM information of the printer.
Illustration 1 Printer DICOM information
c. Make sure that this information is 100% consistent with the printer settings in the
PrinterDefaults.xml. To check this:
- Edit the PrinterDefaults.xml
For the example in Illustration 1, the printer configuration line should be:
<PrinterS0P PrinterName="DRYPIX1"
Manufacturer="FUJIFILM Corporation"
ManufacturerModelName="DRYPIX"/>
d. If the information in the DICOM information of the printer differ from the one in the
PrinterDefaults.xml, correct the PrinterDefaults.xml.
e. Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
3. If the printer model is not included in this file, contact the next GE service level for assistance.
454
5 Customize Printer Configuration

5-1 Printer Module
3. Edit the PrinterDefaults.xml
Each printer configuration contains the following line:
Example for Fuji Drypix 4000:

<PrinterS0P PrinterName="DRYPIX4000HIGH"
Manufacturer="FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD"
ManufacturerModelName="DRYPIX 4000"/>
4. Copy these three lines and set the values to the ones of your printer.
Note:
Make sure to use the correct DICOM information of the printer.
! Notice:
If the printer was customized, send the printer information and printer configuration to
idiservice@ge.com.
5-2 Enable Sending of Max/Min Density

Note:
Sending of max/min density information should be disabled for most printers.
3. Edit the PrinterDefaults.xml
455
4. Edit the following tags by setting the parameter "apply" to

a. "yes": enable sending of min/max density
b. "no": disable sending of min/max density
<MaxDensity unit="Old/100" value="400" apply="yes"/>
<MinDensity unit="Old/100" value="20" apply="yes"/>
Note:
If sending of max/min density is enabled, the values of these tags must be corrected according to
the used printer module.
456
Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration
Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 “Calibration” Tab Overview
2a
2b
1. Physical screen size must be configured for true scale (1:1) scaling to operate properly.
Size values must exactly match the dimensions of the two review monitors (the visible area). Either
refer to the manufacturer’s specification or take exact measurements with a ruler.
The following sizes are already known:
Monitor Type PN Width Height
Barco Nio BB MDNG-5121 5450693 676 (=2 x 338) 422
457
Job Card CFG C24 - Measurements Calibration
Barco Coronis Mammo 5437423 676 422

MDMG-5121
Eizo SMD 21511 5432871 or 676 422
5343107
Eizo GX540 5432871-2 676 or 675.8 422 or 422.4
2. The content shown on one specific monitor is fixed to either "Viewer " or "Reporting".
To complete these boxes, you need to identify the numbers of the monitors used:
• Go to
- for Windows 7: Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Display ➜ Adjust Resolution
- for Windows XP: Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Display, select the tab Settings.
• Click on [Identify] ➜ White numbers will be displayed on your monitors.
a. Insert the monitor numbers for the Viewer on which the MG images will be displayed.
Examples:
Viewer = 2,3
or
Viewer = 3,2
b. Insert the number of the monitor on which you would like to display the Reporting view.
Examples:
Reporting = 1
or
Reporting = 4
3. Correction of the gray scale display function. Change only after consultation with IDI.
With Gamma correction for digitized film, you can simulate a light-box appearance on screen (values
of 0.4 to 0.5)
4. The resolution an image has when transferred from the IDI image folder to a third party application
via drag-and-drop.
Note:
Click [OK] after completion to implement your configuration ➜ The Services will be restarted.
458
Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages Configuration on DVD/CD
Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages Configuration on DVD/

CD Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Procedure
(user: admin; password: admin)
2. Open the Image Diagnost Folder.
3. Click on [MammoWorkstation].
4. Click on [cdViewer].
5. Click on [config].
6. Edit the GlobalConfig.ini
7. Replace "Language = de " by the short code of your language (e.g. "en" for English).
Note:
Available languages and short codes are:
Language short codes Language
EN English
DA Danish
DE German
ES Spanish
FI Finnish
FR French
IT Italian
NL Dutch
459
Job Card CFG C28 - DICOM-Viewer Languages Configuration on DVD/CD
Language short codes Language
NO Norwegian
PT Portuguese
SV Swedish
CS Czech (excluding reporting)
EL Greece (excluding reporting)
HU Hungarian (excluding reporting)
JA Japanese (excluding reporting)
KO Korean (excluding reporting)
PL Polish (excluding reporting)
RU Russian (excluding reporting)
TR Turkish (excluding reporting)
ZH-CN Chinese (excluding reporting)
8. Save the applied configuration by clicking [Save].

9. After any modification in the GlobalConfig.ini restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
10. Configure a new DICOM Partner (DICOMDIR Media) in the tab Communication (see Job Card CFG
C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403).
460
Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration
Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS, MDS and Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Enable HL7 Export

3. Edit WfConf.xml.
4. Set the value for the following tag to 1:
<sr_h17_export_is_allowed description="Allow SR2HL7 Export">1</sr
461
6. Verify that HL7 export is enabled by going to Finding summary ➜ Worklist Status.
A new column (SRHL7 Export Status) should be visible now:
4 Port Adjustment for HL7 Communication

1. Login to MammoWorkstation Settings
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Open the tab Worklist & RIS.
3. Select the RIS system which receives HL7.
4. Enable the checkbox Is HL7 server.
5. Select the button [Configure HL7 server].
You will see the following input mask:
6. Fill in the following fields:

a. Host name / IP number: Enter the host name / IP address of the RIS
b. Port: enter the Port of the RIS
462
c. Receiving application: This field uniquely identifies the receiving application among all other
applications within the network enterprise. The network enterprise consists of all those
applications that participate in the exchange of HL7 messages within the enterprise.
d. Receiving facility: This field identifies the receiving application among multiple identical instances
of the application running on behalf of HL7 identifier for the user-defined table of values for the
first component.
e. HL7 configuration file name: Enter the complete path name.
Note:
If your HL7 configuration partner is a Centricity RISi 4_2, the configuration file name is:
%IDI_Home%\config\SR2HL7_GE_Centricity_RISi_4_2.xml.
As far as other HL7 configuration partners are concerned, contact the next GE service level for
assistance.
5 Check Workflow Settings

3. Edit the WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
4. Configure the following parameter: “hl7_target id=”

5. Insert the RIS ID after <hl7_target id="..."
(red text (1) in the following example)
Note:
Copy the RIS ID from the Config GUI:
- Login to MammoWorkstation Settings
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
463
- Open the tab Worklist & RIS.

- Copy the ID of the RIS (2nd text input field after Worklist name)
6. Indicate if you want to send a PDF report to the RIS or not

 insert "Yes" or "No" (red text (2) in the following example)
Note:
For all tasks that you want to export as HL7, you must repeat steps 1 to 6.
The below indicated example displays the applied modifications
for task type KVSCREENING_TASK_3.
Note:
A PDF report can only be sent if the Workstation created an encapsulated PDF.
Example:
<result_export task_type_code="KVSCREENING_TASK_3">
<sr_hl7_export>
<targets>
<hl7_target id="EXAMPLE-RIS-1" dicom_encapsulated_pdf="YES" />
</targets>
</sr_hl7_export>
</result_export>
6 Restart Apache Tomcat Service

2. Select "Restart Server".
464
Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled Reporting Configuration
Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled Reporting Configuration Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 60’
3 Introduction
The configuration of unscheduled reporting is required for the following use case:
1. The physician selects a case in an external RIS (Patient Selection RIS). The RIS opens the selected
case in the MammoWorkstation via remote control.
2. The physician can read the case and enter the report in the MammoWorkstation. The report is then
going to be transferred to an IDI Collaboration Server.
3. The IDI Collaboration Server sends the report data to the external RIS (Report Storage RIS) via HL7
export.
Note:
To review the finished report, the physician needs to open the report in the Report Storage RIS.
4 Unscheduled Reporting
The configuration of unscheduled reporting requires the following four configuration steps:
1. Configuring the MammoWorkstation.
2. Configuring remote control in the RIS (Patient Selection RIS).
3. Configuring the IDI Collaboration Server.
4. Configuring the RIS (Report Storage RIS) responsible for storing the sent report data.
465
4-1 Configuring the MammoWorkstation

- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Select the tab "Remote Control".
3. Make sure the check box "Allow remote control by other application" is selected.
Note:
This check box is selected by default.
4. Select the tab "Worklist &RIS".
5. Set up the Collaboration Server. For more information on this topic, refer to Job Card CFG C16 -
Connection to a Worklist Server on page 429.
Note:
For the Unscheduled Reporting, the MammoWorkstation will not receive the worklists from this
Collaboration Server since all activities are triggered by the RIS.
However, the Collaboration Server can provide its own additional worklist.
466
6. Select the tab "Communication".

For the Unscheduled Reporting the following settings are necessary:
a. Ensure that for every MammoWorkstation, the Collaboration Server is listed as target destination.
467
b. The PACS, which is used by the RIS, must be added as DICOM Partner (1).
All "new evidence documents (PR/SR)" must be sent to the Collaboration Server (2).
Note:
For more information on how to setup DICOM partners, refer to Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM
Partners Configuration on page 403.

The PACS, which is used by the RIS, must be specified in the Associated archive drop down menu.
Note:
For more information on Remote Control, refer to Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization
from Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) on page 413.
468
4-2 Configuring Remote Control in the RIS (Patient Selection RIS)

Note:
It is the responsibility of the RIS provider to enable remote control. Contact the RIS provider to
make sure the remote control interface is correctly configured.
To remotely control the MammoWorkstation, the following tool must be used:

"MWSRemoteControl.exe".
This tool is provided by Image Diagnost:
➜ Go to %IDI_Home%\CacheController
To verify the tool, follow the below procedure:
1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type "cmd" and hit [Enter].
2. Drag and drop (1) the "MWSRemoteControl.exe" in the opened Command Line window.
3. Type in "--scheduled-task --patient-by-id XXXXX".
Note:
For opening a case on the MammoWorkstation, the case must be clearly identified by one of the
following query parameters:
- Patient ID
- Study Instance UID
- Accession number
4. Hit [Enter].
! Notice:
For the RIS configuration it is important that the"MWSRemoteControl.exe" tool is always started
with the option "- -scheduled-task".
469
4-3 Configuring the IDI Collaboration Server

Note:
The Collaboration Server receiving the report data from the external MammoWorkstation systems
(see section 4-1 Configuring the MammoWorkstation) is now configured to transfer the report data
via HL7 to the Report Storage RIS.
4-3-1 Configuration in the MammoWorkstation GUI
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Select the tab "Worklist & RIS".
3. Set up the Report Storage RIS. For more information on this topic, refer to Job Card CFG C16 -
Note:
The RIS ID (1) is created automatically. Note the RIS ID down, you will need it to complete the
configuration in the Supportinterface (see section 4-3-2 Configuration in the Supportinterface).
4. Enable the checkbox "Is HL7 server" (2).
5. Select the button [Configure HL7 server].
Note:
For more information on HL7 export configuration, refer to Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export
470
4-3-2 Configuration in the Supportinterface

3. Edit WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
4. Configure the HL7 element (1):

<result_export task_type_code="UNSCHEDULED_REPORTING">
• Insert the RIS ID, which was automatically created in the MammoWorkstation GUI field "ID" (see
also section 4-3-1 Configuration in the MammoWorkstation GUI), in the tag <hl7_target
id=..>(2)
Note:
For further information on how to configure HL7 Export, refer to Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export
5 Configuring the RIS (Report Storage RIS)

To make sure that the HL7 communication between Collaboration Server and RIS (Report Storage RIS)
is successful the Report Storage RIS must be configured to be able to receive HL7 information.
Note:
It is the responsibility of the RIS provider to enable HL7 communication. Contact the RIS provider
to make sure that the HL7 communication feature is correctly configured in the Report Storage
RIS.
471
This page is blank.
472
Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test
Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Introduction
The acceptance test is mandatory to complete the installation of the system.
The acceptance test must be repeated:
- Whenever third party software is installed on the same PC.
- Whenever a new interface to a third-party system is initially configured.
- Whenever a connected third-party system is changed (only the tests that apply to the specific
interface must be performed).
3-1 How to Perform the Acceptance test

1. Fill in the system configuration
2. Carry out the acceptance test
3. Fill in the test results
4. Archive the test results
4 System Configuration
Document the exact system configuration this acceptance test is applied to (refer to the Image Diagnost
Software DVD AcceptanceTest_Report.pdf).
Note:
Product type refers to Mammography Modalities, PACS, RIS, CAD and Printers.
Product Vendor Product Product Hostname/ AE Title AE port NAT

Type name name version IP address address
473
5 Acceptance Test
5-1 File-path of Local Image Cache
5-1-1 Purpose
• Validate the hard-disk resources for the local cache database are available.
• Validate that third party software does not block hard-disk resources.
5-1-2 Procedure
1. Go to Settings tab "Local" and read the cache file path.
2. Open the cache file path in Windows Explorer.
3. Verify that the cache file path directs to an empty hard-disk partition. The only folder on the partition
shall be the local image cache.
5-1-3 If the Test Fails
1. Correct the location of the local cache.
2. Remove all third-party files from the cache partition.
5-2 Storage SCP, Database and Webserver

5-2-1 Purpose
• Validate that the TCP/IP ports for the DICOM Storage SCP, the database, and the webserver are
available.
• Validate that third party software does not block the TCP/IP ports used for Storage SCP, database or
webserver.
5-2-2 Procedure
1. Send new DICOM images to the local storage SCP.
2. MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation Station: Open the case and verify that the images
are displayed.
Other: Verify on Support Interface that the documents were imported.
1. Check if the IDReceiveSCP service is running: Manually restart the IDReceiveSCP service (using
Windows services control)
2. Check if the Apache Tomcat service is running: Manually restart the Apache Tomcat service (using
Windows services control).
3. Check if the IDDatabase service is running: Manually restart the IDDatabase service (using Windows
services control)
4. Open "log/IDReceiveSCP.log" and check for error messages.
5. Causes can be:
• no valid license
• another service blocking the Storage SCP port (validate with command line command netstat).
5-3 Mammographic Image Identification (only for MammoWorkstation)

5-3-1 Purpose
• Validate the required display of labeling on screen.
474
5-3-2 Procedure
For each connected mammography modality:
1. Open a case in MammoWorkstation with at least one CC and one MLO view of each breast.
2. Verify that the following labeling appears on each image:
• Name of patient (top row)
• Patient identifier (top row, in brackets)
• Date of examination (bottom center)
• View and laterality (position near the axilla)
3. Activate "Show image information" in the toolbar.
4. Verify that the following labeling appears on each image:
• Facility name and location. At a minimum, the location shall include the city, State and zip code of
the facility.
• Technologist identification.
• Detector ID or Cassette ID (used for Cassette/screen identification).
• Device Serial Number (used for Mammography unit identification).
1. Login to MammoWorkstation Settings and go to the tab "Preferences". Select "Reset to Standard".
2. Verify in the DICOM header of the images that the required DICOM tags are properly filled in.
To display the DICOM header, open the Support Interface, navigate to "import processes" and
search to the patient.
The required DICOM tags are listed in DICOM Conformance Statements
(http://www.imagediagnost.de/conformance/).
5-4 Calibration of Monitor Size (only for MammoWorkstation)

5-4-1 Purpose
• Validate that measurements in true size (1:1cm) are displayed with correct size.
5-4-2 Procedure
1. Open a case in MammoWorkstation.
2. Select the zoom "1:1cm true size".
3. Below the images a "1cm" indicator is displayed.
4. Take a ruler and validate that there is no significant discrepancy (less than 1mm).
1. Configure the display size in the MammoWorkstation settings tab "Calibration".
475
5-5 DICOM Q/R Interface (only for MammoWorkstation and Mammo Documentation
Station)
5-5-1 Purpose
• Validate that the DICOM Q/R interface with a third party PACS operates correctly.
5-5-2 Procedure
For each configured source partner (DICOM Query and Retrieve SCP):
2. Select the source in the Search tab of the Patient Manager.
3. Query a patient list (e.g. today).
4. Select a case and open it. The images must be transferred from the PACS and displayed.
1. Verify the partner configuration.
2. Ensure that the MammoWorkstation is configured in the PACS. The PACS must configure the IP
number and port that are associated with the MammoWorkstation AE title.
3. Verify that the PACS can manually send images to MammoWorkstation.
4. Open log/CacheController.log. Search for the corresponding FIND and MOVE commands.
The log-file contains the full command line command. Copy the line for the FIND and for the MOVE
and execute both in a Windows command shell.
5. Open log/IDReceiveSCP.log. Verify if an association was established.
5-6 DICOM Worklist Interface (only for MammoWorkstation and Mammo

Documentation Station)
5-6-1 Purpose
• Validate that the DICOM worklist interface with a third party worklist server, e.g. a RIS operates
correctly.
5-6-2 Procedure
For each configured worklist source (DICOM worklist SCP):
2. Select the source in the Worklist tab of the Patient Manager.
3. Query a worklist.
4. Verify that the entries in the MammoWorkstation worklist display correspond exactly with the entries
planned in the worklist server. Use the worklist server console (this might require a specialist from the
company that provides the worklist server to the customer).
5. Select a case and open it. The images must be transferred from the PACS and displayed.
1. Verify the worklist configuration. Especially have a close look at the matching keys.
2. Ensure that the MammoWorkstation is configured in the worklist server, e.g. RIS. Some worklist
servers require the client to be known.
476
5-7 DICOM Print Interface

(only for MammoWorkstation)
To ensure optimal quality of the film printer output, follow the QC program developed by the
manufacturer of the device. Refer to the Printer Operator’s Manual or ancillary documentation provided
by the manufacturer of the printer.
If the printer is used with a film processor incorporating wet chemistry processing, refer to the Printer
Operator’s Manual or ancillary documentation provided by the manufacturer of the printer.
The below test is an additional requirement. It does not replace the QC program developed by the
manufacturer of the printer.
5-7-1 Purpose
• Validate that the DICOM print interface with a third party DICOM printer operates correctly.
5-7-2 Procedure
1. Open a case and print a test image on attached printers.
2. Check image scaling. The 1 cm ruler in the footer must be 1 cm long.
3. Check overall image quality.
1. Verify the printer configuration. Ensure that the "Test Printer" protocol shows that the printer was
detected.
2. Verify that the printer is configured and that the customer has a license to print from this workstation
(this might require a specialist from the company that provides the printer to the customer). The
workstation should be configured in the printer with a dedicated AE Title.
3. Contact the vendor of the printer. Output quality must be configured in the printer.
477
6 Acceptance Tests Results
Test Completed /
Passed
Check the file path of local image cache

(Acceptance test 5.1)
Check that the TCP/IP ports are available for Storage SCP, database and webserver
Check MQSA compliance of labeling on screen

Check that measurements in true size are displayed with correct size
Check correct operation of DICOM Q/R interface with PACS

Check correct operation of DICOM worklist interface with worklist server (e.g. RIS)
Check correct operation of DICOM print interface with DICOM printer

7 Archive the Acceptance Test

1. Go to Image Diagnost Software DVD AcceptanceTest Report.pdf.
2. Fill out the PDF document:
• Table with general information about the site, customer, Filed Engineer
• Table concerning system configuration
• Table concerning acceptance test results.
3. Send this document to idiservice@ge.com.
478
Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder
Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder Chapter 8
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Backup to HDD
Note:
After every installation/upgrade it is mandatory to save the current configuration to a backup folder.
1. Create a folder on the HDD D (or C), e.g. BackupV4.x.x.

2. In this backup folder, copy the directories:
• %IDI_HOME%\CadServer
• %IDI_HOME%\config
4 Backup to USB Device

1. Create a folder on the USB key or external HHD, e.g. BackupV4.x.x.
2. In this backup folder, copy the directories:
• %IDI_HOME%\CadServer
• %IDI_HOME%\config
Note:
In case of a hardware failure or an error, restore the configuration folder as described in Job Card
DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder on page 741.
479
Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder
This page is blank.
480
Advanced Configuration
Chapter 9 Advanced Configuration
1 Overview
This chapter contains advanced configuration options that should only be executed by experienced Field
Engineers. The chapter includes the following job cards:
- Job Card CFG C42 - Advanced HL7 Configuration on page 483

- Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on page 487
- Job Card CFG C75 - Patient Export on page 493
- Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus Reading on page 495
- Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export on page 497
- Job Card CFG C27 - Prefetching on page 501
- Job Card CFG C29 - Transfer Syntax Configuration on page 505
- Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter Configuration on page 507
- Job Card CFG C78 - Configuration for PACS Viewer License on page 533
- Job Card CFG C81 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service on page 541
- Job Card CFG C31- Patient List Importer on page 543
- Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameter on page 547
- Job Card CFG C48 - Selective PDF/HL7/XML Export on page 555
- Job Card CFG C50 - Quadrant Zoom Configuration on page 561
- Job Card CFG C52 - Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration on page 563
- Job Card CFG C56 - Configuration of the AW Server Adapter on page 569
- Job Card CFG C58 - ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration on page 579
- Job Card CFG C62 - Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration on page 583
- Job Card CFG C60 - Configuration of MRS Adapter on page 589
- Job Card CFG C54 - Change Administrator Password for IDI Support Interface on page 623
- Job Card CFG C64 - Configuration of the Merge CADstream Adapter on page 607
- Job Card CFG C80 - Configuration of FileDrop Adapter on page 615
- Job Card CFG C66 - Configuration of the "Claim Worklist Item" Feature on page 625
- Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis Mask Specific Configuration on page 629
- Job Card CFG C70 - Reporting Mask Specific Configuration on page 633
- Job Card CFG C76 - In-image Reporting on page 637
- Job Card CFG M74 - Additional Images on page 641
- Job Card CFG M71 - Hierarchical Menu for Predefined Text Blocks on page 645
- Job Card CFG C77 - Configuration of V-Preview on page 647
- Job Card CFG C79 - The Clunie Dicom Cleaner on page 655
- Job Card CFG C83 - Hanging Protocol Configuration on page 651
481 Chapter 9
Advanced Configuration
This page is blank.
Chapter 9 482
Job Card CFG C42 - Advanced HL7 Configuration
Job Card CFG C42 - Advanced HL7 Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Prerequisites
- Check that HL7 export is enabled (See Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on page 461).
4 HL7Comm Installation
To test the HL7 export interface, hl7comm has to be installed.
Note:
The HL7comm tool has to be used only for tests. Java 6 needs to be installed for this freeware tool
to work.
1. Download hl7comm from http://nixbit.com/cat//utilities/hl7-comm/.
2. Create a file named HL7Comm.conf.
This file will be used to hold the configuration setting to be loaded.
3. Edit and insert the following:
%HL7 Comm%
{Simple Controller}
logLevel=DEBUG
controllerName=Simple Receiver
[Logic?org.nule.integrateclient.samples.PassthroughLogicAgent]
[In:0?org.nule.integrateclient.net.Hl7ThreadServer]
listenPort=21110
acknowledgmentAgent=org.nule.integrateclient.net.Hl7Acknowledgment
[Out:0?org.nule.integrateclient.file.FileOut]
filename=C:\temp\HL7Comm.hl7
4. Load the config file (File ➜ Load config) that has just been created and click on [Start].
Note:
The output file will be saved to C:\temp\HL7Comm.hl7.
483
5 Complete a Whole Reading Circle to Verify HL7 Message Creation

5-1 Complete Task Anamnesis (on MDS)
1. Login to a MDS with user1/user1.
Note:
User1 is a default user entitled to do Anamnesis.
2. Go to tab Worklist and choose the following settings:
3. Open the patient and click [Safe & Next].

A SR document for Anamnesis will be created and sent to the Collaboration Server automatically (as
we configured on the MWS/MDS - Configure a target for structured report (SR) documents).
4. On the Collaboration Server, go to Support Interface.
5. Go to Runtime Status ➜ Findings Summary ➜ Worklist status.
As soon as the task "Anamnesis" is completed, the next task in sequence (which is "Clinical
Documentation") will be created.
5-2 Complete Task Clinical Documentation (on MDS)

Login to a MDS with user2/user2.
Note:
User2 is a default user entitled to do Clinical Documentation.
5-3 Complete Task First Reading (on MWS)

Login to a MWS with user3/user3.
Note:
User3 is a default user entitled to do First Reading.
484
5-4 Complete Task Second Reading (on MWS)

Login to a MWS with user4/user4.
Note:
User4 is a default user entitled to do Second Reading.
5-5 Reading Circle Completion

After completion of the Second Reading, the SR HL7 Export Status (task status) changes to "In
Progress" (until the SR document has arrived on the Collaboration Server).
If both readings were negative (no need for Consensus Reading), the SR HL7 Export Status changes to
"Scheduled".
6 Obtain the HL7 Message Output

After the HL7 message has been transmitted, the SR HL7 Export Status changes to "Completed"
485
The test tool HL7comm should contain the following output
AA = Acknowledgment accepted
AE = Acknowledgment error
1. Open C:\temp\HL7Comm.hl7
2. Format the output to see which sections the HL7 message contains (hit [Enter] after each delimiter).
There are OBX sections and the ZID - as configured in the SR2HL7_MIA.xml file
Note:
The logs created by IDI can also be checked:
- Open the Log Folder.
- Click on SRServices.log.
srservice.log (extract):
2009-04-08 02:07:14,296 INFO HL7MessageHandler [http-8060-5] Sending message with control id MammoSt04
2009-04-08 02:07:14,296 INFO HL7MessageHandler [http-8060-5] Connection established to localhost:21110
2009-04-08 02:07:14,296 INFO HL7MessageHandler [http-8060-5] Message MammoSt0408020714218 sent to local

2009-04-08 02:07:15,265 INFO HL7MessageHandler [http-8060-5] Acknowledgment received.
2009-04-08 02:07:15,265 INFO HL7MessageHandler [http-8060-5] Message ’MammoSt0408020714218’ accepted.
486
Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export
Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Enable PDF Export on MammoWorkstation

3. Edit CcConf.xml.
4. Look for the following tag:
<sr2pdf_target_format description="Target format for PDF output"

>dicom_encapsulated</sr2pdf_target_format>
There are three possible values for this tag:
- the default value of this tag is >dicom_encapsulated<
 a DICOM encapsulated PDF will be created and sent to the SR-target indicated as
destination (see Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403).
- change the value to >dicom_encapsulated,native<
a DICOM encapsulated PDF will be created and sent to the SR-target indicated as
destination (see Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403).
a PDF will be created and saved locally.
- change the value to >native<
after each report, a PDF will be created and saved locally.
Result: If "native" was included in the value, a native PDF will be saved under the path indicated in
CcConf.xml. See PDF Export Path on MammoWorkstation on page 488.
487
3-1 PDF Export Path on MammoWorkstation

To change the path under which the PDF will be saved:
- In the following tag, indicate the path under which the PDFs should be saved.
<sr2pdf_exportpath description="Folder name for native PDF export"

>C:\temp\pdfexport\</sr2pdf_exportpath>
Note:
In case the Collaboration Server is on the same system as the MammoWorkstation, the path under
which the PDF reports will be saved should not be the same.
4 Enable PDF Export on Collaboration Server

3. Edit the WfConf.xml.
- Set the value of the following tag to 1:
<sr_pdf_export_is_allowed description="Allow WL SR2PDF Export">1</

sr_pdf_export_is_allowed>
4. After modifications are made in the WfConf.xml, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
Result:
488
A native PDF will be created and saved under the path indicated in WfConf.xml. See PDF Export Path
on Collaboration Server on page 489.
4-1 PDF Export Path on Collaboration Server
To change the path under which the PDF will be saved:
- In the following tag, indicate the path under which the PDFs should be saved.
<sr_pdf_export_folder description="SR2PDF Export Folder"

>C:\TEMP\pdfexport</sr_pdf_export_folder>
Note:
In case the Collaboration Server is on the same system as the MammoWorkstation, the path under
which the PDF reports will be saved should not indicate the same folder.
4. Restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
5 Customize PDF Export

By default, all elements are included in the generated PDF. On demand, the following pages/sections
can be excluded from the generated PDF:
- Header
- Summary
- Finding
- Overview
To customize the PDF export:

3. Edit the ReportTextConfig.xx.xml
489
Note:
Make sure to edit the right language of the ReportTextConfig.xx.xml,
e.g. ReportTextConfig.en.xml.
4. Scroll down to the tag <PdfReportConfiguration>
5. Identify the section you want to exclude from the generated PDF,
e.g. <Section name="header" title="Mammography finding">
6. To deactivate the desired section, insert the following attribute in the section tag:
- <...pdf="false">
e.g.
7. To change the time and date format according to the regional settings:
- look for the following xml tag:
<DateFormat>MM/dd/yyyy</DateFormat>
<TimeFormat>hh:mm a</TimeFormat>
<DateTimeFormat>MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm a</DateTimeFormat>
! Notice:
The time and date units’order can be changed, but they cannot be edited.
490
! Notice:
If you change the separators, make sure to verify if they are recognised in the patients’reports. If
not recognised, parts of the date might also not be displayed:
8. After modifications are made in the ReportTextConfig.xx.xml, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
6 Change the Name Convention for PDF Reports

On each MWS/MDS you can delete parameters to get the requested name convention.
To change the name convention:

4. Look for the following tag
<sr2pdf_filename description="SR2PDF Filename

components">[PatientID]_[AccessionNumber]_[SOPInstanceUID]</sr2pdf_filename>
491
5. In case the file name of PDF-Reports shall be equal to [AccessionNumber], the tag within
CcConf.xml will look like the following:
<sr2pdf_filename description="SR2PDF Filename components"
>[AccessionNumber]</sr2pdf_filename>
Note:
In this case, every PDF report will now have the Accession Number as filename. Thus the latest
PDF report overwrites the older one. Only the latest result will be available.
• The following options can also be used for the filename:

- [PatientID]
- [AccessionNumber]
- [SOPInstanceUID]
- [StudyInstanceUID]
- [SeriesInstanceUID]
- [WlTaskType]
6. After any modification in the CcConf.xml, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
7 How to Remove PDF Documents from the Export Folder

The MWS does not remove PDF documents from the export folder. Already processed PDF documents
should be removed either manually by the user or automatically by the application processing them.
492
Job Card CFG C75 - Patient Export
Job Card CFG C75 - Patient Export Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Enable PDF Export on MammoWorkstation

2. Open the Patient Export.
3. On the Patient Export page, leave the first two parameters as they are.
4. In the third row, insert the Patient ID. This can be found:
- In the Mammo Workstation Control monitor, this is visible in the worklist or the patient list:
493
Job Card CFG C75 - Patient Export
- On the Support Interface, this can be found by performing a search in the Cache Status.
Note:
Use asterisk (*) when performing a search:
5. In Copy Destination Folder, insert the location where you want to store the patient data.
6. Click on [Export].
4 Verification
1. Go to the location selected in the Copy Destination Folder.
2. Check if the cache corresponding to the selected patient has been copied in this folder.
494
Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus Reading
Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus Reading Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 General Information
! Notice:
The Consensus Reading feature is only available in combination with the Collaboration Server.
! Notice:
Make sure to conform to the local legal requirements regarding the consensus reading settings.
This feature enables consensus readings of the assigned physicians within a conference session.
These configuration options are optional.

These configuration options allow the activation or deactivation of the Consensus Reading functions in
the Worklist mask of the MammoWorkstation (respectively Mammo Documentation Station).
These functions are:
• the operatorList visible function:
➜ enabling this feature allows selection of conference participants (MWS) or creator (MDS);
• the validateConsensus function:

➜ if active, it allows conference participants to be validated in MWS;
• the multiSelection function:

➜ it determines whether one or more operators are selected in the clinical documentation (MDS).
4 Configuration Procedure
3. Edit the ReportTemplates.std.xml.
495
Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus Reading
4. Look for the following xml tag:
-  to enable the operatorList visible, set its attribute to "yes".

to enable the validateConsensus, set its attribute to "yes".
to enable the multiSelection, set its attribute to "yes".
5 Verification
1. Login to the MammoWorkstation.
2. Check if the [Conference] button is visible.
3. Click on the [Conference] button and check whether the participants are activated.
496
Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export
Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation and Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Enable XML Export on Collaboration Server

The Collaboration Server can automatically export reports in XML format, if the report was created
based on a worklist item. By default, XML report export is inactive.
To activate XML report export:
4. Set the value of the following tag <sr_xml_export_is_allowed description=[...]> to 1.
Result:
A report in XML format will be created and saved under the path indicated in WfConf.xml.
4 XML Export Path

To change the path under which the XML document will be saved:
4. In the tag <sr_xml_export_folder description=[...]>, indicate the path under which the
XML document should be saved:
497
5 Change the Name Convention for XML Documents

To change the filename of the XML document:
4. Look for the tag <sr_xml_export_filename description=[...]>:
5. In case the file name of XML document shall be equal to [AccessionNumber], the tag within
WfConf.xml will look like the following:
<sr_xml_export_filename description="SR2XML Filename
Template">[AccessionNumber].xml</sr_xml_export_filename>
Note:
In this case, every XML document will now have the Accession Number as filename.
• The following options can also be used for the filename:

- [PatientID]
- [PatientName]
- [AccessionNumber]
- [SpsID] (of the worklist task the report is associated with)
- [SOPInstanceUID]
- [StudyInstanceUID]
- [SeriesInstanceUID]
Note:
Placeholders must always be bracketed in "[ ... ]".
498
6 Remove XML Documents

Note:
There is no mechanism to remove XML documents. It is the responsibility of the client application
that processes the XML reports to clean up the XML export folder.
The Collaboration Server tracks the XML export status in the "Worklist Status" page in the Support
Interface:
2. Open the Findings Summary.
3. Go to the tab Worklist Status.
XML export
status
499
This page is blank.
500
Job Card CFG C27 - Prefetching
Job Card CFG C27 - Prefetching Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Prefetching
3-1 Move-expiry
After 72 hours, all completed Move Requests, as well as the failed Move Requests, will automatically be
deleted.
To modify the expiry time frame for Move Requests:
3. Edit CcConf.xml.
4. In the following tag: <move_expiry_age description= [...]>, edit the value determining the
move_expiry_age.
Note:
The default value of this tag is 72 hours.
Note:
If the function "Auto Prefetch" is activated, all failed Move Requests will be restarted after the set
expiry time frame, i.e all image data, which so far were not transferred to the MammoWorkstation
will be queried from the PACS again.
501
3-2 Move-timeout
After 60 minutes, the prefetching progress for one single Move Request ends.
Note:
If a Move Request is not finished after 60 minutes, e.g because of querying too many image data,
the Move Request will be stopped and deleted.
If a Move Request got stuck, it will be stopped and deleted after 60 minutes.
To modify the move-timeout parameter:
4. In the following tag:<move_timeout description=[...]>, edit the value determining the

move_timeout.
Note:
The default value of this tag is 60 minutes.
3-3 Parallel Q/R SCU move tasks

Starting with version 4.7.0, multiple parallel move tasks are possible.
Note:
Before making any changes, please check with the corresponding PACS vendor how many
parallel tasks are possible.
To change the number of parallel tasks:

502

<max_num_parallel_move_tasks description="Maximum Number of Parallel
Running Moves" >1</max_num_parallel_move_tasks>
5. Edit the value corresponding to the parallel move tasks.
Note:
The default value of this tag is 1. The recommended setting is either 4 or 5, depending on the
PACS configuration. Be aware that a much higher value will slow down the PACS.
503
This page is blank.
504
Job Card CFG C29 - Transfer Syntax Configuration
Job Card CFG C29 - Transfer Syntax Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
Note:
This job card does not apply to the PACS Viewer license. If the system has a PACS Viewer license,
make sure the value described in step 4. is set to "EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" .
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Transfer Syntax Settings

The setting indicated in the <transfer_syntax_for_safe[...]> configuration item controls the
transfer syntax of the files stored in the local cache. All files received are stored in the given transfer
syntax.
Changing the settings does not affect the content of the cache. If files already in the cache should be
stored in the currently set format, the files have to be deleted from the local cache and have to be resent.
! Notice:
To make sure the MammoWorkstation writes DICOM compliant DICOMDIR CD/media, the setting
"EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" is required.
3-1 Change Transfer Syntax Settings

If the customer has problems opening files with the MammoWorkstation, changing the transfer syntax
setting from "EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" to "IMPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" might resolve that
problem.
! Notice:
Before changing the transfer syntax setting, every other cause of the described malpractice must
be eliminated by the next GE service level!
! Notice:
Before changing the Transfer syntax setting from "EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN"
to "IMPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN", contact the next GE service level for assistance!
To change the settings of the transfer syntax:

505
Job Card CFG C29 - Transfer Syntax Configuration
3. Edit IDReceiveSCP.xml.
4. In the following tag: <transfer_syntax_for_safe>[...]>,replace the value

"EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" with "IMPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN".
5. After any modification in the IDReceiveSCP.xml, restart the IDDicomReceiveSCP service.

- Select and restart the IDDicomReceiveSCP service.
506
Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter Configuration
Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
If the external application is installed on a separate system, special configuration settings are
necessary. In this case, please contact the next GE service level for assistance.
! Notice:
Before editing files mentioned in this chapter, apply the following settings:
a. Enable the Unicode UTF-8 Encoding View in the Internet Explorer:
- In the Internet Explorer, select View ➜ Encoding ➜ Unicode (UTF-8).
b. Select the radio button Ms-Dos/Windows in the Support Interface before making any
changes:
Note:
This is only possible for each opened configuration file.
4 Presetting
Before configuring the external adapter, the following settings need to be checked:
1. Port for the communication between adapters and MammoWorkstation: Port 27777 is the standard
TCP/IP port configured for the communication between adapters and the MammoWorkstation.
Check with your network administrator whether another application is using this port. Unless your
network administrator detects such a conflict, there is no need to change this port.
In case you need to change the port:
a. Go to Support Interface.
b. Open the Configuration Folder.
c. Edit the RemoteServiceConf.xml
507
d. Set the value of the following tag <defaultport>27777</defaultport> to the port you want
to use.
Note:
Make sure to change the port in the MWSTrayConf.xml accordingly.
For further information on the MWSTrayConf.xml, refer to the following subsection 2-Adapter base.
e. Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
2. MWSTray related settings: Check the following basic adapter settings in MWSTrayConf.xml:
c. Edit the MWSTrayConf.xml.
d. Check the following tags
Configuration data Comment

<rmiport>27777<rmiport> Port must be the same as default
port configured in RemoteSer-
viceConf.xml
<adapterbase>C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiag- Path to adapters. The path is set
nost\RemoteControl\adapters<adapterbase> on installation depending on the
installation path.
<launchcommand>C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiag- Path to MammoWorkstation exe-
nost\MammoWorkstation\x64\MammoWorkstation.exe<launch- cutable. The value is set on
command> installation depending on the
installation path and the operat-
ing system platform.
5 Preparation Prior to Adapter Configuration

Before configuring any of the adapters, the MWSTray must be stopped:
1. right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar;
508
2. click on [Exit]
6 Configuration of an External Viewer Adapter

The MammoWorkstation is currently installed with the following External Viewer adapters:
• Adapter for ClearCanvas 2.0 SP1
• Adapter for Merge eFilm 3.1 - 3.4
In addition, there are two generic adapters:

• CommandLineAdapter: Generic adapter for external applications including viewers that can be
remotely controlled through a command line interface. The MammoWorkstation is installed with two
sample configurations for the CommandLineAdapter:
- AWServer
- Merge CADstream.
• URLAdapter: Generic adapter for external applications including viewers that can be remotely
controlled through a HTTP GET interface (URL request).
The configuration of the adapters for ClearCanvas, Merge eFilm, Merge CADstream and AW Server will
be explained in separate Job Cards. The reference to these Job Cards will be given in the following
sections.
The configuration of the generic adapters will be covered in Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic
CommandLineAdapter on page 510 and Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic URLAdapter on
page 521.
6-1 Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration

For detailed information on Merge eFilm adapter configuration, refer to Job Card CFG C62 - Merge
eFilm Adapter Configuration on page 583.
6-2 ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration
For detailed information on ClearCanvas adapter configuration, refer to Job Card CFG C58 -
ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration on page 579.
6-3 Merge CADstream Adapter Configuration
The adapter configuration for Merge CADstream is a command line adapter configuration where
configuration and helper files are available as a sample configuration. The sample configuration must be
adjusted on values for environment variables in the helper files.
509
Note:
For detailed information on Merge ClearCanvas adapter configuration, refer to Job Card CFG C64
- Configuration of the Merge CADstream Adapter on page 607.
6-4 AW Server Adapter Configuration
The adapter configuration for AW Server is a command line adapter configuration. The installation
provides a sample configuration that must be adjusted according to the existing setup (i.e., IP, login,
password, path to integration.exe).
Note:
For detailed information on ClearCanvas adapter configuration, refer to Job Card CFG C56 -
Configuration of the AW Server Adapter on page 569.
7 Configuration of an Adapter for Desktop Synchronization

The MammoWorkstation is currently installed with the following Adapter for Desktop Synchronization:
• Adapter for Centricity RIS-IC
The configuration of the adapter for Centricity RIS-IC, will be explained in detail in Job Card CFG C52
- Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration on page 563.
In addition, there are two generic adapters:

• CommandLineAdapter: Generic adapter for external applications that can be synchronized with the
MammoWorkstation through a command line interface.
• URLAdapter: Generic adapter for external applications that can be synchronized with the
MammoWorkstation through a HTTP GET interface (URL request).
The configuration of the generic adapters will be covered in Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic
CommandLineAdapter on page 510 and Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic URLAdapter on
page 521.
8 Configuration of an Adapter for External Reporting

The MammoWorkstation is currently installed with the following Adapter for External Reporting:
• Adapter for the MRS server.
The configuration of the adapter for MRS Server, will be explained in detail in Job Card CFG C60 -
Configuration of MRS Adapter on page 589.
9 Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic CommandLineAdapter

The CommandLineAdapter can support multiple adapter configurations. The different adapter
configurations are all put into the same CommandLineAdapterConf.xml file.
Every single adapter configuration must declare its role (purpose) in the integration:
- viewer (external viewer),
- desktopsync (desktop synchronization),
Note:
Make sure the MWSTray is stopped. For more information on this topic, refer to section 5
Preparation Prior to Adapter Configuration.
510
9-1 Overview of Basic Configuration Data

To set the values of the corresponding configuration data:
3. Edit the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml:
Note:
Make sure the Unicode UTF-8 Encoding View is enabled and the radio button Ms-Dos/Windows
is selected. For more information on this topic, refer to 3 General Information on page 507.
9-2 Adding or Editing an Adapter Configuration to the Configuration File

The file CommandLineAdapterConf.xml can contain configurations for more than one adapter. The
structure of the configuration file is:
<adapters>
<commandlineconf>
… (here settings for first adapter)
</commandlineconf>
<commandlineconf >
… (here settings for the second adapter)
</commandlineconf >
… (more adapter configurations)

</adapters>
To edit an existing adapter configuration:

• locate the corresponding adapter configuration settings in the file.
• edit its values.
Note:
For further details on editing existing adapter configurations, refer to section 9-2-1 Basic
Configuration Data.
511
To add an adapter configuration:

• insert the following structure into the configuration file.
Note:
Make sure that the insertion is not inside any existing <commandlineconf>…</
commandlineconf> definition.
<commandlineconf>
</commandlineconf>
• add settings for configuration data between <commandlineconf> and </commandlineconf>.

The settings are described below.
9-2-1 Basic Configuration Data
Configuration data Default Description

value
adapterId -- To set a adapter ID is mandatory. The Adapter ID
must be unique and must consist of ASCII (American
Standard Code for Information Interchange) letters,
numbers, underscore "_", etc.
No special characters are allowed as described in
Table 1, “ASCII Characters,” on page 514.
adapterDescription -- To set an Adapter Description is mandatory. It should
contain a short descriptive text about the adapter.
enabled false This is mandatory. Value can be true or false. To ena-
ble an adapter, set the value to "true".
purpose viewer This is optional.
Each particular adapter configuration should declare
its purpose.
A purpose can be:
- viewer = adapter configuration for an external
viewer
- desktopsync = adapter configuration for
desktop synchronization
Note:
The default value of the purpose tag is
viewer.
quotes " Used to quote data for the wildcards (parameters of
the command)
separator , Used to separate multiple values for wildcards.
replaceEnvironmentVariables false Set to true to replace environment variables in the
command definition.
Example: replaces ${IDI_HOME} with installation path

of the MammoWorkstation, e.g. C:\Program Files
(x86)\ImageDiagnost.
512
To add a data item, insert the tag for the data item and its value between <commandlineconf> and </
commandlineconf>.
Example:
To add a setting for adapterId:
<commandlineconf>
<adapterId>ViewerX</adapterId>
</commandlineconf>
9-3 Overview of Command Configuration Data
The command line adapter can be configured for the following types of commands to remotely control an
external application:
- launch - terminate
- login - logout
- open (context) - close (context)
Configuration data Applies Description

to purpose
launchCommand viewer, Command for launching the external appli-
desktopsync cation
terminateCommand viewer, Command for terminating the external
desktopsync, application
loginCommand viewer, Command for logging in into the external
desktopsync application
logoutCommand viewer, Command for logging out of the external
desktopsync application
openCommand desktopsync Command for synchronizing the patient
context
openPatientCommand viewer Command for synchronizing the patient
context
openCommand viewer Command for opening a set of studies /
series on an external viewer
closeCommand viewer, Command for closing the current context
desktopsync
Note:
Each command can be configured with command line parameters.
Command line parameters:

The command can be configured with command line parameters. The values of the command line
parameter can either be fixed or they can be provided by the MammoWorkstation / Mammo
513
Values that are provided by the MammoWorkstation can be coded with wildcards.
Wildcards in the parameter list are replaced by the values of the current context.
Command Applies to Multiple Used in which Description

line parame- purpose values command
ter
[adapterid] viewer No Any Wildcard for the Adapter
desktopsync, ID. Unique ID of the
adapter.
[login] viewer No loginCommand, Wildcard for the User ID.
desktopsync, logoutCommand User ID for the login.
[password] viewer No loginCommand, Wildcard for the Password
desktopsync, logoutCommand in the external application.
[patid] viewer Yes openCommand, Wildcard for the Patient
desktopsync, openPatientCommand, ID(s).
closeCommand
[accno] viewer Yes openCommand, Wildcard for the Accession
desktopsync, openPatientCommand, -Number(s).
closeCommand
[study] viewer Yes openCommand, wildcard for the Study
desktopsync, openPatientCommand, Instance UID(s).
closeCommand,
[series] viewer Yes openCommand Wildcard for the series
ID(s).
[instance] viewer Yes openCommand Wildcard for the Instance
ID(s).
[file] viewer Yes openCommand Wildcard for the path to
one single File.
! Notice:
The form of the command itself is specified in the installation manual of the external application.
a. If the command contains characters that could be interpreted by XML (e.g. '&', '<', etc.) these
characters must be coded as XML entities. The most commonly used characters to be
escaped are:
Table 1 ASCII Characters
XML entity Character Description
" " (double) quotation mark
& & ampersand
' ' apostrophe (= apostrophe-quote)
< < less-than sign
> > greater-than sign
514
b. If the command contains special separators, configure the following tag:

Set the value of the tag
<separator>,</separator> to whatever separator is required by the external application.
c. If the installation manual of the external application specifies the quotes used to group one
parameter (in case the parameter includes blank spaces), configure the following tag:
<quotes>"<quotes> to whatever quote character is required by the external application.
9-4 Command Examples

9-4-1 Prerequisite
Note:
Before any further action in the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml, make sure that the value of the
following tag is set to “true”:
<replaceEnvironmentVariables>true</replaceEnvironmentVariables>
9-4-2 Test Command Examples

To test examples for the command, there is a utility testecho.bat.
2. Open the Image Diagnost Folderr
• Open [Remote Control]

• Open [adapters]
• Open [CommandLine Adapter]
• Open [samples]
Commands using testecho.bat will actually be executable on customer installation (provided all parts are
installed and the field engineer can test commands).
This testecho.bat will log the command and its parameters to the log file
CommandLineAdapterTestEcho.log. To reach the log folder:
2. Open the Log Folder.
3. Open the CommandLineAdapterTestEcho.log
The FE can experiment freely with the purposes.
515
9-4-3 Command Examples

1. Launch - Terminate
a. Launch Command
The <launchCommand> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the
external application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <launchCommand>, check the installation manual
of the external application.
An example for a <launchCommand> could look like the following:
<launchCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\sample
s\testecho.bat" --launch [adapterid]</launchCommand>
b. Terminate Command
The <terminateCommand> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <terminateCommand>, check the installation
manual of the external application.
An example for a <terminateCommand> could look like the following:
<terminateCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\sam
ples\testecho.bat" --terminate [adapterid]</terminateCommand>
2. Login - Logout
a. Login Command
The <loginCommand> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the external
application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <loginCommand>, check the installation manual
An example for a <loginCommand> could look like the following:
<loginCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\samples
\testecho.bat" --login --adapter [adapterid] --user [login] --password
[password]</loginCommand>
b. Logout Command
The <logoutCommand> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <logoutCommand>, check the installation manual
An example for a <logoutCommand> could look like the following:
<logoutCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\sample
s\testecho.bat" --logout --adapter [adapterid] --user [login] --password
[password]</logoutCommand>
3. Open patient
516
Note:
For this example, the purpose of the adapter must be set to "viewer".
An example for a <openPatientCommand> could look like the following:

<openPatientCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\s
amples\testecho.bat" --open --adapter [adapterid] --patient [patid] --accno
[accno] -study [study]</openPatientCommand>
4. Open (context) - Close (context)

a. Open Command
The <openCommand> is a particular case. Instead of just one command line call, it is possible to
specify one or more command line calls. Each single command is enclosed in a <command> tag.
All <command> tags are arranged in the body of the <openCommand> tag.
The structure looks like the following:

<openCommand>
<command>...</command>
<command>...</command>
</openCommand>
Of all specified commands, only one command will be executed.
The selection of a command depends on selection criteria which is specified as a set of
attributes and values of the <command> tag.
Note:
For further information on the openCommand, refer to section 9-5 Overview of Selector Patterns
for the OpenCommand.
b. Close Command
The <closeCommand> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <closeCommand>, check the installation manual
An example for a <closeCommand> could look like the following:
<closeCommand>"${IDI_HOME}\RemoteControl\adapters\CommandLineAdapter\samples
\testecho.bat" --close --adapter [adapterid] --patient [patid] --accno
[accno] --study [study]</closeCommand>
517
9-5 Overview of Selector Patterns for the OpenCommand

Note:
OpenCommand is a particular case because one or more command line calls can be configured.
Recognized attributes are:
Selector pattern Description

(attribute name)
patient Check availability and number of Patient ID(s)
accessionNumber Check availability and number of Accession Number(s)
study Check availability and number of Study Instance UID(s)
series Check availability and number of Series ID(s)
instance Check availability and number of Instance ID(s)
file Check availability and number of file(s)
Recognized values are:
Selector value (attribute Description

value)
0 No valid ID for the selector pattern
1 Exactly one valid ID for the selector pattern
0,1 At most 1 valid ID for the selector pattern
list If there are any IDs, they will be listed in the argument. IDs
will be separated using the separator character.
+list There must be at least one valid ID.
Note:
If "+list" is indicated and several IDs are
available, the IDs will be separated by a ",".
If the external viewer requires a separator, set the
value of the tag
<separator>,</separator> to whatever
separator is required by the external viewer.
serialize If there are any IDs, there will be one command for each ID.
+serialize There must be at least one valid ID. For each ID, there will
be one command.
518
Note:
Before applying parameter values, check the range of services supported by the external viewer.
Example
In the example, only the patient ID is called ➜ patient (patient = attribute (1)) will be opened when
exactly one (1 = value (2)) patient ID is available.
1 2
9-6 External Application Running inside a Browser

If the external application runs inside a Browser (e.g. Exprivia running inside Internet Explorer):
Get an example-call from the supplier of the external application. Note down the hostname, url and
parameters.
• Define as CommandLine command the call to the browser.
Example:
<loginCommand> "C:\Program Files (x86)\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe"
"http://hostname/url?ACCESS_NO=[accno]"</loginCommand>
Note:
This example is applicable to all commands.
• Please check which exit-code the called third party application gives.
Example:
The Internet Explorer gives the exit-code 1 even when it is closed normally. This causes the
MammoWorkstation to display a warning message. In this case wrap the call into a batch-file like the
following:
1. Create a batch-file called "External_Application.bat" in %IDI_Home%\custom.
a. Create a text document:
- Open a windows explorer and navigate to %IDI_Home%\custom.
- Right click anywhere in the explorer ➜ a dialog will open.
- Select New ➜ Text document ➜ a text document will be created (1).
519
b. Open this document (double click) and type in the following lines:
@echo off
set MWS_PATH=C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost

set MWS_LOG_PATH=%MWS_PATH%\log
set MWS_CONFIG_PATH=%MWS_PATH%\config
set EXTERNALVIEWER_PATH=C:\Program Files (x86)\Internet Explorer

set EXTERNALVIEWER_EXE=iexplore.exe
echo Command Line Adapter %DATE% %TIME% %* >>

"%MWS_LOG_PATH%\CommandLineProtocol.txt"
set VIEWERCALL="%EXTERNALVIEWER_PATH%\%EXTERNALVIEWER_EXE%" %*
echo Call to %VIEWERCALL% >> "%MWS_LOG_PATH%\CommandLineProtocol.txt"
start "CmdCall" /D"%EXTERNALVIEWER_PATH%" %VIEWERCALL%
set RESULT=%RESULT%
set ERRORLEVEL=1
c. Save the document as External_Application.

d. Convert the document to a .bat file:
- Delete the appendix ".txt" and type ".bat" instead.
2. Configure the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml accordingly.

Example:
<loginCommand>"C:\Program
Files(x86)\ImageDiagnost\custom\External_Application.bat"</loginCommand>
9-7 Post Configuration Required Action

- Start the MWSTray:
520
- Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools.
- Click on MWSTray ➜ an MWS icon should then appear in the notification area of the Windows
taskbar.
10 Configuration of an Adapter with the Generic URLAdapter

The URLAdapter can support multiple adapter configurations. The different adapter configurations are all
put into the same UrlAdapterConf.xml file.
Note:
If you want to reach an external application through the URLAdapter, make sure the external
viewer is not running inside a browser (e.g. Exprivia running inside the Internet Explorer).
The URLAdapter must not be used for this kind of setup!
Note:
Make sure the MWSTray is stopped. For more information on this topic, refer to section 5
Preparation Prior to Adapter Configuration.
10-1 Overview of Basic Configuration Data

To set the values of the corresponding configuration data:
3. Edit the UrlAdapterConf.xml:
521
Note:
is selected. For more information on this topic, refer to 3 General Information on page 507.
10-2 Adding or Editing an Adapter Configuration to the Configuration File

The file URLAdapterConf.xml can contain configurations for more than one adapter. The structure of the
configuration file is:
<adapters>
<urlconf>
… (here settings for first adapter)
</urlconf>
<urlconf>
… (here settings for second adapter)
</urlconf>
… (more adapter configurations)

</adapters>
To edit an existing adapter configuration:

• locate the corresponding adapter configuration settings in the file
• edit its values.
Note:
For further information, refer to section 10-2-1 Basic Configuration Data.
To add an adapter configuration:

• insert the following structure into the configuration file.
Note:
Make sure that the insertion is not inside any existing <urlconf>…</urlconf> definition.
• add settings for configuration data between <urlconf> and </urlconf>.

The settings are described below.
522
10-2-1 Basic Configuration Data
Configuration data Default value Description

adapterId -- To set an adapter ID is mandatory. The Adapter ID
must be unique and must consist of ASCII
(American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) letters, numbers, underscore "_", etc.
No special characters are allowed as described in
Table 2, “ASCII Characters,” on page 525.
adapterDescrip- -- To set an Adapter Description is mandatory. It
tion should contain a short descriptive text about the
adapter.
enabled false This is mandatory. Value can be true or false. To
enable an adapter, set to true.
purpose viewer This is optional.
Each particular adapter configuration should
declare its purpose.
A purpose can be:
- viewer = adapter configuration for an
external viewer
- desktopsync = adapter configuration for
desktop synchronization
Note:
The default value of the purpose tag is
viewer.
quotes " Used to quote data for the wildcards (parameters of
the command).
separator , Used to separate multiple values for a wildcards.
logResponse false Set to true to log the response of the HTTP GET
request into the log file for the URL adapter.
To add a data item:

• insert the tag for the data item and its value between <urlconf> and </urlconf>.
Example:
To add a setting for adapterId:
<urlconf>
<adapterId>ViewerX</adapterId>
</urlconf>
523
Note:
After changes are made to the Configuration Folder, make sure to restart the Apache Tomcat
service.
10-3 Overview of Request Configuration Data
The URL adapter can be configured for the following types of commands to remotely control an external
application:
- launch - terminate
- login - logout
- open (context) - close (context)
Configuration data Applies Description

to purpose
launchRequest Any Request for launching the external
application
terminateRequest Any Request for terminating the external
application
loginRequest Any Request for logging into the external
application
logoutRequest Any Request for logging out of the external
application
openRequest Desktopsync Request for synchronizing the patient
context
openPatientRequest Viewer Request for synchronizing the patient
context
openRequest Viewer Request for opening a set of studies /
series on an external viewer
closeRequest Any Request for closing the current context
Note:
Each request can be configured with request parameters.
Request parameters:
The request can be configured with request parameters. The values of the request parameter can either
be fixed or they can be provided by the MammoWorkstation / Mammo Documentation Station.
524
Values that are provided by the MammoWorkstation can be coded with wildcards.
Wildcards in the parameter list are replaced by the values of the current context.
Request Applies to Multiple Used in which Description

parameter purpose values? command
[adapterid] viewer, No Any Wildcard for the Adapter ID.
desktopsync Unique ID of the adapter.
[login] viewer, No loginRequest, Wildcard for the User ID.

desktopsync logoutRequest User ID for the login.
[password] viewer, No loginRequest, Wildcard for the Password in

desktopsync logoutRequest the external application.
[patid] viewer, Yes openRequest, Wildcard for the Patient ID(s).

desktopsync openPatientRequest,
closeRequest
[accno] viewer, Yes openRequest, Wildcard for the Accession -

desktopsync openPatientRequest, Number(s).
closeRequest
[study] viewer, Yes openRequest, wildcard for the Study

desktopsync openPatientRequest, Instance UID(s).
closeRequest
[series] viewer Yes openRequest Wildcard for the series ID(s).
[instance] viewer Yes openRequest Wildcard for the Instance

ID(s).
[file] viewer Yes openRequest Wildcard for the path to one
single File.
Note:
Except for adapter ID, User Name and Password, the wildcards can be replaced by a single ID /
name or by a list of IDs/names.
! Notice:
The form of the request itself is specified in the installation manual of the external viewer.
a. If the request contains characters that could be interpreted by XML (e.g. '&', '<', etc.) these
characters must be coded as XML entities. The most commonly used characters to be
escaped are:
Table 2 ASCII Characters
" " (double) quotation mark
& & ampersand
' ' apostrophe (= apostrophe-quote)
< < less-than sign
525
> > greater-than sign
b. If the request contains special separators, configure the following tag:

<separator>,</separator> to whatever separator is required by the external application.
c. If the installation manual of the external application specifies the quotes used to group one
parameter (in case the parameter includes blank spaces), configure the following tag:
<quotes>"<quotes> to whatever quote character is required by the external application.
10-4 Request Examples

10-4-1 Prerequisite
1. Before any further action in the URLAdapterConf.xml, make sure that the value of the following tag is
set to "true":
<replaceEnvironmentVariables>true</replaceEnvironmentVariables>
2. Special characters such as "&" must be coded as XML entities ➜ & .
3. The RemoteService must be started:

• Go to http://localhost:8080/
• Open the Tomcat Manager (user: admin; password: admin).
• Search for the RemoteService.
• The Remote Service must be started (Running Status = true):
526
• If the Remote Service is not started (Running Status = false), click on Start to start the service.
10-4-2 Test Request Examples

The FE can experiment freely with the purposes.
The will log the request to be logged into a log file.

To reach the log folder:
2. Open the Log Folder.
3. Open the idi_validation_protocol.txt
10-4-3 Request Examples
1. Launch - Terminate
a. Launch Request
The <launchRequest> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the external
application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <launchRequest>, check the installation manual
An example for a <launchRequest> could look like the following:
<launchRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=LAUNCH&adapterId
=[adapterid]</launchRequest>
b. Terminate Request
The <terminateRequest> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <terminateRequest>, check the installation
manual of the external application.
An example for a <terminateRequest> could look like the following:
<terminateRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=TERMINATE&adapte
rId=[adapterid]</terminateRequest>
527
2. Login - Logout
a. Login Request
The <loginRequest> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the external
application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <loginRequest>, check the installation manual of
the external application.
An example for a <loginRequest> could look like the following:
<loginRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=LOGIN&user=[logi
n]&password=[password]</loginRequest>
b. Logout Request
The <logoutRequest> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the external
application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <logoutRequest>, check the installation manual
An example for a <logoutRequest> could look like the following:
<logoutRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=LOGOUT&user=[log
in]&password=[password]</logoutRequest>
3. Open Patient
Note:
For this example, the purpose of the adapter must be set to "viewer".
An example for a <OpenPatientRequest> could look like the following:

<openPatientRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=PATID&loadCurren
t=[patid]<\openPatientRequest>
4. Open (context) - Close (context)

a. Open Request
The <openRequest> is a particular case. Instead of just one request, it is possible to specify one
or more requests. Each single request is enclosed in a <request> tag. All <request> tags are
arranged in the body of the <openRequest> tag.
The structure looks like the following:
<openRequest>
<request>...</request>
<request>...</request>
</openRequest>
Of all specified requests, only one request will be executed.
The selection of a request depends on selection criteria which is specified as a set of
attributes and values of the <request> tag
528
Note:
For further information on the Open request, refer to section 10-5 Overview of Selector Patterns
for the OpenRequest.
b. Close Request
The <closeRequest> must be configured if it is required in the installation manual of the external
application.
Note:
For detailed information on how to configure the <closeRequest>, check the installation manual of
the external application.
An example for a <closeRequest> could look like the following:

<closeRequest>http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/
idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_validation_mode=true&loadType=CLOSE&patid=[pat
id]&accno=[accno]&study=[study]</closeRequest>
10-5 Overview of Selector Patterns for the OpenRequest

Note:
OpenCommand is a particular case because one or more command line calls can be configured.
Recognized attributes are:
Selector pattern Description

(attribute name)
patient Check availability and number of Patient ID(s)
accessionNumber Check availability and number of Accession Number(s)
study Check availability and number of Study Instance UID(s)
series Check availability and number of Series ID(s)
instance Check availability and number of Instance ID(s)
file Check availability and number of file(s)
Recognized values are:

value)
0 No valid ID for the selector pattern
1 Exactly one valid ID for the selector pattern
0,1 At most 1 valid ID for the selector pattern
list If there are any IDs, they will be listed in the argument. IDs
will be separated using the separator character.
529

value)
+list There must be at least one valid ID.
Note:
If "+list" is indicated and several IDs are
available, the IDs will be separated by a ",".
If the external viewer requires a separator, set the
value of the tag
<separator>,</separator> to whatever
separator is required by the external application.
serialize If there are any IDs, there will be one command for each ID.
+serialize There must be at least one valid ID. For each ID, there will
be one command.
Note:
Before applying parameter values, check the range of services supported by the external
application.
Example: In the example, only the patient ID is called ➜ patient (patient = attribute (1)) will be
opened when exactly one (1 = value (2)) patient ID is available.
<openRequest>
<request patient="1" accessionNumber="0" study="1" series="0" instance="0"
file="0">http://localhost:8080/RemoteService/idimwscontrol.jsp?idi_valida-
tion_mode=true&loadType=PATID&loadCurrent=[patid]&study=[study]
</request>
</openRequest>
12
10-6 Post Configuration Required Action

Start the MWSTray:
- Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools.
- Click on MWSTray ➜ an MWS icon should then appear in the notification area of the Windows
taskbar.
530
11 Verification of External Adapter Configuration

- To check this, move the mouse cursor over the MWS icon, which will be displayed in the
notification area of the Windows taskbar ➜ the message
MWSTray MWSTray@username@PCname connected should appear.
! Notice:
If the MWSTray is not connected, refer to Job Card TSG C08 - External Adapter Troubleshooting
on page 749.
2. Check that all adapters are properly configured:
- Start the MammoWorkstation.
- Click on [Adapters] in the MammoWorkstation toolbar ➜ a window similar to the one below will
open:
- The window will display all adapters per purpose (Reporting, Viewer, Desktop Sync).
- The adapters will be listed with ID and with info on enabled / disabled
(enabled = selectable, icon = blue check, disabled = not selectable, icon = grayed out stop).
- If the adapter is enabled, there will be an icon on whether it is active or not.
Active = adapter connected icon, Deactivated = adapter disconnected (dangling) icon.
531
This page is blank.
532
Job Card CFG C78 - Configuration for PACS Viewer License
Job Card CFG C78 - Configuration for PACS Viewer License Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to systems with a PACS Viewer license (Universal Viewer integration).
Note:
This PACS integration is only validated on 64-bit operating systems.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Configuration Procedures
3-1 IDI MWS Settings
3-1-1 Configuration of GE PACS Partner
To configure the GE PACS, proceed as follows:
- For more information on how to configure a DICOM partner, go to Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM
- For setting up the GE PACS, follow the next steps:
1. Login to the system Settings.

2. In the Communication tab, click on the plus sign to create a new partner:
533
3. From the pop-up window, select “Universal Viewer Interface” and click [OK]:
4. Click [OK] on the next screen.
3-1-2 Remote Control Configuration

2. Go to the Remote Control tab.
3. Check if the following two options are selected:
• Allow remote control by other application (the “Associated archive” option should be set to the
archive defined in section Configuration of GE PACS Partner on page 533).
534
• Activate remote control of other application (the “File system path to external binary” can be left
empty).
4. Click [OK].
3-1-3 Deleting Inactive Partners

With the PACS Viewer license, several data sources are inactive. Please remove them as follows:
2. Go to the Communication tab.
535
3. Click on minus sign to delete all partners (except for the Cache).
4. Click [OK].
5. Go to the Routing tab.
6. Delete all existing rules by clicking on the minus sign.
7. Click [OK].
8. Exit the application.
3-2 Configuration Files

3-2-1 Special Transfer Syntax Configuration
536
3. Edit IDReceiveSCP.xml.
4. In the following tag: <transfer_syntax_for_safe>[...]>, make sure that the value

"EXPLICIT_LITTLE_ENDIAN" is present.
3-2-2 CCConf.xml Configuration

3. Edit CCConf.xml.

<mws_msg_wait_time_ms description="Time waited for the queuing of the MWS
notifications in milliseconds">5000</mws_msg_wait_time_ms>
5. Set the value 5000 to 0.
6. Save the file.
3-2-3 Configuration in the GEPACSAdapterConf.xml

1. After saving this configuration, go to Support Interface.
3. Edit the GEPACSAdapterConf.xml:
537
4. Enable the ClearCanvas adapter:

➜ Set the value of the following tag <enabled>false</enabled> to true:
5. Save the GEPACSAdapterConf.xml file.
3-2-4 MammoWorkstation.ini Configuration

3. Edit the MammoWorkstation.ini:
4. Look for the tag:

UseNumSeriesInst = 0
5. Change the default value to 1.
6. Save the document.
3-3 Restart the MWSTray

1. Right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar.
2. Click on [Exit].
3. Go to the Windows Start menu.

4. Click on All Programs.
538
5. Go to Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray ➜ an MWS icon should then appear in the notification
area of the Windows taskbar.
539
This page is blank.
540
Job Card CFG C81 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service
Job Card CFG C81 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service Chapter 9
1 Applicability
MammoWorkstation systems with a PACS Viewer license (Universal Viewer integration).
1 Field Engineer
Time:
The Dakota Client Service is used to receive DICOM data through the Universal Viewer interface.
The standard TCP/IP port configured for the communication between the Dakota Client Service and the
MammoWorkstation is port 27505. Check with your network administrator whether another application is
using this port. If your network administrator detects a possible conflict, then follow the procedure
described in this job card to change the port assigned to the Dakota Client Service.
! Notice:
b. Select the radio button Ms-Dos/Windows in the IDI Support Interface before making any
changes:
Note:
4 Configuration
In case the port needs to be changed, proceed as follows:
c. Edit the IDDakotaService.xml
d. Look for the following tag <listen_port>27505</listen_port>

e. Change the value of the port.
f. Save the .xml file.
541
Job Card CFG C81 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service
g. Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
h. Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage ➜ Services and Applications ➜ Services.

i. Restart the IDDakotaService.
542
Job Card CFG C31- Patient List Importer
Job Card CFG C31- Patient List Importer Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
The PatientListImporter is a command line tool that generates case collection files or worklists, e.g. for
prefetching, (readable by the IDI Workstation) from patient list comma separated value (CSV) files.
During the process, different CSV layouts are transformed to an adequate case collection respectively
prefetching-worklist format via Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) transformation (by usage of
predefined XSL stylesheets).
4 Prerequisite
The following DICOM attributes with their associated entries should be available for all patients:
• (0010,0010) ➜ Patient Name
• (0010,0020) ➜ Patient ID
• (0010,0030) ➜ Patient Birthdate
• (0010,0040) ➜ Patient Sex
• (media_key) ➜ image source as configured in the PartnerConfig.xml
The structure of a semicolon separated CSV file should look like the following:
"PatientName";"PatientID";"Birthdate";"Sex"
5 General Use
The physician exports patients into a CSV file. The Field Engineer generates a MWS readable case
collection file by using the PatientListImporter.
Note:
Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to change the predefined XSL stylesheet (used
for the transformation); e.g. the sent CSV layout can not be read by the predefined XSL stylesheet.
! Notice:
Only the level 4 (OLC) support is allowed to change the predefined XSL stylesheet or to generate
a new XSL stylesheet.
6 Patient List Importer

The PatientListImporter can be found under:
%IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\PatientListImporter
543
6-1 Helpfile
For more information and help on how to use the PatienttListImporter:
1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type in "cmd" and hit [Enter].
2. Type in "cd c:\Program Files
(x86)\ImageDiagnost\MammoWorkstation\PatientListImporter".
3. Hit [Enter].
4. Type in "%idi_home%\thirdparty\jre1.6.0_11_IDI_Patch\bin\java.exe -jar
PatientListImporter.jar".
5. Hit [Enter].
Note:
An Info dialog will again provide a short overview on the PatientListImporter.
A Usage dialog will provide a short explanation on how to execute the PatientListImporter as well
as a generic execution order example.
6-2 Execute the Patient List Importer

1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type in "cmd" and hit [Enter].
2. Type in "cd c:\Program Files
(x86)\ImageDiagnost\MammoWorkstation\PatientListImporter".
3. Hit [Enter].
4. Type in "%idi_home%\thirdparty\jre1.6.0_11_IDI_Patch\bin\java.exe -jar
PatientListImporter.jar[sourcefile][stylesheet] [targetfile][separator]".
Note:
The square brackets must be replaced by the indicated arguments.
Example:
- [sourcefile] ➜ hamm.csv
- [stylesheet] ➜ xsl\hamm.xsl
- [targetfile] ➜ "c:\Program Files (x86) \ImageDiagnost\config\PersonalLists\hamm.xml"
- [separator] ➜ ";"l
5. Hit [Enter].
544
6. The PatientListImporter will be executed.

The single arguments will again be listed in the Arguments dialog:
Result:
During the execution, a case collection file (e.g. hamm.xml) is generated and saved to
%IDI_Home%\PersonalLists\.
6-3 Verification
1. Login to MammoWorkstation
2. Go to the Case collections tab.
3. The imported Patient List must be visible:
545
This page is blank.
546
Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameter
Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameter Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation and DICOM Shuttle.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 60’
3 Introduction
When receiving DICOM image data, the MammoWorkstation can read out the Imaging Parameters of
the given document from the DICOM Header. These Imaging Parameters will then be exported as XDT/
GDT text files. For every received DICOM image data a new XDT/GDT text file will be created.
To enable the export of the Imaging Parameters, the modality must include the Imaging Parameters in
the DICOM Header during the acquisition process.
Note:
The modality must be correctly configured to ensure that all necessary Imaging Paremeters are
included in the DICOM Header.
It is the responsibility of the modality provider to make sure the modality is correctly configured.
4 Necessary Configuration Steps

The configuration of the XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameters requires the following three
configuration steps:
1. Configuring the DICOM Receive AE-Title necessary for exporting the Imaging Parameters.
See section Configuring the DICOM Receive AE-Title on page 548.
2. Configuring the export paths for the XDT/GDT text files.

See section Configuring the File Export Paths on page 549.
3. Adapting the XDT/GDT fields.

See section Adapting the XDT/GDT Fields on page 550.
547
4-1 Configuring the DICOM Receive AE-Title

- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Select the tab "Routing".
3. Configure a Routing rule.
Note:
For more information on this topic, refer to Job Card CFG C14 - Routing Rules Configuration on
page 421.
Example:
Note:
For the XDT/GDT export of the Imaging Parameters it is possible to use an already existing routing
rule. However, keep in mind that the option "Change DICOM Header" may overrule modality's
Imaging Parameter values because actions that can optionally be executed, such as
"Precondition", "Change DICOM Header", "Notify Collaboration Server", "Create MPI" and
"Decompress", will always be executed before the DICOM Header data is exported.
4. Click [Apply] to save your modification/configuration.
5. Click [OK] to exit the MammoWorkstation and to restart the services.
548
4-2 Configuring the File Export Paths

3. Edit the PartnerConfig.xml.
4. Look for the partner element name="XDT_EXPORT".
5. In the xml element "receive_action", the following two xml attributes must be inserted:
- is_imagingparam2xdt_active="yes" (1)
- xdt_export_dir="C:\\TEMP\\XdtExport" (2)
Note:
The indicated path "C:\\TEMP\\XdtExport" is only an example. Indicate your own directory
path.
1 2
549
6. Click [Save] to save your modification.
4-3 Adapting the XDT/GDT Fields

3. Edit the Dcm2XdtDefinitions.xml.
4. Edit the XDT/GDT field parameters:

(1) = XDT default_value "6000"
(2) = XDT target field with field ID ="0005"
(3) = DICOM tag "(0010,0010)"
(4) = XDT type of the target field "date"
550
(5) = XDT format of the target field "dd.MM.yyyy"
5
4
5. Click on [Save] to save the applied modifications.

6. After any applied modification, restart the Apache Tomcat service.
The following table lists all allowed DICOM tags with their associated default XDT fields:
Allowed DICOM Tag Name Default XDT XDT Type XDT Format
Tags Field
(0008,0018) SOP Instance UID 9011 -- --
(0008,0020) Study Date 7789 date dd.MM.yyyy
(0008,0050) Accession Number 0000 -- --
(0008,0104) -- 9017 -- --
(0008,1010) Station Name 9012 -- --
551
Allowed DICOM Tag Name Default XDT XDT Type XDT Format
Tags Field
(0008,1030) Study Description 8888 -- --
(0008,1070) Operators Name 9013 -- --
(0008,0090) Referring Physicians 8891 -- --

Name
(0010,0010) Patients Name 3100 -- --
(0010,0020) Patient ID 0005 -- --
(0010,0030) Patients Birth Date 0004 date dd.MM.yyyy
(0010,0040) Patients Sex -031 enum enum_pat_sex
(0018,0060) KVP 9022 -- --
(0018,1150) Exposure Time 9025 -- --
(0018,1151) X-ray Tube Current 9024 -- --
(0018,1152) Exposure 9023 -- --
(0018,1153) Exposure in µAs 9033 -- --
(0018,1191) Anode Target 9027 -- --

Material
(0018,11A0) Body Part Thickness 9020 -- --
(0018,11A2) Compression Force 9021 -- --
(0018,1510) Positioner Primary 9016 -- --

Angle
(0018,5101) View Position 9015 -- --
(0018,7050) Filter Material 9028 -- --
(0020,000D) Study Instance UID -100 -- --
(0020,0062) Image Laterality 9014 -- --
(0040,0302) Entrance Dose 9026 -- --
(0040,0316) Parenchymdosis 9029 -- --
(0040,8302) Entrance Dose in 9036 -- --

mGy
552
The following table lists all allowed XDT data types and data formats which are necessary for converting
the DICOM format into the XDT format.
Type Format Description
date dd.MM.yyyy converting a DICOM formatted date

into XDT format with the following:
"dd" : day 01 ... 31

"MM" : month 01 ... 12
"yyyy" : year e.g. 2010
enum enum_pat_sex converting the DICOM formatted
enumeration values indicating the
patients sex into the according XDT
values with the following:
"M" : male
"W" : female
"O" : unknown
Note:
Regarding the XDT export, the converter will treat every XDT field, to which no particular format
has been defined, like a normal string field.
For a normal string field the indicated values will be copied from DICOM format to XDT format
without any changes applied.
553
This page is blank.
554
Job Card CFG C48 - Selective PDF/HL7/XML Export
Job Card CFG C48 - Selective PDF/HL7/XML Export Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to Collaboration Server.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 45’
3 Introduction
If reports are created on a MWS, which receives its worklists via a Collaboration Server, the
Collaboration Server is able to export the reports as PDF, HL7 or XML.
The export is designed for the following two work modes:
• The created reports should be sent as PDF, HL7 or XML after every concluded task.
• The created reports should only be sent if the completed task was the last one in the reporting
workflow.
4 Precondition
To enable the selective export for PDF, HL7 or XML the general export must have been already
activated for the respective function.
For further information about XML, PDF or HL7 export, refer to the following Job Cards:
• Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export Configuration on page 461
• Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on page 487
• Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export on page 497.
5 Enable Selective Export (PDF/HL7/XML)

4. Set the value of the following tag <worklist_definitions description=[...]> to

">ImageDiagnost\config\WorklistDefinitions.en.xml<".
Note:
The parameter of this tag states which file contains the active worklist definitions. The default file
is WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
Always indicate the active worklist: WorklistDefinitions.XX.xml.
555
6 Configure WorklistDefinitions
To change the path under which the XML document will be saved:
3. Edit the WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
4. Configure "result_export" section of the desired task types:
Note:
The sections indicated by the numbers 1,2,3 will be explained in detail in the following table:
556
# sub-section in "result_ex- Description

ported"
1 task_type_code XML attribute that contains the code of the task type to be configured.
Note:
For further information on task type codes and their respective task
type description, refer to task_type_code on page 391 or
task_type_description on page 391.
2 <precondition> This sub-section defines an additional precondition that must be met to

<on_final/> continue with exporting the worklist task.
</precondition> The precondition affects all export orders of a particular worklist task that are
explained in table row 3.
In case the following conditions have all been met, the worklist task will be
exported. The conditions to be met are:
• The worklist task must be the task type that is indicated in the
task_type_code.
• The worklist task has been completed (e.g "First Reading" has been
concluded and the respective report has been saved in the data base of
the Collaboration Server).
• The additional precondition that has been entered here has been met as
well.
For the moment only the following precondition can be indicated: "on_final".
This precondition is active as long as the precondition xml attribute is visible.
Note:
To deactivate this precondition, the complete sub-section must be
deleted.
The two possible scenarios:
• "on_final" is active:
Before exporting the report, the Collaboration Server will check whether
the completed worklist task was the last one task in the reporting
workflow:
If this worklist task is the last one in the reporting workflow (e.g."First
Reading", "Second Reading", "Consensus Conference"), the
Collaboration Server will export the report documentation.
If this worklist task was not the last one in the reporting workflow
(e.g."First Reading", "Second Reading", "Consensus Conference"), the
reporting documentation will not be exported.
• "on_final" is not active:
Note:
To deactivate this precondition, the complete sub-section must be
deleted.
The Collaboration Server will export the report documentation after every
completed task.
557

ported"
3 <sr_hl7_export> In case this sub-section is available, the Collaboration Server will export the
<targets> report documentation via HL7 export.
<hl7_target...> Note:
... The report will only be exported if the condition (see table row 2) are met.
<targets/> It is mandatory to first enable the HL7 export:
</sr_hl7_export> For further information on HL7 export, refer to Job Card CFG C32 - HL7
Export Configuration on page 461.
Procedure:
1. Indicate the RIS that will receive HL7 in the xml attribute
<hl7_target>.
2. If more than one RIS shall receive the HL7, enter several
<hl7_target> attributes in the single xml attribute <targets>.
<sr_xml_export> In case this sub-section is available, the Collaboration Server will export the
<folder/> report documentation as XML export.
<filename/> Note:
</sr_xml_export> The report will only be exported if the condition (see table row 2) are met.
It is mandatory to first enable the XML export:
For further information on XML export, refer to Job Card CFG C26 - XML
Export on page 497.
Procedure:
1. Indicate the name of the XML export folder in the xml attribute
<folder>.
2. Indicate the name of the xml export files in the xml attribute
<filename/>.
Note:
The value for folder and filename must only be indicated if they are
different from the ones already indicated in section 4 XML Export Path in
Job Card CFG C26 - XML Export on page 497.
558

ported"
<sr_pdf_export> In case this sub-section is available, the Collaboration Server will export the
<folder/> report documentation via PDF export.
<filename/> Note:
</sr_pdf_export> The report will only be exported if the condition (see table row 2) are met.
It is mandatory to first enable the PDF export:
For further information on PDF export, refer to Job Card CFG C33 - PDF
Export on page 487.
Procedure:
1. Indicate the name of the PDF export folder in the xml attribute
<folder/>.
2. Indicate the name of the PDF export files in the xml attribute
<filename/>.
Note:
The value for folder and filename must only be indicated if they are
different from the ones already indicated in section 4 Enable PDF Export
on Collaboration Server in Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on page 487.
Note:
If the associated function is not required, each of the three xml branches "sr_hl7_export",
"sr_xml_export"and "sr_pdf_export" can be removed from the configuration file.
Note:
The complete xml structure defining one specific export order can be removed in case the
associated action (i.e export function) is not needed.
3. After any modification in the WorklistDefinitions.en.xml, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
559
This page is blank.
560
Job Card CFG C50 - Quadrant Zoom Configuration
Job Card CFG C50 - Quadrant Zoom Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation and MDS.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Introduction
The Quadrant Zoom cycles through enlarged image quadrants clockwise or counterclockwise.
The system calculates the number of steps necessary to cover the breast depending on the available
monitor area.
4 Quadrant Overlap Configuration

The system tries to minimize the number of rectangles used to cover the breast area. Consequently, the
actual overlap varies with every breast.
However, the system always ensures a minimal overlap. The default value for this minimal overlap is
10mm. This value can be configured:
4. Look for the section [FilmScannerDefaults]

5. Edit the value of the attribute "QuadrantOverlap =10.0":
Note:
The value will be indicated in millimeter (mm).
A valid value range for the QuadrantOverlap is 0mm - 400mm.
561
Job Card CFG C50 - Quadrant Zoom Configuration
7. After any modification in the MammoWorkstation.ini, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
5 View Resolution Configuration

If the pixel resolution of one given image is less than 8.5lp/mm (this value can be configured), the image
will be enlarged to the required size before the Quadrant Zoom can be applied.
To configure the minimum displayed resolution (in linepairs per mm):

4. Look for the section [FilmScannerDefaults].

5. Edit the value of the attribute "ViewResolutionLp = 8.5":
7. After any modification in the MammoWorkstation.ini, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
562
Job Card CFG C52 - Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration
Job Card CFG C52 - Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Introduction
To enable the desktop synchronization between the IDI MWS and the Centricity RIS-IC application,
special configuration steps need to be configured on the IDI MWS side and on the RIS-IC side.
The desktop synchronization allows the Centricity RIS-IC application to launch breast images in an IDI
MWS and allows the IDI MWS to query the Centricity RIS-IC application for patient and exam data
through a DICOM modality worklist query.
5 Preconditions
• The RIS-IC must have been installed and configured.
• The user names and passwords need to match in the two systems.
• The IDI MWS must have been configured to include the:
a. Connectivity Module Modality Worklist Query.
Note:
For more information on how to connect to a Worklist server, refer to Job Card CFG C16 -
b. PACS, the RIS-IC application uses to load images.

Note:
For more information on how to configure a DICOM partner, refer to Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM
563
6 Centricity RIS-IC Adapter - Configuration

3. Edit the RISICAdapterConf.xml
4. The following values must be configured:
Configurable value Set to...

The value must be set to "true".
Leave the default values.

Note:
The adapter ID and description must not
change.
The following configuration settings are only related to the IDI-Driven Worfklow.
The Web Root to the RIS-IC server must have
been communicated from RIS-IC service team.
The DSN name of the RIS-IC server must have
been communicated from RIS-IC service team.
Set the value to one of the following options:
• ResultReporting
= launches the Result Reporting module
• ClinicalNote
= launches the Clinical Note module
• ClinicalInfo
= launches the Clinical Info module
Note:
For more information on the viewing
options, contact the Centricity RIS IC
service team.
564

Possible values are:
• "StudyInstanceUID"
= sends the Study Instance UID to the RISIC
for patient synchronization.
• "PatientIdAndAccessionNumber"
= sends the Patient ID and Accession Number
to the RISIC for patient synchronization
Note:
The default value is set to
"StudyInstanceUID".
5. Click on [Save] to save the applied configuration.
7 Allow Desktop Synchronisation (Remote Control)

Depending on the workflow you will need additional configuration.
7-1 RIS-Driven Workflow

Allow the RIS to synchronize the context with the MammoWorkstation:
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
3. Check the box "Allow remote control by other application".
Note:
This check box is selected by default.
4. Specify the PACS archive associated with the RIS application.
565
5. Make sure "Activate remote control of other application" is unchecked.
Note:
For more information on this topic, refer to Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization from
Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) on page 413.
566
7-2 IDI-Driven Workflow

Allow the MammoWorkstation to synchronize the context with the RIS:
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
3. Make sure "Allow remote control by other application" is unchecked.
4. Check the box "Activate remote control of other application".
5. Leave the box "File system path to the external binary" empty.
Leave empty
Note:
MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote Control) on page 419.
567
This page is blank.
568
Job Card CFG C56 - Configuration of the AW Server Adapter
Job Card CFG C56 - Configuration of the AW Server Adapter Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
If the AW Server 2 Client is installed on a separate system, special configuration settings are
necessary. In this case, please contact the next GE service level for assistance.
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Prerequisites
The AW Server must be properly set up to allow access through the AW Server 2 Client. This includes:
• AW Server must be licensed and properly configured
Note:
This should have been done by the AW Server team on their server.
• Ask the AW server team for the:
- login credentials
- IP for the server
569
5 Download and Install AW Server 2 Client

• Open the Internet Explorer.
• Insert the IP of the AW Server in the Browser.
• Click on [Download] to download the AW Server 2 Client for Windows:
• Install the AW Server 2 Client with the default setting as Administrator.

➜ An AW Client icon will be created on your desktop.
Note:
For Windows 7, it might be necessary to remove the "read only flag" and allow all users everything:
- Go to C:\Program Files (x86)\GE\AWS_2.0
- Right click on the directory ➜ a menu will open
- Select Properties ➜ a dialog window will open
- Go to tab "General" and uncheck the box "Read only".
Apply this to all sub folders as well.
• Start the installed AW Server 2 Client.
570
• Check and correct the connection settings and login:

- Click on Show settings ➜ the Connection type and Proxy settings must be adjusted if necessary.
• Perform a monitor check:

- Login to AW Server 2 Client and select the tab "Tools".
- Go to the section "Client Check" and click on [Launch].
571
- A Client Checker Tool window will open.

- Click on [Start].
- The result should look like the following:
• Close the AW Server 2 Client application.
572
6 Configuration of the AW Server Integration

For configuring the AW Server Integration, the CommandLine Adapter is used.
Note:
For more information on the CommandLine Adapter see Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter
Configuration.
2. Open the Image Diagnost Folder

• Open [adapters]
• Open [samples]
• Open [AW Server]
• Edit the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml
• Highlight the content between and including
<commandlineconf> .... </commandlineconf> and copy the highlighted text (Ctrl +C).
3. Open the Configuration Folder
573
4. Edit the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml:.
• If necessary, remove BOM (byte order mark, cryptic bytes) at beginning of the file:
• Paste (Ctrl + V) the copied text after <adapters> and before the first <commandlineconf>
entry.
• The following values need to be adapted to your current AW Server configuration:
- Path to integration.exe ➜ the sample path is
"C:\\Program Files (x86)\GE\AWS_2.0\solo\integration.exe"
- IP of the AW server ➜ the sample IP is 111.222.333.444
- User ID for AW Server login ➜ the sample user is sampleuser
- Password for AW Server login ➜ the sample password is samplepassword
Note:
Special characters such as "&" must be coded as XML entities ➜ & .
574
5. The structure of the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml should now look like the following:
<xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<adapters>
<commandlineconf>
...(configuration for AW Server)
</commandlineconf>
<commandlineconf>
...(existing configuration)
</commandlineconf>
</adapters>
6. Save all applied modifications by clicking [Save].
7. Exit the Support Interface.
8. Restart the MWSTray:
- Right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar;
- click on [Exit]
- go to the Windows Start menu;

- click on All Programs;
575
- go to Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray ➜an MWS icon should then appear in the notification
9. Start MammoWorkstation and check if the AWServer adapter is listed:

• Click on [Adapters] in the MammoWorkstation toolbar.
• The entries below Viewer should display AW Server as enabled and activated:
576
7 MammoWorkstation Configuration
Allow the MammoWorkstation to synchronize the context with the AW Server:
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
4. Leave the existing values in the text input fields for "File system path to the external binary.".
keep the existing values
Note:
577
8 Verification of AW Server Adapter Configuration

Note:
Prerequisite:
At least one case from AW Server adequate for demo must have been imported into the
MammoWorkstation.
1. Start the MammoWorkstation.
2. Check if the adapter for AW Server is enabled and active:
3. Open the case.
4. In the tab Additional Studies, select a study that is also available on the AW Server.
5. Click on [Series Viewer] ➜ The study should be selected in the AW Server browser.
Note:
The first time, it may take a while for the AW Server to ramp up.
578
Job Card CFG C58 - ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration
Job Card CFG C58 - ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
If the ClearCanvas Workstation is installed on a separate system, special configuration settings
are necessary. In this case, please contact the next GE service level for assistance.
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Prerequisites
• The customer must take care of proper installation and licensing of the ClearCanvas Workstation.
4-1 Download and Install ClearCanvas Workstation

• Go to
• Open the tab Downloads.
• Click on ClearCanvas Workstation.
• Login with your user name and password.
Note:
ClearCanvas Workstation 2.0 SP1 must be installed on the customer site. This is the responsibility
of the customer.
ClearCanvas Workstation can be downloaded from http://www.clearcanvas.ca.
Valid login credentials are required.
579
5 Configuration of ClearCanvas Workstation as External Viewer

Note:
For configuring the ClearCanvas Workstation, the ClearCanvasAdapter is used.
3. Edit the ClearCanvasAdapterConf.xml.
•
Enable the ClearCanvas adapter:
➜ Set the value of the following tag <enabled>false</enabled> to true.
Example:l
• Check the port. The port must match the one configured in the ClearCanvas Workstation.
➜ Adjust the value of the following tag to match the port (indicated in red in the below example)
configured in the ClearCanvas Workstation.
Example:
<wsdl>http://127.0.0.1:51124/ClearCanvas/ImageViewer/Automation?wsdl</wsdl>
- To test the entered URL, enter the URL in a browser window.

- If the browser shows data (xml data), the URL is correct.
Note:
The URL only works if the ClearCanvas Workstation is started.
Example of a positive response on the URL in a browser window:
580

- click on [Exit]

581
6 Verification of ClearCanvas Adapter Configuration

Note:
Prerequisite:
At least one case from the ClearCanvas Workstation adequate for demo must have been imported
into the MammoWorkstation.
2. Check if the adapter for ClearCanvas is enabled and active:
3. Open the case.
4. In the tab Additional Studies, select a study that is also available on the ClearCanvas Workstation.
5. Click on [Series Viewer] ➜ The study should be selected in the ClearCanvas Workstation browser.
Note:
The first time, it may take a while for the ClearCanvas Workstation to ramp up.
582
Job Card CFG C62 - Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration
Job Card CFG C62 - Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
583
4 Merge eFilm Adapter Configuration

The Merge eFilm adapter requires configuration in the Merge eFilm environment as well as in the IDI
environment.
4-1 Configuration in Merge eFilm Environment

Note:
The documentation refers to Merge eFilm version 3.1, Merge eFilm version 3.3 and Merge eFilm
version 3.4.
1. Start eFilm.
2. In the Login window, select the [Settings] button.
The following window will open:
- In section Login Overrides enable the check box Bypass login when automated (1).
➜ no login screen will be required when eFilm is started in the MammoWorkstation.
- In section Login Timeout, enable the check box Disable login timeout (2).
1 2
- Press [OK] ➜ the Login window will be displayed again.
584
3. Login to eFilm.
- Select Edit ➜ Properties ➜ tab Remote Devices.
- Configure the PACS archives (1) that eFilm uses to load images.
The following parameters must be provided:
- Description
- AE Title
- IP Address
- Port
- Type
- Select [Add] (2).
Note:
The same PACS archives must be specified in the eFilmAdapterConf.xml. For more information
refer to 4-2 Configuration in IDI Environment on page 586.
1
2
585
4-2 Configuration in IDI Environment

Note:
Make sure the MWSTray is stopped:
- click on [Exit].
3. Edit the EFilmAdapterConf.xml
Note:
is selected. For more information on this topic, refer to section 3 - General Information on
page 583.
- Enable the eFilm adapter:

➜ Set the value of the following tag <enabled>false</enabled> to true.
Example:
- Viewer ID: The Viewer ID will help you identifying the eFilm Adapter in the MammoWorkstation.
➜ Set the value of the following tag <viewerId>eFilm 3.X</viewerId> to whatever name
you want to give the eFilm external viewer.
Note:
Characters allowed in the Viewer ID tag are letters, underscores, blanks, hyphens, dashes and
parentheses.
- Connected PACS: Specify the PACS archives that eFilm uses to load images.
➜ Set the value of the following tag <pacs>AETitle</pacs> to the AE title of the PACS
archive the eFilm external viewer uses.
586
Example:
Note:
If several PACS archives are connected to the eFilm external viewer, copy the tag
<pacs>AETitle</pacs> for every PACS and set the value of every tag to the corresponding AE
title of the PACS.
Note:
The MammoWorkstation must have the same PACS archives configured as Merge eFilm. To
check that, refer to Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners Configuration on page 403.
4. Restart the MWSTray to implement the applied configurations:

- click on [Exit]

587
588
Job Card CFG C60 - Configuration of MRS Adapter
Job Card CFG C60 - Configuration of MRS Adapter Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Prerequisites
4-1 Basic MRS Prerequisites
Note:
The MRS software version that must be used is MRS version 7.0.4.
The product prerequisites are:
• The MRS Worklist Provider must have been licensed, installed and configured.
• The MRS Server must have been licensed, installed and configured.
• The MRS Workstation must have been licensed, installed and configured.
• The MRS Generic Integration must have been installed and configured.
Note:
All actions mentioned above should have been done by the MRS team.
The license prerequisites are:
• Generic integration GE_IDI_MWS
• Interfaces DICOM_SCP, DICOM_WKL for the MRS DICOM Worklist Provider
Generic prerequisites are:
• The MRS related installs and configurations should be documented in the MRS 7 Installation guide.
589
4-2 General Requirements

Before going on site, the FE must have detailed information and knowledge about the following:
• Which MRS sites are part of the integration?
• What product version and part versions are available?
Note:
Check that the available setup is compliant with the one supported by GE.
• Does each of these sites provide fields for DICOM Patient ID and DICOM Accession Number?
Note:
The interrogation only works on DICOM Patient ID and DICOM Accession Number. If the IDs used
by MRS are not complaint with the ones used by IDI MammoWorkstation, the integration cannot
work.
• Login credentials for the admin user (for configurations in MRS)
• Login credentials for the operator (the user actually analyzing the images and creating the reports)
• IP numbers and port numbers for the integration with GE_IDI_MWS (can be adjusted on location if
needed).
• AE title and port for the MRS Worklist Provider (can be adjusted on location if needed).
Note:
As the MRS FE sets up the integrations on the MRS side, the GE FE must require the data items
to set up the MWS part of the configuration from MRS service team.
4-3 IDI Prerequisite

The following Image Diagnost options must have been licensed:
• MammoWorkstation
- MammoWorkstation
- Quick Negative (a toggle function between "Normal" and "Benign")
- Workflow Module
• DICOM Shuttle
- Worklist Broker
- I/O Module
To check if all necessary licenses are available:
• Login to MammoWorkstation ➜ Settings.
The default credentials are:
- Name: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
590
• Go to the tab "License"
5 MRS Configurations
5-1 Checking the GE IDI Integration
Note:
The MRS Workstation and Server must have already been setup and configured by the MRS
service team.
• Start MRS
• Login with the administrator login credentials provided by the MRS team.
• Go to Toolbar ➜ Tools ➜ Workstation Settings
- Check if the integration with the IDI MammoWorkstation is ok.
591
- Click OK
• Go to Toolbar ➜ Administration ➜ GE_IDI_MWS Setup:

- Select your Integration Setup (e.g. GE_IDI_MWS3), then click [Select] ➜ a dialog window opens.
If the Status is "Lis-

tening", the button
will read
[Stop Listening].
If the Status is "not
Listening", the but-
ton will read [Lis-
ten].
Note:
The following information should correspond to the information already retrieved by the MRS
service team.
a. Check the Receiver Port Number.
b. Check the Sender Port.
c. Check Sender IP
d. Check Patient primary ID.
Check whether the settings match the details provided in the preparation document.
e. Check Procedure primary ID.
Check whether the settings match the details provided in the preparation document
f. Check the Status. Click [Listen] to start the communication.
592
! Notice:
Do not change any of the above settings. This part of integration should have been done by the
MRS service team. If there is any issue, please contact the MRS service team.
5-2 Checking the Worklist Provider Data

• Start MRS
• Login with the login credentials provided by the MRS team.
• Go to Toolbar ➜ Administration ➜ DICOM Setup ➜ DICOM_SCP
- Check if the Patient ID and Accession Number values correspond to the ones in the
MammoWorkstation.
Note:
Please confirm with the MRS Service team.
• Start MRS
• Login with the login credentials provided by the MRS team.
• Go to Toolbar ➜ Administration ➜ DICOM Setup ➜ DICOM_WKL
There are two tabs: Mapping and Inbound
• Go to the tab Mapping:
- Check if the settings for the DICOM Patient ID and DICOM Accession Number correspond /
match with the details provided in the preparation document.
593
Note:
Please confirm with the MRS Service team.
594
• Go to the tab Inbound:

- Check the Nodes Configuration:
! Notice:
Do not change any of the above settings. This part of integration should have been done by the
MRS service team. If there is any issue, please contact the MRS service team.
5-3 Checking the Worklist Provider

• Check if the worklist provider MRS WP.exe is started (in the system tray).
If it is not started, start the worklist provider MRS WP.exe as Administrator.
Note:
Check the default location, under which the MRS data has been installed. If in doubt, contact the
MRS team.
• After the worklist provider has been started, a tray icon will be visible in the notification area of the
Windows taskbar.
• Right click on the tray icon and select [Settings]
➜ the following window will open:
- Check the real IP address

- Leave the default Node Name
- Make sure the port is the same as the one in the Node Configuration described above.
- For the MRS Directory, leave the default entry.
• After the settings have been checked, start the worklist provider.
595
6 Configurations on the MammoWorkstation
Prerequisites:
• Service ApacheTomcat6ForIDI is started.
• MWSTray is started and connected. For details, go to 3-3 Restart the MWSTray.
6-1 User Configuration

Note:
For more information on User account creation, refer to Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts
Creation for the IDI Application on page 385.
• Go to Support Interface.
• Select [Collaboration Server Admin]:
• Select “ADMINISTRATION”.
The default Login is "admin", password "admin".
• Select USERs and ROLEs.
• Create a new role with the following parameters:
Note:
The data to be used must be provided in the MRS preparation document.
- ID = (e.g) mrs,
- Description = (e.g) MRS Group
• Click on Save Role.
596
• Create a new user with appropriate user data, including:

- ID,
- Name,
- Password,
- Role member,
- Authorized access to TASKS.
Note:
The user data must match the data provided by the preparation team for login synchronization and
for correctly assigning worklist tasks.
• Click on Save USER.
597
6-2 Configuration of Remote Control

- Name: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
• Go to the tab "Remote Control".
Note:
For further information on Remote Control, refer to Job Card CFG C12 - Desktop Synchronization
from Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) on page 413 or to Job Card CFG
C13 - Desktop Synchronization from MammoWorkstation to Third Party Client (Remote Control)
on page 419.
- Make sure to check all three boxes:

a. Select the configured PACS archive.
Note:
For further information on how to configure a PACS archive, refer to Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM
MWS and MRS must use the same PACS.
b. If this box has already been selected, keep all existing values.
If it has not been activated yet, remove the default settings.
c. Select MRS7.0 for the Associated Reporting System.
The ID must match the ID of the MRS adapter. If the adapter ID has been changed in the
adapter configuration, then this value must be selected here as well.
6-3 Worklist Configuration

There are two necessary worklist configurations:
• The primary worklist retrieving tasks directly from the MRS Worklist Provider and routing the tasks to
the Collaboration Server.
• The proxy worklist "Current tasks" that retrieves the routed tasks from the Collaboration Server.
These tasks are copies for the real tasks.
598
6-3-1 Configuration of Primary Worklist MRS_DICOM_SCP

- Name: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
• Go to the tab "Worklist & RIS".
• Create a new worklist entry for MRS_DICOM_SCP.
Note:
For more information on how to create worklists, refer to Job Card CFG C16 - Connection to a
Worklist Server on page 429.
a
b
c
d
a. Enter your own AE Title.

b. Enter the real IP of the system on which the MRS Worklist Provider is running.
c. DICOM AE Title: the DICOM AE Title must match settings for MRS Worklist Provider as set in
Checking the Worklist Provider on page 595.
d. Port: the Port must match settings for MRS Worklist Provider as set in Checking the Worklist
Provider on page 595.
e. Add two search filters:
599
- 0008,0060 = MG
- 0040,0002 = %dcmdate%
f. Check the box "WorklistBroker" for EXTERNAL_TASK and edit the rules as described in section
6-3-1-1.
6-3-1-1 WorklistBroker Task Configuration
• Replace the following entries:

- For Task Type Code (private) enter SINGLE_READING.
- For Requested Procedure Description enter Reading.
- For Performing Physician Name enter the name of the MRS User.
Note:
The value must match the MWS user name configured for the MWS - MRS integration.
• Click [OK].
6-3-2 Configuration of Proxy Worklist "Current Tasks"

- Name: "admin"
- Password: "admin"
• Go to the tab "Worklist & RIS".
600
• Select the Worklist "Current Tasks" and edit the following details as described below:
a
b
c
d
a. Enter your own AE Title.

b. Enter the IP Address of the MammoWorkstation.
c. For DICOM AE Title, leave the default AE Title for current tasks: AE_WORK
d. For Port, leave the default port for current tasks: 4005
e. Select the associated PACS archive.
f. For the Image Diagnost Collaboration Server leave Query Mode "Current Tasks"
601
6-4 Adjustment to Workflow Configuration

• Go to Support Interface.
• Open the Configuration Folder.
• Edit the WfConf.xml.
- Set the value of the following tags to 1:

<mwl_find_connection_is_active description="" >1</mwl_find_connection_is_active>
<mwl_find_query_cycle description="External WL Query Cycle in Min.">1</mwl_find_query_cycle>
<wl_expiry_task_age description="Age at Expiry in Days">1</wl_expiry_task_age>
<allow_extern_dcm_task_id description="Allow SPS ID Importing From Extern DCM-WL">1</

allow_extern_dcm_task_id>
<allow_wl_importer_sync_task_status description="">1</allow_wl_importer_sync_task_status>
- Check which worklist configuration file is referenced in the tag [...].

<worklist_definitions description="Worklist Definitions"> [...]< worklist_definitions>
Note:
The default worklist configuration file is the WorklistDefinitions.en.xml.
• Open the Configuration Folder.

• Edit the worklist configuration file that is referenced in the WfConf.xml.
In the following, the WorklistDefinitions.en.xml will be used as example configuration file.
- Identify the xml item for EXTERNAL_TASK.

- Identify the following tag:
<wl_order_task_type_code overwriting="yes">SINGLE_READING</wl_order_task_type_code>
- Insert the following tag above the tag <wl_order_task_type_code overwriting="yes"> [...]>
<wl_order_study_instance_uid overwriting="yes"></wl_order_study_instance_uid >
- Leave the value of this tag empty. Do not insert any value!
602
5. After any modification to the WfConf.xml and to the WorklistDefinition.en.xml restart the Apache
Tomcat service.
6-5 Configuration of the MRS Adapter

3. Edit the MRSAdapterConf.xml
603
• The following values must be configured:

The value must be set to "true".
The value must be set to the IP address of the

MRS Workstation.
The value must be set to the Receiver Port

Number entered in the MRS application. Refer to
Checking the GE IDI Integration on page 591.
The value must be set to the Sender Port Number
entered in the MRS application. Refer to Checking
the GE IDI Integration on page 591.
The value must be set to the name of the user set
up in the MammoWorkstation.
The login configured for MWS must match the
user set up for the Collaboration Server and the
user configured in MWS for the worklist. It must
not be necessarily mrs/mrs, but it must match.
The value must be set to the name of the user set

up in the MRS application.
The configuration for <mrsuser> and
<mrspassword> must be the login credentials for
the user doing the reporting in MRS. If the settings
are omitted, the MWS credentials are used.

- click on [Exit]

604
5. Restart the service ApacheTomcat6forIDI.

• Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Administrative Tools ➜ Service
• Select the ApacheTomcat6forIDI.
• Restart the service.
7 Verification
1. Make sure that MRS Worklist Provider is started.
Note:
For more information on how to start the MRS Worklist Provider, refer to section 5-3 Checking the
Worklist Provider.
a. Check that the settings are correct and if necessary correct the IP.
b. Start the MRS Worklist Provider.
2. Start the MRS Workstation with the MRS user credentials ➜ the MammoWorkstation should launch
automatically and login the MWS user.
3. Open the MammoWorkstation.
605
- Go to Toolbar and click on the button [Adapters] ➜ MRS 7.0 must be listed as enabled and active.
4. Update the current tasks in the MammoWorkstation worklist.

5. Select a patient from the current tasks ➜ The patient must be opened in MRS.
6. Close the patient with "Wait for Findings" in MRS ➜ The patient must be closed in the
MammoWorkstation.
606
Job Card CFG C64 - Configuration of the Merge CADstream Adapter
Job Card CFG C64 - Configuration of the Merge CADstream Adapter Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Prerequisites
The Merge CADstream Server must be properly set up to allow access through the CADalyst Client. This
includes:
• Merge CADstream Server must be licensed and properly configured
Note:
This should have been done by the Merge CADstream team on their server.
• Ask the Merge CADstream server team for the:
- login credentials
- IP for the server
607
5 Download and Install CADstreamCADalyst Client

• Open the Internet Explorer.
• Insert the IP of the CADstream server in the Browser.
• Login with the login credentials provided by CADstream.
• Navigate to System ➜ Download.
• Download the current CADalyst Client.
• Install the CADalyst Client with the default setting as Administrator.
➜ An CADalyst Client icon will be created on your desktop.
Note:
For Windows 7, it might be necessary to remove the "read only flag" and allow all users everything:
• Close the CADalyst Client application.
6 Configuration of the CADstream Server Integration

For configuring the CADstream Server Integration, the CommandLine Adapter is used.
Note:
For more information on the CommandLine Adapter see Job Card CFG C30 - External Adapter
Configuration.

• Open [adapters]
• Open [samples]
• Open [CADstream]
• Edit the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml
608
• Highlight the content between and including

<commandlineconf> .... </commandlineconf> and copy the highlighted text (Ctrl +C).

4. Edit the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml:.
609
• Paste (Ctrl + V) the copied text after <adapters> and before the first <commandlineconf>
entry.
5. The structure of the CommandLineAdapterConf.xml should now look like the following:
<xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<adapters>
<commandlineconf>
...(configuration for CADstream Server)
</commandlineconf>
<commandlineconf>
...(existing configuration)
</commandlineconf>
</adapters>
6. Save all applied modifications by clicking [Save].
610
6-1 Checking of *.bat Files


• Open [adapters]
• Open [samples]
• Open [CADstream]
• Open the cadstreamopen.bat
- Check that the environment variables match your CADstream client installation (CADalyst).
• Open the cadstreamcloseall.bat
- Check that the environment variables match your CADstream client installation (CADalyst).

• right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar;
• click on [Exit]
• go to the Windows Start menu;

• click on All Programs;
611
• go to Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray ➜an MWS icon should then appear in the notification
4. Start MammoWorkstation and check if the CADstream Adapter adapter is listed:

• Click on [Adapters] in the MammoWorkstation toolbar.
• The entries below Viewer should display CADstream Adapter as enabled and activated.
612
7 MammoWorkstation Configuration
Allow the MammoWorkstation to synchronize the context with the CADstream Server:
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
4. Leave the existing values in the text input fields for "File system path to the external binary.".
Keep the existing values
Note:
613
8 Verification of Merge CADstream Adapter Configuration
Note:
Prerequisite:
At least one case from CADstream Server adequate for demo must have been imported into the
MammoWorkstation.

2. Check if the adapter for CADstream Server is enabled and active:
3. Start the CADstream Server and login.
4. Open the case in the MammoWorkstation.
5. In the tab Additional Studies, select a study that is also available on the CADstream Server.
6. Click on [Series Viewer] ➜ The study should be selected in the CADstream Server browser.
Note:
The first time, it may take a while for the CADstream Server to ramp up.
614
Job Card CFG C80 - Configuration of FileDrop Adapter
Job Card CFG C80 - Configuration of FileDrop Adapter Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
! Notice:
- in the Internet Explorer, select View ➜ Encoding ➜ Unicode (UTF-8).
changes:
Note:
4 Introduction
The file-drop adapter is meant for desktop synchronization between the IDI MWS and another external
application via a file-drop adapter. The IDI MWS v.4.7.0 maintenance release 2 provides file templates,
which can be used as a basis for desktop synchronization with Epic and PowerScribe 360. However, the
procedure described in this job card applies to all external application, which have file-drop
communication option.
Note:
The communication can be configured one way only:
• Inbound Communication (External application → MWS) or
• Outbound Communication (MWS → External application).
The communication via a file-drop adapter can define the following commands:
a. Launch
b. Terminate
c. Log in/out
d. Open/Close.
615
5 Epic and PowerScribe 360

In order to enable communication some folders need to be created:
• “Epic” or “PowerScribe 360” (according to what is used): this folder can be created on any Local Disk
(e.g. D:\).
! Notice:
Please make sure to use the correct Disk name later on during configuration.
• Sub-folders:
• “Inbound”
• “Outbound”
• “Templates”
Please copy the template files from the following folder, and paste them into the “Templates” folder.
%IDI_HOME%\RemoteControl\adapters\FileDropAdapter\Samples\[Application_name]\Templates
[Application_name] should either be Epic or PowerScribe 360, according to the Application in use.
6 Inbound Communication (External application → MWS)

Use these configuration steps for an external application to send information to IDI MWS:
6-1 Configuration of the FileDropAdapterConf.xml

3. Edit the FileDropAdapterConf.xml:
Note:
Please read carefully the explanatory sections throughout the configuration file.
a.
The value must be set to “true”.
b.
Define the path for the inboundDirectory. Use the one created in section Epic and
PowerScribe 360 on page 616.
616
c.
Set the command format used for the communication: XPath (for xml) and Regex (for text
document).
d.
Choose the applicable character encoding system.

e.
Decide whether you want the system to replace the environment variables in the command
with its value.
f. Please define all commands included in section
inboundCommandMappings:
• make sure to define the commandIdentifier for
each command;
• the commands can have multiple definitions;
• the commands which are not required for your
configuration, but are marked as “Required” in the
configuration file, must be deleted manually.
5. Click on [Save] to save the configuration file.

7. Close and restart the MWSTray.
6-2 Remote Control Configuration

- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
3. Check the box "Allow remote control by other application".
617
4. Specify the PACS archive associated with the RIS application.
Note:
Third Party Client to MammoWorkstation (Remote Control) on page 413.
5. Click [OK] to save the configuration and restart the services.
6. Next, please log on to IDI and click the "Adapter" button.
7. In the opened window the FileDropAdapter should now be active.
7 Outbound Communication (MWS → External application)

Use these configuration steps for IDI MWS to send information to an external application:
7-1 Configuration of the FileDropAdapterConf.xml

618
3. Edit the FileDropAdapterConf.xml:
Note:
Please read carefully the explanatory sections throughout the configuration file.
a.
The value must be set to “true”.
b.
Define the path for the outboundDirectory. Use the one created in section Epic and
PowerScribe 360 on page 616.
c.
Set the extension name for the files: xml or txt.
d.
Set the command format used for the communication: XPath (for xml) and Regex (for text
document).
e.
Choose the applicable character encoding system.

f.
Decide whether you want the system to replace the environment variables in the command
with its value.
For outbound communication, you must define placeholders and command.
g. Placeholders:
• there are only five possible options for
the placeholders.
619
h. Commands:
• in the configuration file, define the path where the files for each command are stored.
• samples of outbound commands for Epic and PowerScribe can be found in the
Templates folder created in section Epic and PowerScribe 360 on page 616.
• for the openCommand, you can also define several filter conditions based on the
availability of the “accessionNumber” and “study”.
5. Click on [Save] to save the applied configuration.

7. Close and restart the MWSTray.
7-2 Remote Control Configuration

- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Select the tab “Remote Control”.
3. Check the box “Activate remote control of other application”.
620
4. Leave the box “File system path to the external binary” empty.
Leave empty
Note:
5. Click [OK] to save the configuration and restart the services.
6. Next, please log on to IDI and click the "Adapter" button.
7. In the opened window the FileDropAdapter should now be active.
621
This page is blank.
622
Job Card CFG C54 - Change Administrator Password for IDI Support Interface
Job Card CFG C54 - Change Administrator Password for IDI Support
Interface Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all systems.
1 Field Engineer
Time:
To access the Support Interface, the following default login credentials are required:
• user: admin
• password: admin
To change the default login credentials, follow the below described procedure.
4 Procedure
To change the password for the IDI Support Interface:
2. Open the Image Diagnost Folder.
3. Click on [thirdparty].
4. Click on [ApacheTomcat].
5. Click on [conf].
6. Edit the tomcat-users.xml.
623
Job Card CFG C54 - Change Administrator Password for IDI Support Interface
7. Search for the line

<user username="admin" password="admin" roles="admin,manager,tomcat,idsupport"/>
8. Change the value "admin" of the attribute password to a new, appropriate password.
9. Restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
5 Verification
Login to the Support Interface with the new password.
624
Job Card CFG C66 - Configuration of the "Claim Worklist Item" Feature
Job Card CFG C66 - Configuration of the "Claim Worklist Item" FeatureChapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
! Notice:
The Claim Worklist Item feature is only available in combination with the Collaboration Server.

These configuration options allow the activation or deactivation of functions of the Claim Worklist Item
feature in the Worklist mask of the MammoWorkstation (respectively Mammo Documentation Station).
These functions are:
Note:
The function "Release Discontinued Tasks" and the function "Release Completed Tasks" are only
available if the parameter "Enable Claimed Tasks" is enabled (i.e. the parameter is set to "yes")
• the Enable Claimed Tasks function:

➜ pressing the [Claim] button for one (or several) selected worklist items will mark the selected
worklist items as claimed in the column "Claim Status". For every claimed worklist item the
physician’s name claiming the task will be added in the column "Claim Status". Claimed worklist
items cannot be opened or claimed by another user.
➜ pressing the [Release] button for one (or several) selected claimed worklist items will declassify
the selected worklist items. The worklist items can then be claimed by another user.
• the Release Discontinued Tasks function:

➜ enabling this function in the MammoWorkstation.ini will declassify every claimed worklist item on
which the review was not completed.
• the Release Completed Tasks function:

➜ enabling this function in the MammoWorkstation.ini will declassify every claimed worklist task after
the review of the task has been finished.
625
4 Procedure
To configure the:
4. Look for the section [ModalityWorklist].

Note:
Per default, all three configuration options are enabled, i.e the parameter is set to "yes".
! Notice:
The parameter "ReleaseDiscontinuedTasks" and the parameter
"ReleaseCompletedTasks" are only available if the parameter "EnableClaimedTasks" is
enabled (i.e. the parameter is set to "yes").
5. For the parameter "EnableClaimedTasks":

• Set the value of this parameter to "no" to deactivate the function of the two buttons [Claim] and
[Release].
6. For the parameter "ReleaseDiscontinuedTasks":
• Set the value of this parameter to "no" to make sure the claimed worklist item remains claimed
although the review of this task was interrupted.
7. For the parameter "ReleaseCompletedTasks":
•Set the value of this parameter to "no" to make sure the claimed worklist item remains claimed
after the review of this task has been completed.
626
5 Verification
2. Select the "Worklist" view in the Patient Manager in the MammoWorkstation (respectively Mammo
Documentation Station).
3. Check if the two buttons are activated or deactivated.
deactivated activated
4. Check if a selected claimed worklist tasks remains claimed although the review is interrupted.
5. Check if a selected claimed worklist tasks remains claimed after the review (e.g. First Reading) has
been completed.
627
This page is blank.
628
Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis Mask Specific Configuration
Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis Mask Specific Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to Mammo Documentation Station.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
These configuration options allow the display of two additional sections in the Anamnesis mask.
The additional sections are:
1. Country settings
The additional section will look like the following:
2. Confirmation Checkboxes
The additional section will look like the following:
4 Procedure
4-1 Procedure for Section "Country Settings"
3. Edit the ReportTemplates.netdoktor.xml
629
• Look for the xml sections

a. <templateList name="CountryOfOrigion" shceme="DCM" code="121046"
defaultId="1">
[...]
</templateList>
b. <templateList name="LanguageOfReport" shceme="DCM" code="121045"

defaultId="1">
[...]
</templateList>
• Copy the two xml sections (press Ctrl+C).
Copy
these
sections
• Go back to the Configuration Folder.

• Edit the ReportTemplates.std.xml
• Paste (press Ctrl+V) the two copied xml section in the ReportTemplates.std.xml.
Note:
Make sure that the insertion is not inside any existing
<tempateList name="...>[…]</templateList> definition
630
Note:
Paste the indicated xml sections within the xml section
<reportTemplates>
[...]
</reportTemplates>
• Click on [Save] to save your applied modifications.
• After the applied modifications, restart the ApacheTomcat Service.
4-2 Procedure for Section "Confirmation Checkboxes

3. Edit the ReportTemplates.std.xml
• Look for the xml tag

<maskGuiElement name="anamnesisConfirmationGroup" visible="no"/>
• To enable the display of the Confirmation Checkboxes, set the attribute of "visible" to "yes".
• Click on [Save] to save the applied modification.
• After the applied modifications, restart the ApacheTomcat Service.
5 Verification
2. Open an Anamnesis task.
3. Check the Anamnesis mask for the following two sections:
631
This page is blank.
632
Job Card CFG C70 - Reporting Mask Specific Configuration
Job Card CFG C70 - Reporting Mask Specific Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
This configuration option is optional.
These configuration options allow the display of four additional functions in the Reporting mask.
These additional functions are:
• the Re- Invitation function
➜ pressing the [Additional appointment due to clinical signs and symptoms] button shall ensure that
the patient gets an additional appointment straight ahead.
• the Fast Track function
➜ pressing the [Fast Track] button allows the physician to cut the screening process short e.g. when
the physician has proof enough for his decision.
• the High Priority function
➜ selecting the [High Priority] button flags all following tasks related to this exam as "High Priority".
This allows the user to easily identify important tasks.
Note:
This feature is available only in combination with a Collaboration Server license.
• the Next Round dialog
➜ via the pull down menu "Next Round", the physician can
- indicate what kind of further examination is needed for one given patient.
- specify the treatment for the next screening appointment for one given patient.
4 Procedure
3. Edit the ReportTemplates.std.xml

<maskGuiElement name="reInvitationButton" visible="no"/>
➜ to enable this function, set the attribute "visible" to "yes".
633

<maskGuiElement name="fastTrackButton" visible="no"/>
<maskGuiElement name="highPriorityButton" visible="no"/>
<maskGuiElement name="nextRoundFrame" visible="no"/>
5 Verification
2. Open an exam.
634
3. Check the Reporting mask for the availability of the four new functions:
635
This page is blank.
636
Job Card CFG C76 - In-image Reporting
Job Card CFG C76 - In-image Reporting Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
These configuration options are optional. They allow the display of additional features in the in-image
reporting pop-up window.
The additional features enabled by this procedure are:
1. Biopsy - if a biopsy is available, allows the user to select its type and classification.
2. Nuclear spin - option to select its type and classification.
3. Recommendation - if more investigation is necessary, the user can recommend a US, MR, biopsy,
etc.
1
2
4. For the configuration of the Additional images feature, go to Chapter 9 Job Card CFG M74 -
Additional Images.
4 Procedure
3. Edit the ReportTemplates.std.xml:
4. Look for the xml tag:

<recommendationsInScreening enable="no" />
➜ set the attribute to "yes".
637
5. When modifications are made, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
5 Verification

2. Open an exam in a worklist.
3. Drag and drop a finding from the below options onto the image:
638
4. In the pop-up window, check if the Additional Images has an active drop-down menu:
639
This page is blank.
640
Job Card CFG M74 - Additional Images
Job Card CFG M74 - Additional Images Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
Note:
This feature is available only in combination with a Collaboration Server license.
This configuration option is optional.

This function enables the user to choose the type of image that should be displayed in the Structured
Report along with a certain finding.The options are displayed in a drop-down menu:
Note:
This function is available only for the cases included on a worklist.
4 Procedure
3. Edit the ReportTemplates.< >.xml, e.g. ReportTemplates.std.xml
4. Look for the xml tag

<reportTemplates>
➜ under this tag, paste the following strings:
641
<templateList name="AdditionalImagingView" scheme="99IDI" code="I-

X992900" defaultId="0">
<template ID="1" scheme="99IDI" code="RPX" />
<template ID="2" scheme="99IDI" code="RMX" />
<template ID="3" scheme="99IDI" code="RCC" />
<template ID="4" scheme="99IDI" code="RML" />
<template ID="5" scheme="99IDI" code="RMLO" />
<template ID="6" scheme="99IDI" code="LPX" />
<template ID="7" scheme="99IDI" code="LMX" />
<template ID="8" scheme="99IDI" code="LCC" />
<template ID="9" scheme="99IDI" code="LML" />
<template ID="10" scheme="99IDI" code="LMLO" />
</templateList>
! Notice:
Make sure that the xml tag <recommendationsInScreening enable> is also set to "yes".
This step enables the pop-window of the finding and is explained in the Job Card CFG C76 - In-
image Reporting on page 637.
5. When modifications are made, restart the Apache Tomcat Server.
5 Verification
2. Open an exam in a worklist.
3. Drag and drop a finding from the below options onto the image:
642
4. In the pop-up window, check if the Additional Images has an active drop-down menu:
643
This page is blank.
644
Job Card CFG M71 - Hierarchical Menu for Predefined Text Blocks
Job Card CFG M71 - Hierarchical Menu for Predefined Text Blocks Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
This configuration option is optional. This option allows a hierarchical display of a patient’s additional
information, which is visible in the Reporting mask - Additional Documentation - the pull-down menu
Insert text module.
Pull-down menu with simple text blocks
Pull-down menu with hierarchical text blocks
Note:
The hierarchical text block can be inserted only if at least one text module is already present in the
Additional Documentation.
4 Procedure
3. Edit the ReportUserText.en.xml
• Under node <templateList name="Comment">, add the following text after any </template> tag:
645
Job Card CFG M71 - Hierarchical Menu for Predefined Text Blocks
<subitem title="sublist 1" ID="100">
<template title="Title2" ID="101">Text1</template>
<subitem title="sublist 2" ID="102">
<template title="Title2" ID="103">Text2</template>
</subitem>
</subitem>
• Select the corresponding operating system and [Save].
Note:
Once a text block is inserted, the Edit feature is no longer available on the MWS/MDS, so it can
only be edited on the Support Interface:
3. Click on the file ReportUserText.en.xml
4. Edit the desired section.
• Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
5 Verification
1. Exit and re-login to the MammoWorkstation.
2. Open an exam.
3. Check the Reporting mask and click on the Insert text module to check for the hierarchical menu for
predefined text blocks.
646
Job Card CFG C77 - Configuration of V-Preview
Job Card CFG C77 - Configuration of V-Preview Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all IDI Systems, which receive DBT RAW projections.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
Starting with 4.7.0, certain values related to the calculation of the synthetic 2D-like image are
configurable.
4 Create V-Preview images

1. Go to the Routing tab in the Configuration.
2. Selecting the Create V-Preview checkbox, activates the creation of V-Preview images for all
incoming DBT RAW images.
5 Configuration
647
Job Card CFG C77 - Configuration of V-Preview
• V-preview for diagnosis: This is a value set by the system, if a valid V-Preview extended functionality
license is activated. If the value is "0" no valid license is activated
Note:
Do not change this value manually!
Below is an exemplary value, it will vary from system to system.
<v_preview_for_diagnosis description="V-Preview for
diagnosis">b19b03880283867024ca1e023bd44114</v_preview_for_diagnosis>
• Maximum Number of DBT Volume Preview Threads: this value indicates how many parallel image
calculation threads are possible.
Note:
A much higher value than the standard could lower the performance of the system.
<volume_preview_threads description="Max Number of DBT Volume Preview Threads"
>4</volume_preview_threads>
• Volume Preview Binary: this tag should not be configured!

<volume_preview_bin pathtype="relative" description="DBT Volume Preview Binary"
>CadServer\VolumePreviewApp.exe</volume_preview_bin>
648
Job Card CFG C84 - Configuration of V-Preview labeling
Job Card CFG C84 - Configuration of V-Preview labeling Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies if V-Preview images are displayed on MWS and MDS.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
Starting with 4.7.0 V-Preview license release, certain values related to the V-Preview Image label are
configurable.
4 Procedure
Configuration options to burn a label in the image can be set in the configuration file
VPreviewConfig.xml, located in the “%IDI_HOME%\config\” folder.
2. Edit the VPreviewConf.xml.
3. Following screenshot shows the various options that can be configured to change the image label
properties.
• Enable Volume Preview (V-preview) labeling: when set to 1, this tag activates burning the defined
label onto the images. When it is set to 0, no label is added to the images.
Note:
The default value is 0.
• Text: Label text to be burnt into the V-Preview image pixel matrix. Default value is “V-Preview”.
• X offset: Label position X-offset from breast nipple, defined in percentage of the image width. Value
shall be between 0 – 100.
Note:
649
Job Card CFG C84 - Configuration of V-Preview labeling
Note:
If the estimated label X-coordinate is outside image boundaries, then the X-coordinate is adjusted.
• Y offset: Label position Y-offset from image top, defined in percentage of the image height. Value
shall be between 0 – 100.
Note:
Note:
If the estimated label Y-coordinate is outside image boundaries, then the Y-coordinate is adjusted.
• Font family: Font type to be used when burning the label to the image pixels matrix.
Note:
If the font is not found, system default font will be used to burn the label.
• Font size: Font size to be used when burning the label to the image pixels matrix.
Note:
• Gray level: Gray value to be used when burning the label to the image pixel matrix. Value shall be in
between 0 – 212-1 as the V-Preview image is a 12-bit image. Lowest value (0) is interpreted as black,
and highest value (4095) is interpreted as bright gray.
Note:
650
Job Card CFG C83 - Hanging Protocol Configuration
Job Card CFG C83 - Hanging Protocol Configuration Chapter 9
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Overview
The settings described in this job card affect the order in which the images will be displayed on the
viewports.
4 Grouping Images by Type

For viewing purposes, mammography images of similar types are grouped as one type. By default, they
are organized in the following order:
CC-like{CC,FB,XCC,XCCL,XCCM};MLO-like{MLO,LMO,SIO};ML-like{ML,LM}
For moving an image type to a different group or changing the order in which the groups are viewed,
proceed as follows:
4. Look for the section [ViewTagConfig]:
5. Move an image type to another group as desired. The order of the groups can also be changed.
Example:
ViewPosGroups = MLO-like{MLO,LMO,SIO,ML,LM};ML-like{};CC-like{CC,FB,XCC,XCCL,XCCM}
6. Save the file and restart the Apache Tomcat service.
651
Note:
If any of the groups or image types are missing, then the default order and grouping will be
assumed. Example of missing parameters:
ViewPosGroups = CC-like{CC};MLO-like{MLO};ML-like{ML,LM}
5 Pinning Images to a Viewport

Certain images can be configured to be pinned to their viewports. This helps the user to compare them
with their corresponding prior images. To pin one or more images to a certain viewport, do the following:
3. Edit the HangingProtocolConfig.xml.
4. Go to the protocol name where you want to pin a viewport (in example below, Standard Flipped is
changed):
5. Change the value "allowed" to "fixed" for the viewports where images should be pinned.
652
6. Save the file and restart the Apache Tomcat service.
Note:
The same configuration can be done by the user from the software interface. This change (made
by editing the Hanging Protocol), will override the configuration done in the
HangingProtocolConfig.xml file.
653
This page is blank.
654
Job Card CFG C79 - The Clunie Dicom Cleaner
Job Card CFG C79 - The Clunie Dicom Cleaner Chapter 9
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all systems.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Overview
Dicom Cleaner is an open source tool for anonymization of the image data based on DICOM standard.
This tool is provided by David A. Clunie as an open source software. The Dicom Cleaner keeps the
CESM private tag where dose is registered and it can erase the burnt-in annotations, such as the patient
name.
WARNING
It is the user’s responsibility to check if this tool complies with the local data privacy rules and
regulations.
4 Known Limitations
The following limitations need to be considered when using Dicom Cleaner with GE Healthcare products:
• Several modalities cannot be anonymized by using this tool due to technical contradictions and
requirements, e.g. the following:
- Read-only encapsulated PDF files.
- Backlight images cannot be exported by MWS.
- SR/PR documents, due to missing references.
• The acquisition date is not deleted by Dicom Cleaner and still remains in the patient data.
• The image order in the Image Folder is changed because of deleted data links. Prior images cannot
be separated from current images, duplicates are not aligned with their original image anymore.
Note:
Further limitations can occur due to certain selected options in the Dicom Cleaner’s anonymization
process. Please make sure that the anonymization options used are based on the regional
products and requirements.
5 How to Access It
The tool is available at the following location, along with relevant information:
http://www.dclunie.com/pixelmed/software/webstart/DicomCleanerUsage.html
Scroll down to the bottom of the page, section How to install it (locally), and choose the appropriate
software version. The following versions are available:
• Windows with Java installation
655
• Windows without Java (requires an installed version of Java 1.5 or later)

• MacOS without Java (requires an installed version of Java 1.5 or later)
6 Installation
To install and use the software properly, proceed as follows:
1. Unzip the downloaded software package to a custom folder.
2. Double-click the file DicomCleaner.bat in the unzipped folder.
3. Dicom Cleaner starts up and is available in a few seconds.
7 Typical Use Cases

Note:
Please keep in mind that the Dicom Cleaner anonymization options have to be chosen based on
regional requirements and cannot be generalized.
Always use this tool directly on the system where the DICOM-files are originated from.
7-1 Local Data Import/ Export

If local folders of image data are available, Dicom Cleaner offers a function to import data, anonymize
and export them afterwards for further usage.
Note:
For ease of use, it is recommended to store the patient data in a temporary folder.
• Open the Dicom Cleaner and click on [Import].
• From the pop-up window, choose your temporary data folder with image files to be anonymized. Click
on [Open].
656
• Dicom Cleaner Log window displays the progress of the action. After finishing the import process, the
image data are available in the central area Original.
Note:
After the anonymization process (see section 7-3), the anonymized data are available in the
Cleaned section.
• Select the data and click on [Export].
• Choose a custom folder where to export data in the popup window and click on [Open].
• The data will be exported to the chosen folder. Progress is displayed in the DICOM Cleaner Log
window as well as in the status bar at the bottom of the main window.
7-2 Using PACS Data

• To configure a PACS for remote DICOM retrieval, click on [Configure] in main window.
657
• Define AE_Title of the used MWS and click [Add] to configure a PACS additionally.
• In the popup window define the settings for the used PACS and click [OK].
• Click [Done] to end the configuration dialog.
• In the “Query”-line of the main window type in a Patient’s Name, Patient’s ID or Study Date. The full
and exact name, ID and date have to be entered.
• Click on [Query], choose PACS as remote system and click [OK]. Search results will be listed in
the left panel of the main window.
• Select a search result and click on [Retrieve] to prefetch data to Dicom Cleaner. Selected cases
appear in the central area Original.
7-3 Anonymization of MG Data with Customized Options

Usual MG DICOM data can be anonymized with several options to be en- or dis-abled. These options
define the degree of anonymization. After setting the necessary options and defining strings such as a
new “Patient’s name”, the process can be started by clicking on [Clean]. Afterwards the processed
data appear in the Cleaned area.
Note:
Please be aware of the information provided in section 4 Known Limitations.
Recommended settings:
658
The following settings are recommended for a regular data anonymization:
Note:
Make sure to uncheck the “Remove unsafe private attributes” in order to keep the dose values for
CESM images.
7-4 Blackout of Burnt-in Annotations (e.g., ultrasound or MR Images)

Modalities such as CT images can contain simple strings painted directly on the image. They cannot be
anonymized by changing the DICOM data, so a blackout box will be placed over the information included
in the image. Dicom Cleaner offers the possibility to blackout one image or complete image stacks at a
time.
• To enter blackout mode, anonymize a series with several US images and select them.
• Click on [Blackout] and a new popup window displays the first image.
• With the right mouse button draw a rectangle on the image that would cover the unwanted
annotations.
Note:
The rectangle drawn on the first image will apply to rest of the images in the selected image stack.
• Images can be displayed one by one by clicking on [Next].
• The changes can be saved by clicking on [Apply].
659
8 License Conditions
Please note that Dicom Cleaner is provided by its author as an open source software and it is not
property of GE Healthcare Image Diagnost. Thus the license agreement, which can be found here: http:/
/www.dclunie.com/pixelmed/software/COPYRIGHT, has to be accepted by each user.
660
Upgrade
Chapter 10 Upgrade
1 Overview
This chapter contains all information necessary to upgrade all IDI products.
In order to minimize the downtime of the workflow, it is recommended to use the following sequence for
the upgrade procedure:
1. Upgrade Collaboration Server.
2. Upgrade each DICOM Shuttle.
3. Upgrade each MDS.
4. Upgrade each MWS.
Note:
For each IDI-node, a new license shall be requested before the upgrade is started.
New license is not needed to perform the upgrade but needed to hand over system to the
customer.
2 Scenario UPG00A - MammoWorkstation Upgrade Steering Guide for

Versions 4.5.0 and Below
Note:
It is not possible to upgrade a version 4.5.0 or prior to version 4.6.1 or higher. Following the steps
below you will uninstall your existing version, perform a 4.7.0 plain installation and re-apply all
configuration settings. There is no way to transfer the configuration or the database.
Note:
For further support, please contact the next GE service level.

1. Backup your MySQL database Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade 1FE NA
Preparation on page 677 -
section 3-2 Backup 4.5.x / 4.6.0 MySQL
Database
2. Make screenshots of all NA 1FE 20’
configuration tabs in
MammoWorkstation - Settings
3. Backup the configuration Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration 1FE 15’
folders Folder on page 479
4. Uninstall the software Job Card UIST A01 - IDI Applications 1FE 20’
Uninstallation on page 875
5. Reboot the computer NA 1FE NA
6. Install the software version - Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation 1FE NA
4.7.0 from scratch on page 197
- Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing
on page 213
7. Re-apply all necessary Please follow the Steering Guide to apply all 1FE NA
configurations necessary configurations: Installation on
page 81.
Final sequence: required to complete the upgrade
661 Chapter 10
Upgrade

8. Acceptance Test Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on 1FE 20’
page 473
3 Scenario UPG01A - MammoWorkstation Upgrade Steering Guide for

Versions 4.5.2 and Higher
Note:
Before going on site, the FE must check the following job cards:
- Job Card UPG C01 - Check Customized Configuration on page 665,
- Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade Preparation on page 677 and
- Job Card UPG A03 - License Request on page 675.
A remote connection is recommended for reviewing the above-mentioned job cards.
Note:
If the system to be updated uses a customized workflow, it is the responsibility of the FE to organize
an appointment with the next GE service level before the FE goes on site.

1. Check customized Job Card UPG C01 - Check Customized 1FE 30’
configuration Configuration on page 665
1. Backup and preparation Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade 1FE 20’
Preparation on page 677
2. Request license Job Card UPG A03 - License Request on 1FE 10’
page 675
Note:
After a v.4.7.0 update on systems with MacroWorks II, the keypad configuration will not be
available anymore. For this reason, do the following:
- write down the configuration of all buttons;
- uninstall MacroWorks II;
- install MacroWorks III;
- reconfigure the buttons of the keypad.
3. Upgrade IDI application Job Card UPG A05 - Software Upgrade to 4.7.0 1FE 20’
on page 681
4. Backup of the configuration Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration 1FE 15’
folder Folder on page 479
5. Post-Upgrade checks Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks on 1FE 10’
page 687
6. Hologic Setting Job Card UPG C10 - Check Hologic Settings on 1FE 15’
page 729
Final sequence: required to complete the upgrade
Chapter 10 662
Upgrade

7. Acceptance Test Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on 1FE 20’
page 473
663 Chapter 10
Upgrade
This page is blank.
Chapter 10 664
Job Card UPG C01 - Check Customized Configuration
Job Card UPG C01 - Check Customized Configuration Chapter 10
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 30’
3 Introduction
Configuration applied beyond the Graphical User Interface will not automatically be transferred during
the upgrade procedure. Therefore, before performing an upgrade, check if the files mentioned in the
following section contain any customized settings.
4 Changes in Non-customizable Configuration Files

Several configuration files and folders should not be customized.
If these configuration files have been customized in spite of this recommendation, contact the next GE
service level for assistance.
How to Check if Configuration Files Were Customized:

1. Navigate to
C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost\config
2. In the config folder expand the drop down menu Views.
3. Select Details.
4. Check the column Date Modified for the following configuration files:
- ReportContentDict<>.xml
- ReportTemplates<>.xml
- ReportTextConfig<>.xml
- SR2HL7_Message_Configuration.dtd
- SR2HL7_GE_Centricity_RIsi_4_2.xml
- SR2HL7_MIA.xml
- SR2HL7_Ravenna.xml
- SR2HL7_Omnicon.xml
- SrServiceConf.xml
5. Check if the configuration files were modified by comparing the date indicated under Date Modified
to the date of the initial installation.
Note:
If the date indicated under Date Modified does not correspond to the date of the initial installation,
the configuration files were modified.
6. If the configuration files were modified, send the modified configuration files to next GE service level.
665
5 Upgrade Files Overview
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
Table legend:
Create the file did not exist for the version and is created after upgrade.
Keep the file is kept as is during the upgrade process.
Update the file is updated, but the configured parameters are not changed.
Replace the file is entirely replaced; the configuration needs to be saved before and reapplied after the upgrade.
Convert the file is newly created with the upgrade, using obsolete files or sections from different files.
Installer Actions on Upgrade from:
Configuration File 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6.0 4.61 4.7.0 4.7.0 4.7.0 Required Action
(builds (build (build (only when file is REPLACED):
363 and 370) 374)
359)
AnnotationConfig.xml Create Create Create Keep Update Keep Keep -

666
cadlog.config.pattern.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
next GE service level.
cadlog.config.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
CcConf.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Update Update Update -
CcLog4J.properties Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ClearCanvasAdapterConf. Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep Job Card CFG C58 - ClearCanvas
xml Adapter Configuration on page 579
ClearCanvasAdapterLog4j Create Create Create Replace Replace Replace Replace -
.properties
5338446-12-8EN
CommandLineAdapterCon Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
f.xml
Revision 1
CommandLineAdapterLog Create Create Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
4j.properties next GE service level.
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
comparelog.config.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
custom_Ravenna Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
Dcm2XdtDefinitions.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT
Export of Imaging Parameter on
page 547
DICOM_TAG_MODE.xml Replace Replace Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Contact the next GE service level.
EFilmAdapterConf.xml Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
EFilmAdapterLog4j.propert Create Create Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ies next GE service level.
667
FileDropAdapterConf.xml Create Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep -

FileDropAdapterLog4j.pro Create Create Create Create Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
perties next GE service level.
GEPACSAdapterConf.xml Create Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep -
GEPACSAdapterLog4j.pro Create Create Create Create Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
perties next GE service level.
GlobalConfig.ini Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
HangingProtocolConfig.xm Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -

l
HangingProtocolConfig_C Create Create Create Create Create Create Create -
5338446-12-8EN
ESM.xml
HDR.lut Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
Revision 1
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
HDR_inv.lut Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
IDDakotaService.xml Create Create Create Create Create Create Create -
IDReceiveSCP.log.config. Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
xml next GE service level.
IDReceiveSCP.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
IDWorklistSCP.log.config.x Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ml next GE service level.
IDWorklistSCP.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Update Keep -
ImageTypeConfig.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Tips on page 843
668
IppCodecConfig.xml Create Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep -
link_models Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
log.config.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
log4j.dtd Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
MammoCad.ini Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
MammoCad-config.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
5338446-12-8EN
MammoWorkstation.ini Keep Keep Keep Keep Update Update Keep -
Revision 1
mass_models Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
MRSAdapterConf.xml Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep -
MRSAdapterLog4j.properti Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
es next GE service level.
MWSTrayConf.xml Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C30 - External
Adapter Configuration on page 507
MWSTrayLog4J.properties Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
Overlays.xml Convert Convert Convert Convert Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
PartnerConfig.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -

669
PdfReportConfiguration.dt Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
d next GE service level.

PdfReportConfiguration.x Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep -
ml
postgresql Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
preprocessing Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
PrinterDefaults.xml Replace Keep Keep Keep Update Keep Keep Job Card CFG C22 - DICOM Printer
Configuration on page 453
RemoteControlServerConf Create Create Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ig.xml next GE service level.
5338446-12-8EN
RemoteServiceConf.xml Create Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
Revision 1
RemoteServiceLog4J.prop Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
erties next GE service level.
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
ReportContentDict.da.xml Create Create Create Create Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ReportContentDict.<LL>.x Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ReportHospitalLogo.jpg Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
ReportTemplates.<LL>.xm Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG M74 - Additional
l Images on page 641.
Contact the next GE service level.
ReportTemplates.kurativ.x Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
670
ReportTemplates.mamma Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
soft.xml next GE service level.
ReportTemplates.masc.xm Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
l next GE service level.
ReportTemplates.masc2.x Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ReportTemplates.netdokto Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis
r.xml Mask Specific Configuration on
page 629
5338446-12-8EN
Revision 1
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
ReportTemplates.std.xml Replace Replace Replace Keep Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C73 - Consensus
Reading on page 495;
Job Card CFG C68 - Anamnesis
Mask Specific Configuration on
page 629;
Job Card CFG C70 - Reporting
Mask Specific Configuration on
page 633;
Job Card CFG C76 - In-image
ReportTextConfig.da.xml Create Create Create Create Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on
page 487
- Reconfigure if Reporting is
customized.
671

ReportTextConfig.<LL>.x Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on
ml page 487
- Reconfigure if Reporting is
customized.
ReportTextConfig.dtd Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ReportTextConfig.<LL>.x Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Job Card CFG C33 - PDF Export on
ml page 487
ReportUserText.it.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
5338446-12-8EN
ReportUserText.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
RISICAdapterConf.xml Create Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep -
Revision 1
RISICAdapterLog4j.proper Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
ties next GE service level.
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
SR2HL7_GE_Centricity_RI Replace Replace Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Reconfigure if HL7 export is
Si_4_2.xml customized.
SR2HL7_Message_Config Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
uration.dtd next GE service level.
SR2HL7_MIA.xml Replace Replace Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Reconfigure if HL7 export is
customized.
SR2HL7_Omnicom.xml Replace Replace Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Reconfigure if HL7 export is
customized.
SR2HL7_Ravenna.xml Replace Replace Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Reconfigure if HL7 export is
672
customized.
SrServiceConf.xml Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Contact the next GE service level.
SrServiceLog4J.properties Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
supportinterface.conf Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
transform Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
UrlAdapterConf.xml Create Create Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
5338446-12-8EN
UrlAdapterLog4j.properties next GE service level.
Revision 1
VPreviewConf.xml Create Create Create Create Create Create Create
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Job Card CFG C60 - Configuration
of MRS Adapter on page 589;
Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts
Creation for the IDI Application on
page 385;
Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export
WfConf.xml Configuration on page 461
Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace If it is customized, then contact the
WfLog4J.properties next GE service level.
WindowLevelConfig.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Update Keep Keep -
Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Job Card CFG C04 - User Accounts
Creation for the IDI Application on
673
page 385;

Job Card CFG C32 - HL7 Export
Configuration on page 461;
Job Card CFG C34 - Unscheduled
Reporting Configuration on
WorklistDefinitions.de.xml page 465
WorklistDefinitions.en.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -
Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
WorklistDefinitions.xml next GE service level.
WorklistDefinitions_Mamma Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
Soft.xml
5338446-12-8EN
WorklistDefinitions_MaSc.x
ml
Revision 1
WorklistDefinitions_MaSc2. Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
xml
Service Manual
MammoWorkstation
363 and 370) 374)
359)
WorklistDefinitions_Netdok. Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
xml
WorklistDefinitions_NL.xml next GE service level.
WorklistDefinitions_XDT.xm Replace Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep If it is customized, then contact the
l
Xdt2DicomDefinitions.xml Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep Keep -

674
5338446-12-8EN
Revision 1
Job Card UPG A03 - License Request
Job Card UPG A03 - License Request Chapter 10
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
• IDI Software DVD v4.7.0
4 License Request
For every upgrade a new license needs to be requested to ensure the tracking of installed base and to
check the license-configuration.
Note:
Use the instructions in Job Card IST A13 - IDI Application Licensing on page 213 for the request.
4-1 Create a New Installation Code

To create a new Installation code, refer to Job Card IST A54 - Pre-installation License Request on
page 193.
675
Job Card UPG A03 - License Request
This page is blank.
676
Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade Preparation
Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade Preparation Chapter 10
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Backup
Go to:
- 3-1 Backup v4.5.x / v4.6.x Configuration
- 3-2 Backup 4.5.x / 4.6.0 MySQL Database
- 3-3 Backup for v.4.7.0 or Newer
3-1 Backup v4.5.x / v4.6.x Configuration

1. Open the Windows Explorer and go to the data hard disk (e.g. Data Disc D:).
2. Create a new folder named YYYYMMDD_IDI_Backup (e.g. 20130424_IDI_Backup).
3. In this folder create a second folder v_4.x.x (e.g. IDI_v.4.6.1).
4. Go to the ImageDiagnost folder: C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost
5. Press the Control button [Ctrl] and select the folders config and CadServer in:
C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost as shown in the following image.
6. Right click on the config folder.
7. Select Copy.
8. Go to the created path D:\YYYYMMDD_IDI_Backup\IDI_v4.x.x.

9. Right click ➜ select Paste.
Expected result: The folders config and CadServer were copied.
677
3-2 Backup 4.5.x / 4.6.0 MySQL Database

There are two databases that hold all the relevant information:
- Database "workflow"
- Database "test_cache"
It is therefore advisable to create a backup of the database before performing any tasks that might pose
a risk.
1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type "cmd" and click [OK].
2. Type c: and hit [Enter] to change to the c drive.
3. Type cd c:\mysql\bin and hit [Enter] to change directory to the folder where all the mysql tools
are stored.
Example:
1. Type:
mysqldump –u root –h localhost –-opt test_cache > d:\backup_test_cache.sql
Note:
“D:\” stands for the data hard disk. If your data hard disk is named differently, change the “D:\”
element according to your data hard disk.
Note:
If you are using an MDS, only one hard disk might be available.
2. Hit [Enter].
3. Continue with:
mysqldump –u root –h localhost –-opt workflow > d:\backup_workflow.sql
WARNING
Be careful! The dataset can be destroyed if you use the wrong sign!
! Notice:
The less-than sign [<] or greater-than sign [>] indicates in which direction the information flow
takes place: [<] into the database; [>] out of the database.
4. Hit [Enter].
The above executed actions will extract the content of the two databases "workflow" and "test_cache"
and store it into a text file named "backup_workflow.sql" and "backup_test_cache.sql". For creating a
PostGreSQL database backup, go to Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup on page 737.
5. Validate backup:
678
To verify the result, navigate to the directory where the database backup files have been stored on
hard disk D:
Note:
If you are using a MDS, only one hard disk might be available.
6. Press the Control button [Ctrl] and select the files "backup_test_cache.sql" and
"backup_workflow.sql".
7. Select Copy.
8. Go to the created path D:\YYYYMMDD_IDI_Backup\IDI_v4.x.x.
9. Right click ➜ select Paste.
3-3 Backup for v.4.7.0 or Newer

Follow Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade Preparation to back up the database and the
configuration.
4 Check Port Availability

The following ports did not exist in versions 4.6.0 and older. If you are upgrading from v. 4.6.0 or older,
you need to check if the following ports are now available:
9090 Used for:

Internal remote control server (not configurable)
59717 Used for:

Internal cache message server (not configurable)
27778 Used for:

PostgreSQL Database
To check if a port is already in use and which program is using it, do the following:
1. Go to Windows Start and open the Run command:
679
2. Type: cmd
3. On the Command Prompt window, type:

netstat → ano|find ”PortNumber“ (e.g., netstat –ano|find “9090“ - see 1 in screenshot
below).
- if no result is returned (1), then the port is not in use and is available for the internal remote
control server;
- if the port is already in use, a result similar to the one in section (2) of the screenshot below will be
displayed.
4. In order to find out which program is using the respective port, copy the first value in the column to
the right and run the following command (3):
tasklist|find „TaskNumber“ (e.g., tasklist|find ”1234“);
→ the port used in this example is used by Postgres.
680
Job Card UPG A05 - Software Upgrade to 4.7.0
Job Card UPG A05 - Software Upgrade to 4.7.0 Chapter 10
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’ up to 2 hours
• IDI Software DVD v4.7.0
4 IDI Application Installation

! Notice:
Do not install v4.7.0 before obtaining the new license.
1. Exit the application if running.
2. Run the Installer from the IDI Software DVD.
Note:
On Windows 7, always run the IDI software as administrator.
3. Click [Next>].
681
4. Accept the License Agreement by clicking [I Agree].
5. A message pops up informing you that a previous version has been detected.
Confirm this message by clicking [OK].
The software is being installed.
682
6. Wait for installation to be completed.
7. Click on [Show details] to follow the installation procedure details.

Note:
This step could take up to two hours, showing a frozen log screen.
8. The following message will be displayed.

IDDicomReceiveSCP service. This will require a restart at the end of the installation procedure.
b. For Windows 7: Click on [Yes] ➜ the system will retry to start the IDDicomReceiveSCP service.
683
Note:
If retrying to start the IDDicomReceiveSCP service was not successful, the warning will be
9. The following message will be displayed.

IDDicomWorklistSCP service. This will require a restart at the end of the installation procedure.
b. For Windows 7: Click on [Yes] ➜ the system will retry to start the IDDicomWorklistSCP service. If
retrying to start the IDDicomWorklistSCP service was not successful, the warning will be
10. Click [Finish] at the end of installation.
11. For Windows XP: the system has to be restarted.

For Windows 7: the system MUST be restarted in case the services IDDicomWorklistSCP and
IDDicomReceiveSCP could not be started during the upgrade procedure.
684
5 General Update Information

During the upgrade procedure, a backup of the prior installation and its configuration is automatically
created:
1. The existing folder %IDI_Home% is renamed.
2. A new folder %IDI_Home%\backup\YYYYMMDD_HHMM_ImageDiagnost_4.7.0. is created.
3. The existing installation will be moved into this newly created folder in the first steps of the upgrade
procedure.
5-1 Troubleshooting
Moving the existing installation to the newly created backup folder may fail.
The reason for this behaviour is that the existing installation folder contains files, which are locked by a
running process. In this case, the upgrade procedure will be aborted and the following message will be
displayed:
Cannot move from C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost to C:\Program Files
(x86)\ImageDiagnost\backup\YYYYMMDD_HHMM_ImageDiagnost_4.7.0.
685
Solution:
1. Remove the %IDI_Home%\backup\YYYYMMDD_HHMM_ImageDiagnost_4.7.0
2. Restart the MammoWorkstation.
3. Restart the Upgrade procedure.
6 New Database Technologies

Up to IDI software version 4.6.0, IDI used the MySQL 4.0.13 database. Starting with IDI software version
4.6.1, IDI uses the PostgreSQL database.
The existing MySQL database will not be deleted.
After migration of the database you should stop the MySql Service and configure it to not startup
automatically if you don’t need MySQL for any other purpose.
Important information regarding the new PostgreSQL database:

• PostgreSQL is automatically installed to: %IDI_Home%\thirdparty\PGSQL-9.1
• PostgreSQL datafiles are placed in: %IDI_Home%\dbdata
• The PostgreSQL service is named IDDatabase
The PostgreSQL service is listening on port 27778.
Note:
PostgreSQL is not using the default service name, the default port or the default folder, so there is
no interfering with an existing PostgreSQL installation.
If you are familiar with SQL, you can use pgAdmin III. To access pgAdmin III, go to: Start ➜
ImageDiagnost ➜ Tools ➜ pgAdmin.
686
Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks
Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks Chapter 10
1 Applicability
This job card applies to version 4.6.0 or older.
1 Field Engineer
Time:10’
3 Database Migration
As the database was moved from MySQL to Postgres SQL (with v.4.6.1), the database content needs to
be migrated. IDI provides an automated migration tool for the Workflow database.
Note:
There is no migration tool for the Cache database.
For re-importing the Cache, refer to Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import on page 727.
To migrate the Workflow database:

• Open Windows Explorer.
• Navigate to %IDI_Home%\thirdparty\PGSQL-9.1.
• Execute the IDImysql2postgres.exe and select [Next>].
687
• Keep the default parameters and select [Start>].
• Confirm the dialog by clicking [OK].
• Depending on the database size, the migration may take several hours.
! Notice:
Never stop this process even if the task is not reacting.
688
Note:
If you get the following migration error, refer to Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after
IDI Software Upgrade:
• Conform this message by clicking [OK].
• Check the log file written in this window before selecting [Next>].
689
• The database migration is finished.

Select [Finish] to exit the Migration setup.
Note:
After migration of the database you should stop the MySql Service and configure it to not startup
automatically if you don't need MySQL for any other purpose.
690
4 Obsolete Program Folder

Check that the "bin" program folder was deleted during the upgrade procedure.
Note:
This step is not applicable to upgrade procedure from software v.4.6.0.
1. Go to %IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation.
Expected result:
No bin folder is available.
2. If the bin folder still is available, delete the bin folder.

Note:
It is mandatory to delete this folder!
5 Multiple Icons Created

Due to the fact that MammoWorkstation is available as a 32-bit version and as a 64-bit version, several
multiple items might be created.
After the upgrade process, it is necessary to check that only the items that correspond to your installed
system are available.
5-1 MWS Items

After the upgrade process, there should only be one MWS desktop icon, MWS shortcut icon, one MWS
icon in the quick access area in the Windows taskbar and one MWS icon in the Start dialog.
If there are several MWS icons, make sure to delete the icons that do not correspond to your installed
system.
5-1-1 Delete MWS Desktop Icon

The two icons are:
- one 32 bit icon: MammoWorkstation
- one 64 bit icon: MammoWorkstation (x64)
Note:
Make sure to delete the icon that does not correspond to your installed system.
5-1-2 Delete MWS Shortcut Icon

The two icons are:
1. Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost
2. Right click on the icon you want to delete.
3. Select "Delete" in the opened dialog.
Note:
691
5-1-3 Delete MWS Quick Access Icon

The two icons are:
1. Expand the quick access bar (next to the [Start] button) by clicking on the "double greater-than sign".
2. Right click on the icon you want to delete and select "Delete".
Note:
5-1-4 Delete MWS Icon in the Start Dialog

The two icons are:
1. Click on [Start] ➜ a dialog window opens.
2. Right click on the Icon you want to delete and select "Remove from This List".
Note:
692
5-2 Program Folders

5-2-1 Program Folders on a 64-bit System:
During the upgrade process, two new program folders will be created.
- Program folder x64 ➜ program folder for the 64-bit version
- Program folder x86 ➜ program folder for the 32-bit version
5-2-2 Program Folders on a 32-bit System:

During the upgrade process, only one new program folder will be created.
Check that only one new program folder has been created.
Note:
If two program folders have been created, the program folder that does not correspond to your
installed system must be deleted.
Delete the program folder that does not correspond to your installed version:
1. Go to %IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation
2. Delete the x64 folder.
This is needed for

64-bit version
This is needed for

32-bit version
6 Perform a Cache Rebuild/re-import

• Starting with version 4.6.1, a rebuild is necessary: see Job Card DC A08 - Local Database
Rebuilding on page 739.
• For versions 4.6.0 and below, a re-import is necessary, as a migration from MySQL to PostGRE is
required. For details, see Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import on page 727.
Note:
Please be aware that depending on the size of the cache, the database rebuild/re-import can take
up to 10 hours.
During this time, the system must NOT be used!
693
Note:
If the following error occurs, refer to Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI
Software Upgrade:
7 Folder for Custom Files

To make sure to keep your proprietary files (e.g. batch files, sql files, notes, interface command files,
case collections, etc.) the setup automatically creates a folder named custom under: %IDI_Home%.
Please move all customized files / scripts to this folder and make sure to also change the links to the
moved files.
Note:
The creation of this folder is important to make sure to keep your proprietary files during the next
upgrade procedure. The folder %IDI_Home%\custom will be kept during the upgrade procedure.
694
Job Card UPG A13 - 8GB RAM Upgrade for Z800
Job Card UPG A13 - 8GB RAM Upgrade for Z800 Chapter 10
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS v. 4.6.1 and higher. This upgrade is used to show an unlimited number of
priors.
Note:
The RAM upgrade is optional and is not included in the standard delivery.
With this upgrade you add 8 GB RAM to the existing 8 GB of RAM.
Note:
One single RAM module 2GB has the FRU Part number 5394794-10.
1 Field Engineer
Time:15’’
• HP Workstation Z800 Base Unit
4 Overview
The Z800 is equipped with 12 memory slots, and the order in which the slots are filled with memory is
essential in the proper functioning of the device. The Z800 is initially equipped with a 8GB RAM, which
could be configured either with 8 slots of 1GB or 4 slots of 2 GB. The order in which slots will be filled for
the 8GB upgrade depends on this initial configuration and is explained in the following scenarios.
Note:
The installation of RAM is optional and is not included in the standard delivery.
5 Update Procedure
1. Safety precautions
WARNING
2. Access the memory slots
WARNING
695
components:
- by wearing an ESD wrist strap.
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to open the chassis and open the upper shutter (1) to access
the memory slots:
2. Remove the fan:
696
a. Click on the small green levers (1) + (2):
1 2
b. Gently remove the fan.

Note:
Look out for power cables connected to the fan.
3. General information on RAM installation

The Z800 provides 12 memory banks. The memory banks are numbered as follows:
1 2
7 8
3 4
697
1 2
9 10
5 6
11 12
The memory banks are filled with RAM modules in pairs from slot 1 to slot 12.
RAM modules must always be installed in pairs of equivalent capacity (e.g. 2 x 2GB).
Example:
The first RAM module pair goes in slots 1 and 2.
The second RAM module pair goes in slots 3 and 4.
The third RAM module pair MUST go in slots 5 and 6.
1 first set 2 first set

7 fourth set 8 fourth set
3 second set 4 second set
9 fifth set 10 fifth set
5 third set 6 third set
11 sixth set 12 sixth set
4. 8 GB RAM update on Z800 Scenario 1 (8 slots of 1GB)

Note:
This scenario is applicable if your Z800 has a default memory of 8 slots of 1GB modules.
A. The memory slots are occupied as follows:
Free slot Free slot
Free slot Free slot
The following table indicating the current map corresponds to the above picture:
Note:
The basic memory for Z800 is made of 8 slots of 1GB modules.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 16 GB (8 slots of 1GB standard + 4 slots of 2GB
upgrade).
698
For optional update memory use sets of 2GB modules.
1 1 GB 2 1 GB
7 1 GB 8 1 GB
3 1 GB 4 1 GB
9 free for add-on 2GB 10 free for add-on 2GB
5 1 GB 6 1 GB
WARNING
Do not use outsourced memory modules that could lead to malfunction of the MammoWorksta-
tion.
B. Install the memory modules in valid configurations:

• Install the RAM update in slots 9, 10, 11 or 12.
! Notice:
Memory modules must be installed in pairs.
- Each pair must be composed of equivalent capacity modules (i.e.: 2 x 2GB).
- Install the memory module pairs in order of size, from smallest to largest.
! Notice:
The BIOS generates warnings/errors on invalid memory configurations. Refer to HP Workstation
Z800 Base Unit Service Manual for diagnostic codes and error beeps meanings.
5. 8 GB RAM update on Z800 Scenario 2 (4 slots of 2GB)

Note:
This scenario is applicable if your Z800 has a default memory of 4 slots of 2GB modules.
A. The memory slots are occupied as follows:
Slot 1 Slot 2
Slot 3 Slot 4
699
The following table indicating the current map corresponds to the above picture:
Note:
Basic memory for Z800 is made of 4 slots of 2GB modules.
Maximum memory configuration supported is 16 GB (4 slots of 2GB standard + 4 slots of 2GB
upgrade).
For optional update memory use sets of 2GB modules:
1 2 GB 2 2 GB
7 free - possible add-on 2GB 8 free - possible add-on 2GB
3 2 GB 4 2 GB
9 free 10 free
11 free 12 free
WARNING
Do not use outsourced memory modules that could lead to malfunction of the
MammoWorkstation.
A. Install the memory modules in valid configurations:
- Install the RAM update in slots 5, 6, 7 or 8.
! Notice:
Memory modules must be installed in pairs.
- Each pair must be composed of equivalent capacity modules (i.e.: 2x 2GB).
- Install the memory module pairs in order of size, from smallest to largest.
Note:
700
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MammoWorkstation used with DBT.
Note:
The RAM upgrade is optional and is not included in the standard delivery.
With this upgrade you replace the existing RAM with 32 GB of new RAM modules
Note:
One single RAM module 4GB has the FRU Part number 5394794-11.
1 Field Engineer
Time:15’’
WARNING
5 Access the Memory Slots
WARNING
components:
- by touching either the power supply or the outside frame of the PC;
701
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to open the chassis and open the upper shutter (1) to access the
memory slots.
2. Remove the fan:

a. Click on the small green levers (1) +(2).
1 2
702
b. Gently remove the fan.

Note:
6 General Information on RAM Upgrade

The Z800 provides 12 memory banks. The memory banks are numbered as follows:
1 2
7 8
3 4
9 10
5 6
11 12
- The 32 GB RAM upgrade consists in a 8 slots of 4GB configuration.

- The memory banks are to be filled with RAM modules in pairs from slot 1 to slot 12.
- The memory module pairs must always be installed in order of size, from smallest to largest.
- RAM modules must always be installed in pairs of equivalent capacity (e.g. 2 x 2GB).
Example:
The first RAM module pair goes in slots 1 and 2.
The second RAM module pair goes in slots 3 and 4.
The third RAM module pair MUST go in slots 5 and 6.
1 first set 2 first set

7 fourth set 8 fourth set
3 second set 4 second set
9 fifth set 10 fifth set
5 third set 6 third set
11 sixth set 12 sixth set
703
7 RAM Upgrade Procedure

Note:
The native memory installed on the Z800 can be either of 8 slots of 1 GB or 4 slots of 2GB.
- This procedure applies to both scenarios.
1. Since the upgrade consists in 4 GB modules, all the native chipsets must be removed.
! Notice:
The native memory slots are occupied differently, according to the initial configuration:
- The following table indicates the initial configuration for the 8 slots of 1GB modules:
1 1 GB 2 1 GB
7 1 GB 8 1 GB
3 1 GB 4 1 GB
5 1 GB 6 1 GB
- The following table indicates the initial configuration for the 4 slots of 2GB modules:
1 2 GB 2 2 GB
3 2 GB 4 2 GB
9 free 10 free
11 free 12 free
2. Fill in the 8 slots of 4GB RAM upgrade according to the following table:
1 4 GB 2 4 GB
7 4 GB 8 4 GB
3 4 GB 4 4 GB
9 free 10 free
5 4 GB 6 4 GB
11 free 12 free
704
Note:
The picture below corresponds to the RAM upgrade table:
Free slot Free slot
Free slot Free slot
WARNING
MammoWorkstation.
! Notice:
705
This page is blank.
706
1 Applicability
This job card applies to DICOM Shuttle and Collaboration Server on HP Z600.
Note:
The RAM upgrade is included in the standard DBT package and it can also be ordered separately
as an optional upgrade.
With this upgrade you replace the existing RAM with 12 GB RAM modules.
Note:
One single RAM module 4GB has the FRU Part number 5500593.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’’
WARNING
5 Access the Memory Slots
WARNING
components:
- by touching either the power supply or the outside frame of the PC;
707
1. Remove the side panel of the PC to open the casing.

2. Click on the small green lever (1) to remove the chassis.
3. Click on the other small green lever (2) to loosen the fans.
4. Then remove the fan slowly.
Note:
6 General Information on RAM Upgrade

The Z600 provides 6 memory slots. The memory slots are numbered as follows:
1 native memory (2GB) 4 empty (do not use)

2 native memory (2GB) 5 empty (do not use)
3 empty 6 empty (do not use)
- The 12 GB RAM upgrade consists in a 3 slots of 4GB configuration.

- The existing memory is to be completely removed and replaced with the new RAM modules from
slot 1 to slot 3.
708
7 RAM Upgrade Procedure

Note:
The native memory installed on the Z600 consists of 2 slots of 2 GB.
The native memory has to be completely removed.
1. Remove the existing RAM modules by pressing the latches (1) on both sides of the modules.
1 1
Note:
The picture below corresponds to the RAM upgrade table before inserting the new RAM modules.
709
2. Insert the 3 slots of 4GB RAM upgrade according to the following table:
1 4 GB 4 do not use
2 4 GB 5 do not use
3 4 GB 6 do not use
Note:
To insert the new RAM modules, gently press them into the slots, until the latches lock.
3. Place back the fans and chassis, and close the casing.
WARNING
MammoWorkstation.
! Notice:
710
Job Card UPG C12 - Windows Upgrade from 32 to 64-bit
Job Card UPG C12 - Windows Upgrade from 32 to 64-bit Chapter 10
1 Applicability
The upgrade procedures described in this job card apply to all Z600 systems.
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Hardware requirements
• Z600 systems with at least two hard drives;
• Z600 Windows 7 64-bit DVD package from HP (to be ordered 2 weeks in advance);
• v4.7.0 software DVD.
4 Order DVD package from HP

Note:
The delivery from HP usually takes about two weeks.
1. Get the Serial Number (e.g. CZC9384W1B, CZC0127VL3) and Product Number (e.g. FW863AV,
WJ057EC), as written on the outside-labels of the HP Z600-Workstation.
2. Go to https://h20566.www2.hp.com/portal/site/hpsc/scm/submitCase
- Create HP account (if you do not already have one).
- Sign-in to HP Passport.
- In the Submit a Case field, enter the Serial Number.
- In the Case details section, enter the information according to the following example:
Case title: Need Win7 64bit Recovery DVD set

Operating system / Win7 64bit
version:
711
Problem description: Dear Sir/Madam,
We have the above mentioned System (Z600) which was ordered and
shipped with Windows 7 32-bit. Now we want to upgrade the operating
system to Windows 7 64-bit and thus need a Windows7 64-bit Recovery
DVD set.
Please ship the DVD package at the following address:
GE Healthcare
[Your Full Name]
[Your Complete Office Address]
Thank you and regards!

Contact & equipment
location information: Fill in with the right information.
- Click Submit.
5 Backup of existing files and configuration

5-1 MWS configuration screenshots
1. On the D: drive, create a folder called e.g. BackupV4.x.x
2. inside this folder, save a WordPad document called IDI Config Screenshots;
3. login to the MWS settings with the admin account;
4. use the WordPad document to store screenshots of all the following configuration tabs and
instances:
• Preferences
• Local
• Remote Control
• Communication - one screenshot per partner source
• Routing - one screenshot per rule
• Worklist & RIS
- one screenshot per existing worklist
- one screenshot per existing rule (visible when click on Edit under WorklistBroker)
• Print
• Calibration
• License.
5-2 Backup of the configuration folder

Follow the procedures described in Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the Configuration Folder on page 479.
712
5-3 Local database backup

1. Follow the instructions from Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup on page 737.
Note:
Make sure to refer to the SM/ SIP corresponding to the release currently installed on the Z600, as
the procedures described in this Job Card might differ.
2. Copy the folders in the backup folder created on the D: drive.
5-4 Stop all services

• for version 4.6.1 or higher - stop the IDDatabase service;

➜ this will trigger other services to stop - click Yes:
• for version 4.6.0 or older - stop the following services:

- ApacheTomcat6forIDI
- IDDicomReceiveSCP
- IDDicomWorklistSCP
- MySQL.
713
5-5 ImageDiagnost folder backup

1. Go to %IDI_Home%.
2. Copy the ImageDiagnost folder in the backup folder created on the D: drive.
3. For version 4.6.0 or older, go to C:\MySQL and copy this file in the same backup folder.
5-6 Backup of other important files and settings

! Notice:
Be aware that the following procedures will delete all the data on the C: (primary) drive.
Make sure to check if any important files, for e.g. in the C:\install or on the Desktop, need to be saved in
the backup folder.
6 Windows installation
Note:
In the following instructions, the installation steps which require only clicking on the Next button are
skipped.
1. Insert DVD 1 of 3 HP Restore Plus! from the HP DVD package.

2. Restart the computer.
3. The DVD is automatically booted.
4. From the language window, select the desired language and click Next:
714
5. From the following window, click on Begin:
6. Choose the OS Windows 7 64-bit Professional, the desired language and region:
715
7. Click Next for the following steps. A pop-up warning will announce that all data will be deleted on the
primary drive. Click Yes:
8. Wait through the partition procedure and click next when finished:
716
9. The system will be booted.

10. From the following screen, make sure all options are selected:
11. Wait while files are being copied from the DVD:
717
12. When this screen is displayed, insert the Operating System DVD 2 of 3 and then click Next:
13. Wait while files are being copied from the second DVD:
718
14. When this screen is displayed, insert the Language Pack Media DVD 2 of 3 and then click Next:
15. The language files will be copied from the third DVD:
719
16. Once the files are copied, the setup will begin:
17. Wait while the software is being installed:
720
18. On the set-up window, select the right country, time and keyboard layout:
19. On the next screen, insert a user name and a computer name:
721
20. Set a password:
21. Read and accept the license terms:
722
22. Choose the recommended settings:
23. Set the time and date accordingly:
723
24. Choose the Work network from the following options:
25. Windows updates might be required to be installed and then a final system reboot:
724
7 Verification
After the reboot, go to Computer Properties and check if the OS has been changed to 64-bit and if the
installed memory has 32 GB:
8 MWS installation
1. Proceed with the plain MWS installation as described in Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation
on page 197.
2. Configure the system according to the screenshots saved in the WordPad document.
725
This page is blank.
726
Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import
Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import Chapter 10
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all upgrades to a new software version.
1 Field Engineer
Time:15’ (up to several hours)
3 Database Migration
Starting with 4.6.1, the way the ROI (Region of interest) database is registered is different from the
previous versions. This implies performing a database re-import in order to refill the cache database with
updated ROI information.
This procedure is recommended after every upgrade to a new version, to avoid potential errors.
Note:
There is no migration tool for the Cache database.
! Notice:
Depending on the database size, this process may take several hours.
4 Procedure
To re-import the Workflow database:
1. Go to the Support Interface.
2. Open the Cache Re-Import
Alternatively, go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ Rebuild Database.
727
Job Card UPG C09 - Cache Re-import
3. Click on the [Rebuild Database and ROI] button.
This page is blank.
4. A progress bar will indicate the completion process:
5. When the database re-import is completed, the initial screen will be displayed.
728
Job Card UPG C10 - Check Hologic Settings
Job Card UPG C10 - Check Hologic Settings Chapter 10
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all PCs that receive image data from a Hologic modality.
1 Field Engineer
Time:15’
3 Check the Hologic Settings in WindowLevelConfig.xml

3. Edit the WindowLevelConfig.xml.
4. Look for the following xml section starting with:

<imagetype name="HOLOGIC" description="HOLOGIC DR">
5. The section must look exactly like the one above:

• Check every value (1).
• Check every valuemask (2).
6. If the xml section is not exactly the same as indicated in the image, follow the instruction:
a. Go to %IDI_Home%\MammoWorkstation\2config.
b. Open the WindowLevelConfig.xml in e.g. a Notepad.
c. Copy the complete xml section <imagetype name="HOLOGIC" description="HOLOGIC
DR">:
<imagetype name="HOLOGIC" [...] </imagetype>
d. Go back to Support Interface..
729
Job Card UPG C10 - Check Hologic Settings
e. Open the Configuration Folder.

f. Edit the WindowLevelConfig.xml
g. Select the xml section <imagetype name="HOLOGIC" [...] </imagetype>
h. Paste the new content (Ctrl + V) instead of the old content.
9. Restart the MammoWorkstation.

Note:
Always use valuemask instead of value when you are inserting the wildcard "*" in the
WindowLevelConfig.xml.
Example for Manufacturer
<tag id ="00080070" valuemask="GE*"/>
➜ All Studies from GE are taken into account.
<tag id ="00080070" value="GE Senographe 2000 DS"/>
➜ Only Studies from GE Senographe 2000 DS are taken into account.
730
Corrective Maintenance
Chapter 11 Corrective Maintenance

This chapter is intended to help Field Engineers in all aspects of corrective maintenance. It contains the
following types of Job Cards:
• DC Data Correction:
- Job Card DC A02 - Manual DICOM Files Importation on page 733
- Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup on page 737
- Job Card DC A08 - Local Database Rebuilding on page 739
- Job Card DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder on page 741.
• TSG Troubleshooting:
- Job Card TSG A02 - Solving Problems with Query-Retrieve on page 743
- Job Card TSG A04 - Ultra VNC Troubleshooting on page 745
- Job Card TSG C08 - External Adapter Troubleshooting on page 749
- Job Card TSG C09 - Captcha Dialog Troubleshooting on page 759
- Job Card TSG A10 - Magnified Image Identification on page 763
- Job Card TSG A12 - Register Images of Unknown Origin on page 767
- Job Card TSG A18 - Eizo Monitors Troubleshooting on page 771
- Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors Troubleshooting on page 777
- Job Card TSG C24 - Idle DICOM Time-out on page 785
- Job Card TSG M29 - Cache Search Limit on page 787
- Job Card TSG A20 - How to Modify Annotation Properties on page 789
- Job Card TSG M21 - OverlayObjects Properties on page 795
- Job Card TSG A06 - X-keys 20 Keypad Troubleshooting on page 801
- Job Card TSG A22 - X-keys 24 Keypad Troubleshooting on page 803
- Job Card TSG A23 - Wrong Gray Palette Setting on page 809
- Job Card TSG A25 - Troubleshooting System Lockup on page 815
- Job Card TSG A26 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows 7 Configuration on page 819
- Job Card TSG A27 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows XP Configuration on page 825.
- Job Card TSG M30 - Worklist Error after Upgrade from 4.6.0 to 4.7.0 on page 833
- Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI Software Upgrade on page 835
- Job Card TSG C32 - Error Message of Missing Configuration Files on page 837
- Job Card TSG C33 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service on page 841
• Configuration tips:
- Tips on page 843.
731 Chapter 11
Corrective Maintenance
This page is blank.
Chapter 11 732
Job Card DC A02 - Manual DICOM Files Importation
Job Card DC A02 - Manual DICOM Files Importation Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Introduction
MammoWorkstation retrieves DICOM images from a PACS via DICOM Query and Retrieve and
receives DICOM images via DICOM store. If files are organized as DICOM Media ("DICOM CD"), they
are imported using a DICOM CD Partner configuration (see Job Card CFG C08 - DICOM Partners
Configuration on page 403).
In case of a loose collection of DICOM files, a manual import tool is available.
4 Procedure
1. Go to Support Interface and click on [Import Files]
Alternatively select Start ➜ Program Files ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ Import Files from Disk
2. In Windows Explorer, select a folder with documents that you want to import.
3. Copy the path to the "Folder" field and press [Scan Folder].
4. The Browser Window will list all DICOM images contained in that folder.
733
5. Click on [Import Documents] at the bottom of the page.
6. A progress bar will be displayed in percentage:
734
5 Verification
After the files have been imported into the Cache, verify the result:
• Login to MammoWorkstation.
• Perform a search on the cache as shown below (interval of time must be set to "unlimited").
735
This page is blank.
736
Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup
Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Precondition
This Job Card is only valid for MammoWorkstation 4.6.1 installations that are using PostgreSQL as
database. For prior versions using MySQL, please refer to Job Card UPG A02 - Software Upgrade
Preparation on page 677 - section 3-2 Backup 4.5.x / 4.6.0 MySQL Database.
4 Introduction
There are two databases that hold all the relevant information:
1. database "workflow"
2. database "test_cache". ´
Before performing any tasks that might pose a risk, it is advisable to create a backup of these two
databases.
5 Backup
1. Open the Windows Explorer
2. Navigate to the folder C:\install\Tools.
Note:
If you cannot find the folder C:\install\Tools, please go back to section 3 IDI Application Installation
of Job Card IST A12 - IDI Software Installation on page 197.
3. Unzip the file backup.zip:

- Right-click on the file backup.zip ➜ a menu will open.
- Select "Extract All" ➜ a dialog window will open.
- Click [Next].
- Leave the default path ➜ to file will be extracted to C:\install\Tools\backup.
- Click [Next].
- Click [Finish].
4. Navigate to the folder C:\install\Tools\backup
5. Execute backup_db_config.cmd:
- Double click on the backup_db_config.cmd
- Click on [Run].
6. Wait until the dos-box closes itself.
7. The backup will be written to C:\IDI_Backup\[Date-Time-Stamp] (e.g. C:\IDI_Backup\Wed-11-30-
2011_xxxxxx).
737
Job Card DC A06 - Local Database Backup
8. The database-Dumps are placed in the files workflow.dmp and cache.dmp in C:\IDI_Backup\[Date-
Time-Stamp].
Note:
Please check if these files have been created, and have a size bigger than 50 kB.
6 Database Backup Files Re-importation

If you need to reconstruct the database and you have created dumpfiles beforehand the files can be re-
imported into the database.
Note:
If you need to re-import the files, contact the next GE service level for assistance.
738
Job Card DC A08 - Local Database Rebuilding
Job Card DC A08 - Local Database Rebuilding Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Overview
After a reinstallation of the MammoWorkstation or after a database crash (e.g. caused by a power
failure) you might need to rebuild the database – that is, refill the database with information about the
images located in the folder "dbcache".
4 Database Re-import Page

2. Open the [Cache Re-Import]:
3. Click on one of the following options, which corresponds to your situation (see explanation below):
Start - use after failed imports;

- recommended when a database already exists.
739
Job Card DC A08 - Local Database Rebuilding
Rebuild Database - recommended when the database is corrupted;

- this option deletes the database and rebuilds it from the cache.
Rebuild Database - this is necessary after a software update to a new version number;
and ROI - in addition to the previous option, it also calculates the ROI.
4. A progress bar will indicate the completion process
5. When the process is completed, the initial screen will be displayed.

Note:
Depending on the size of the folder dbcache, this process can take several hours!
740
Job Card DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder
Job Card DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Prerequisite
- Backup of the configuration folder has been performed on USB key or on HDD under a
BackupV4.5.x. folder.
4 Restore Backup
In case of hardware failure or any other error, it is possible to restore the configuration folder with the
following procedure:
1. Look for the latest IDI backup folder on the system or on your USB device (e.g. BackupV4.5.x.).
2. Open the folder and mark all directories with the mouse or command <Ctrl-A>.
3. Right click on one file and select Copy (or press <Ctrl-C>).
4. Open the folder %IDI_HOME%.
5. Right click and select Paste (or press <Ctrl-V>).
6. Confirm the popup "Overwrite all files" by clicking "Yes to all".
Note:
Do not delete the files in %IDI_HOME% before you restore the backup.
741
Job Card DC A12 - Restoring the Backup of the Configuration Folder
This page is blank.
742
Job Card TSG A02 - Solving Problems with Query-Retrieve
Job Card TSG A02 - Solving Problems with Query-Retrieve Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Introduction
For PACS communication, the MammoWorkstation relies on the DICOM protocols for Query and
Retrieve. PACS communication is based on the FIND and MOVE commands.
If PACS communication does not work properly, check the following:
4 Procedure
a. Select the tab "Communication" and there select the PACS archive.
b. Try to PING the partner.
c. If this fails, check the host number and the TCP/IP connection.
2. Try to DICOM-ECHO the partner.
a. If this fails, either the AE-Title is incorrect or the MammoWorkstation is unknown to the PACS.
b. At the PACS configure the MammoWorkstation hostname and local AE-Title.
3. If DICOM-ECHO is OK, then login to the MammoWorkstation and query the patient list from the
PACS, e.g. search for cases from today.
a. If the query fails with an error "Query for patient list failed", the DICOM query model is incorrect.
b. Check the DICOM Conformance Statement of the PACS.
In the configuration interface under MammoWorkstation ➜ Settings, tab Communication, you can
choose between Patient-Root and Study-Root Model as well as between Relational and
Hierarchical query.
The setting Hierarchical plus Study Root Model should always work. If the PACS supports
Relational model, the performance is much better. It is also possible to deactivate the query at
image level. Some PACS systems have problems with image level queries. Disadvantage is that
the MammoWorkstation loses control of the number of images in a series prior to loading the
series.
4. If querying the Patient List works, select a case in the Patient List and select [Prefetch].
If Prefetch fails,
a. check if the MammoWorkstation is known to the PACS as a DICOM Storage destination
b. check the query model settings (Patient-Root vs. Study-Root Model and Relational vs.
Hierarchical).
743
Job Card TSG A02 - Solving Problems with Query-Retrieve
5. If prefetching still fails, the low level DICOM connection must be verified.
a. Start the MammoWorkstation, update the patient list in the MammoWorkstation and try to
prefetch a case.
b. Open the logfile “CacheController.log” in the folder
- %IDI_Home%\logs
c. Search for the last INFO message of the form:
2006-12-14 15:29:35,373 INFO CacheController [http8080-Processor11]
addLogLine() : line = [run LOCALPC>C:\Program
Files\ImageDiagnost\CacheController\qr_scu.exe -SEP "|" -CHARSET
"ISO_IR 100" -AE AE_MAMMO […] -QRCMD MOVE […]
d. Make sure to select a "MOVE" command.
e. Select everything starting from "C:\Program... ", and execute the command in the Windows
command shell. Now a PACS specialist must analyze the behavior on the PACS side and explain
the problem.
f. Meanwhile, you can verify the low-level communication of the MammoWorkstation Storage SCP
in the logfile "Mrg_IDReceiveSCP.log". In response to the MOVE command, the PACS must
contact the ReceiveSCP and send the selected series.
744
Job Card TSG A04 - Ultra VNC Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG A04 - Ultra VNC Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Overview
The issues described in this job card are:
- an error occurred during installation of the service: section 4 Error during Installation;
- once installed, the service does not run properly: section 5 Failure after Installation.
4 Error during Installation

In case one of the following error messages appeared during installation, the installation process was
aborted.
4-1 Use Case 1

1. Error message:
“The folder C:\Program Files\UltraVNC already exists
Please uninstall UltraVNC first”:
2. Reason for installation failure:

The tool is already installed.
3. Required actions:
a. Close the command line window.
745
b. Uninstall the UltraVNC from the Control Panel.
c. Execute the Install_UVNC.bat in C:\Install\UltraVNC again.
4-2 Use Case 2

1. Error message:
“The UltraVNC setup is not in C:\Install\UltraVNC
Please check the setup directory”
2. Reason for installation failure:

The UltraVNC installation folder is not C:\Install\UltraVNC
3. Required actions:
a. Close the command line window.
b. Check/ modify the path of the UltraVNC kit.
c. Execute the Install_UVNC.bat in C:\Install\UltraVNC again.
5 Failure after Installation

If the connection to a target computer fails, check the following:
746
• Are you prompted for a password after you have typed in the IP address?
- Yes: A connection is possible but the password is wrong.
- No: Check the target computer configuration:
1. Check if VNC server is running.

Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Administrative Tools ➜ Services.
This service should have the status "Started".

If the service is not "Started", start the service by clicking on Start:
2. Try to ping the target computer to verify that the two computers reside on the same network.
a. Go to Start ➜ Run, type "cmd" and hit [Enter].
b. Type "ping [ip target Computer]". You should see a reply as answer.
747
3. Check if the Windows Firewall is off or port 5900 is open.

a. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Windows Firewall.
b. In tab General, the Windows Firewall settings will be displayed. It has to be set to "Off".
c. If not, in tab Exceptions, check that port 5900 is open.
No other firewall should be active either.

4. Contact your Network Administrator to check if the required port on which VNC listens is available.
The default port is 5900.
748
Job Card TSG C08 - External Adapter Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG C08 - External Adapter Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Possible Problems
• MWSTray is not started (4-1 MWSTray Is Not Started).
• MWSTray is started, but not connected (4-2 MWSTray Is Started but Not Connected).
• MWSTray is started, is connected, but does not list any external viewers (4-3 MWSTray Is Started
and Connected but There Is No Adapter Available in MammoWorkstation).
• In the Adapter window in the MammoWorkstation, there are multiple entries for configured
adapters (4-4 Adapter Is Configured, Listed, Enabled and Active but "Not Working").
• MWSTray is configured, is listed in the dialog window Adapters, is enabled and active but is "not
working" (4-4 Adapter Is Configured, Listed, Enabled and Active but "Not Working").
• The Adapter dialog window in the MammoWorkstation does not list one specific adapter even
though it has been configured (4-5 The MammoWorkstation - Adapter Dialog Window Does Not
List One Specific, Configured Adapter).
4 Procedure to Resolve the Given Problem

The described problems all concern the MWSTray or the Adapter dialog window in the
MammoWorkstation toolbar.
If the MWSTray is started and connected an MWSTray icon will appear in the notification area of the
Windows taskbar.
The Adapters dialog window in the MammoWorkstation displays all adapters per purpose (Viewer,
Desktop Sync, Reporting).
The adapters will be listed with ID and with info on enabled / disabled
(enabled = selectable, icon = blue check, disabled = not selectable, icon = grayed out stop).
If the adapter is enabled, there will be an icon on whether it is active or not. Active = adapter connected
icon, Deactivated = adapter disconnected (dangling) icon.
The possible problems will be addressed singly in the following way.

1. How can the problem be recognized? ➜ Recognition
2. How can it be resolved? ➜ Solution
3. How can the solution be verified? ➜ Verification
749
4-1 MWSTray Is Not Started

4-1-1 Recognition
The notification area of the Windows taskbar does not display an icon for the MWSTray.
4-1-2 Solution
Start the MWSTray manually:
1. Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools
2. Select MWSTray
4-1-3 Verification
The notification area of the Windows taskbar displays an icon for the MWSTray, at first (30-60 secs after
start) with a "pending connection" icon, then either with a "connected" icon or a "not connected" icon.
➜ If the MWSTray icon is displayed in the "not connected" status, check problem 4-2 MWSTray Is
Started but Not Connected.
4-2 MWSTray Is Started but Not Connected

4-2-1 Recognition
The system tray icon for MWSTray is visible but marked with an error icon. There are two possible
reasons.
4-2-2 Solution
1. The Apache Tomcat service is not started:
• Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage.
• On the Computer Management window, go to Services and Applications ➜ Services.
• The Apache Tomcat service must be started:
750
• If the Apache Tomcat service is not started, click on Start the service.
• Check if the error icon on the system tray icon for MWSTray has disappeared.
• Make sure that the MWSTray is started.
• To check this, move the mouse cursor over the system tray icon for MWSTray, which will be
displayed in the notification area of the Windows taskbar.
2. The Remote Service is not started.
751
4-2-3 Verification
1. Check if the error icon on the system tray icon for MWSTray has disappeared.
3. To check this, move the mouse cursor over the system tray icon for MWSTray, which will be
displayed in the notification area of the Windows taskbar.
4. If the MWSTray is not started, contact the next GE service level for assistance.
752
4-3 MWSTray Is Started and Connected but There Is No Adapter Available in

MammoWorkstation
4-3-1 Recognition
2. Select the button [Adapters] in the MammoWorkstation toolbar.
3. The following scenarios are possible:
a. The opened dialog window only lists "Error" for each category:
b. The opened dialog window shows no entries for the categories:
4-3-2 Solution
1. The Remote Service is not started:
753
2. Start the MWSTray manually:

- Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools
- Select MWSTray
4-3-3 Verification
3. The opened dialog window should list all categories with the corresponding configured adapters.
754
4-4 Adapter Is Configured, Listed, Enabled and Active but "Not Working"
4-4-1 Recognition
The configured adapter is not working:
1. For desktop synchronization: there is no reaction to login/logout, open/close.
2. For external viewers: the external viewer does not display any of the requested images.
3. For external reporting (MRS): MRS does not react to login/logout, open/close and to in-image edits.
4-4-2 Solution
Check if the outbound remote service events are activated in the MammoWorkstation.
- user: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Go to the tab "Communication"
3. Make sure the check box "Activate remote control of other application" is activated.
There is an error in the adapter configuration.

1. Check the adapter specific log file and check for error messages.
2. Resolve the error indicated in the log file.
3. Restart the RemoteService:
a. Go to http://localhost:8080/
b. Open the Tomcat Manager (user: admin; password: admin).
c. Search for the RemoteService.
d. The Remote Service must be started (Running Status = true):
e. If the Remote Service is not started (Running Status = false), click on Start to start the service.
755
4-4-3 Verification
3. Try to work with the configured adapter.
4-5 The MammoWorkstation - Adapter Dialog Window Does Not List One Specific,
Configured Adapter
4-5-1 Recognition
3. The opened dialog window does not list all of the configured adapters.
4-5-2 Solution
3. Edit the applicable Adapter configuration file
! Notice:
Check the Configuration File for syntax errors. In case there are syntax errors, correct the errors.
4. Make sure that the adapter is enabled:
5. If the adapter is enabled, do the following:

- restart the MWSTray:
a. right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar;
b. click on [Exit]
c. go to the Windows Start menu;

d. click on All Programs;
756
e. go to Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray ➜ an MWS icon should then appear in the
- start the RemoteService:

a. Go to http://localhost:8080/
b. Open the Tomcat Manager (user: admin; password: admin).
c. Search for the RemoteService.
d. The Remote Service must be started (Running Status = true):
757
e. If the Remote Service is not started (Running Status = false), click on Start to start the service.
- Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
4-5-3 Verification
3. The opened dialog window should list all categories with the corresponding configured adapters.
758
Job Card TSG C09 - Captcha Dialog Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG C09 - Captcha Dialog Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Procedure
In case the captcha dialog is not correctly displayed, follow the below indicated steps:
Example of a corrupt captcha dialog.
1. Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools

2. Right click on MWSTray ➜ select Properties
3. The following window will open:
759
4. In the filed target, add the following line:

-Dsun.noddraw=true -Dsun.java2d.d3d=false
Note:
Make sure to leave a blank space between the already existing line:
"C:\Program Files\ImageDiagnost\RemoteControl\MWSTray\MWSTray.exe"
OR
"C:\Program Files(x86)\ImageDiagnost\RemoteControl\MWSTray\MWSTray.exe"
and the new line
-Dsun.noddraw=true -Dsun.java2d.d3d=false.
5. Click [Apply] to save your configuration.
6. After the applied configuration, restart the MWSTray.
a. right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar;
b. click on [Exit]
c. go to the Windows Start menu;

d. click on All Programs;
760
e. go to Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ MWSTray ➜ an MWS icon should then appear in the
761
This page is blank.
762
Job Card TSG A10 - Magnified Image Identification
Job Card TSG A10 - Magnified Image Identification Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Introduction
The MammoWorkstation labels magnified images with an M, which is written in front of the view position
in the Virtual Viewbox of the MammoWorkstation. Magnified images will display the warning message
"Confirm measurement on contact view" on the bottom of every image as well as underneath every
measurement action performed on the images.
Images will only be marked as "Magnified Images" if one of the following conditions is present:
• The View Modifier Code Sequence marking the image as magnified is available:
- Coding Scheme Designator SNM3
- Code Value R-102D6
• The DICOM tag 0018,1114 "Estimated Radiographic Magnification Factor" is greater than 1.2.
• The DICOM tag 0028,0A02 "Pixel Spacing Calibration Type" is present and contains a descriptive
value (such as Fiducial or Geometry).
• The quotient of DICOM tag 0018,1164 "ImagerPixelSpacing" and DICOM tag 0028,0030
"PixelSpacing" is greater than 1.2.
4 Check the DICOM Header

To clearly identify the image for which the information is needed, execute the following steps:
- name: "admin"
- password: "admin"
2. Go to the tab "Preferences".
3. Add the DICOM tag 0008,0018 (SOP Instance UID).
Note:
In the following example, the DICOM tag 0008,0018 was added in the forth line behind the
Operator information. The SOP Instance UID will consequently be displayed after the information
regarding "Operator" in the Virtual Viewbox.
Note:
For more information on adding DICOM tags on the tab "Preferences," refer to Job Card CFG C06
- Language and Display Preference Configuration on page 395.
4. Click [OK].
6. Open the case containing the magnified images.
7. Select the button [Show image information] ➜ the SOP Instance UID will be displayed.
763
4-1 Check for the View Modifier Code Sequence

In case magnified images are not labeled as such, check if the View Modifier Code Sequence with the
coding scheme SNM3 and code value R-102D6 is present.
2. Open the Import Processes.
3. Enter the Patient Name in the indicated text box (1):
4. Select the button [Search] (2).

5. Check the images for their SOP Instance UID (DICOM tag 0008,0018) ➜ the SOP Instance UID
must be the same as the one displayed in the MammoWorkstation Virtual Viewbox.
6. Check if the following View Modifier Code Sequence with the coding scheme designator SNM3 (1)
and code value R-102D6 (2) is present:
2
1
Note:
If this View Modifier Code Sequence is present, the image will always be labelled as "magnified".
764
4-2 Check for the Estimated Radiographic Magnification Factor

In case magnified images are not labeled as such, check if the DICOM tag 0018,1114 "Estimated
Radiographic Magnification Factor" is present:
2. Enter the Patient Name in the indicated text box(1):

4. Check the images for their SOP Instance UID ➜ SOP Instance UID must be the same as the one
displayed in the MammoWorkstation Virtual Viewbox.
5. Check if the following DICOM tag is available:
0018,1114 "Estimated Radiographic Magnification Factor".
Note:
If the DICOM tag 0018,1114 is available, the value of the DICOM tag (red circle) must be greater
than 1.2 to trigger the MammoWorkstation to label the corresponding image as "magnified".
765
4-3 Check for the Pixel Spacing

In case magnified images are not labelled as such, check if the DICOM tag 0028,0A02 "Pixel Spacing
Calibration Type" is present.
3. Enter the Patient Name in the indicated text box (1):

5. Check the images for their SOP Instance UID (DICOM tag 0008,0018) ➜ the SOP Instance UID
must be the same as the one displayed in the MammoWorkstation Virtual Viewbox.
6. Check if the DICOM tag 0028,0030 "Pixel Spacing" is present.
7. If DICOM tag 0028,0030 "Pixel Spacing" is present, check if also the DICOM tag 0028,0A02 "Pixel
Spacing Calibration Type" is present and contains a descriptive value (such as Fiducial or
Geometry).
Note:
If the DICOM tag 0028,0A02 is present and if it contains a descriptive value such as Fiducial or
Geometry, MammoWorkstation will label the image as "magnified".
8. If the DICOM tag 0028,0A02 "Pixel Spacing Calibration Type" is NOT present but the DICOM tag
0028,0030 "Pixel Spacing" is available, check for the DICOM tag 0018,1164 "ImagerPixelSpacing".
Check the following:
DICOM tag 0028,0030 / DICOM tag 0018,1164 > 1.2
Note:
The result of the indicated equation must be greater than 1.2 to trigger the MammoWorkstation to
label the corresponding image as "magnified".
766
Job Card TSG A12 - Register Images of Unknown Origin
Job Card TSG A12 - Register Images of Unknown Origin Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Issue Occurred
Images appear blurry and grey in the Image Folder:
Consequently, the brightness and contrast has to be adjusted:

1. Drag and drop the image into the Virtual Viewbox.
2. Access the Window Panel via the toolbar by clicking on .
3. The Window Panel will open:
The origin of this particular image is

"unknown" to the MammoWorkstation.
Note:
Before brightness and contrast are
adjusted, the origin of this image
should be registered.
! Notice:
It is necessary to register the origin
of one image to ensure the window
setting can be saved and applied to
all images of this type of origin.
767
4 Solution
4-1 Register "Unknown" Images
To introduce the unknown origin of one image to the MammoWorkstation:
1. the modality, the manufacturer and the SOP Class UID must be identified (i.e read out of the DICOM
header),
2. the WindowLevelConfig.xml must be edited to include the identified manufacturer and SOP Class
UID.
4-1-1 Check the DICOM Header
1. Note down the name of the patient to whom the image of unknown origin belongs.
2. Exit the MammoWorkstation.
Note:
Make sure to exit the Login window as well.
4. Select [Import Processes](1).
1
2 3
5. Enter the patient name in the dedicated input field (2).

6. Select [Search] (3) ➜ a list will be displayed.
7. Select the arbitrary File path (listed in the File column) ➜ the DICOM File Header Listing will be
displayed.
8. Search for the following DICOM tags:
- 0008,0060 ➜ Modality
- 0008,0070 ➜ Manufacturer
- 0008,0016 ➜ SOP Class UID
Example:
768
4-1-2 Edit the WindowLevelConfig.xml

1. Exit the MammoWorkstation.
Note:
Make sure to exit the Login window as well.
4. Edit the WindowLevelConfig.xml:
5. Copy any existing xml section describing manufacturer information (e.g. Sectra DR) from the xml
attribute <imagetype name [...]> to the xml attribute </imagetype>.
6. Paste the copied xml section underneath the one you copied:
7. Fill in the details of the manufacturer (information read out of the DICOM header, see Check the
DICOM Header on page 768) in the copied xml section.
Note:
Do not forget to name the xml section (1).
8. The result should look like in the following screenshot:
1
Modality
SOP Class UID
Manufacturer
769
5 Verification
2. Open the image that was previously of unknown origin.
3. Access the Window Panel via the toolbar by clicking on .
4. The image origin will now be available(1):
5. Modify the settings for brightness and contrast to as required.

6. When you are satisfied with the result, click on [Edit](2) ➜ the Window Editor will open:
7. Click on [New] (1).

8. Type in "Standard" (case sensitive!) in the text input field (2) and click [OK].
! Notice:
Make sure the box "Use standard when loading" is checked (3).
9. In future, all Fuji CR images will be loaded with the just configured "Standard" window setting.
770
Job Card TSG A18 - Eizo Monitors Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG A18 - Eizo Monitors Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card applies to Eizo review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
3 Presentation
This job card includes errors codes generated by the review monitors.
CAUTION
Immediately inform servicing department and quote error code. Operation of the monitor should
be limited to exceptional cases (emergency situations) and is at your own risk (operating time
following error is recorded).
4 Errors Generated by EIZO 5MP LCD B/W Monitors

4-1 Monitor Fault Signaling: EIZO SMD 21511
The LED continuously lights up green in normal mode. In the event of a malfunction, the fault can be
located using the screen display and the control LED.
Screen LED Cause Remedy

No picture Dark Switch is off Switch on the power switch
Power cable not inserted or Check power supply cable
incorrectly inserted.
Power supply cable faulty Replace power supply cable
Blown fuse Return the monitor
Orange No video signal DVI cable not connected
DPMS active Computer's operating system
switches the display to power
down mode (to save power and to
spare the backlight)
Red, permanent Internal error Return the monitor
Red, flashes at 1 Hz Timing outside synchronization Return the monitor
range of display
Green, permanent Video signal detected, but Check settings using RadiCS (e.g.
or flashing at 1 Hz display incorrectly set LUT, brightness, no test pattern,
etc.)
Video signal detected, but Return display for repair
display defective
771

Picture Green, permanent No fault –
Green, flashing at 1 No fault, but refresh rate not Set refresh rate of graphics card to
Hz optimum 25 or 50 Hz (if the frequency is not
set optimally, springing may occur
with moving images)
4-2 Monitor Fault Signaling: EIZO GX540

The LED continuously lights up green in normal mode. In the event of a malfunction, the fault can be
located using the screen display and the operation LED.

No picture Power indicator is flashing The device that is Solve the problem, turn off
yellow and green
connected using the monitor, and then turn it
DisplayPort has a problem. on again. Refer to the User’s
Manual of the output device
for further details.
772

Power indicator is flighting Switch the input signal.
yellow and green PC is turned off Turn on the PC
Power saving mode Operate the mouse or
keyboard, or come near the
monitor.
Dark Switch is off Switch on power switch
Power cable is not inserted Check power cable
or incorrectly inserted.
Power cable is defective Replace power cable
This message appears when some PC may not output wait for some minutes
the signal right after power-
there is no input signal.
on.
PC turned off turn on PC
signal cable not connected check signal cable
properly
switch input signal
The message shows that the PC configuration does not Adapt configuration
meet the resolution and according to Setup Manual of
input signal is
vertical scan fequency the monitors and restart PC.
out of the specified frequency requirements of the
range. ? monitors. Select an appropriate setting
Example: using the graphics board’s
utility. Refer to the Manual of
the graphics board for details
fD: Dot clock

fH: Horizontal scan frequency
fV: Vertical scan frequency
773

Imaging Screen is too bright or too Use “Brightness” in the
Problems dark.
Adjustment menu to adjust
it.(The LCD monitor backlight
has a limited life span. When
the screen becomes dark or
begins to flicker, contact your
local EIZO representative.)
Characters are blurred. Check whether the PC is
configured to meet the
resolution and vertical scan
frequency requirements of
the monitor (see “Compatible
Resolutions” in the Setup
Manual.).
Afterimages appear. Afterimages are particular to
LCD monitors. Avoid
displaying the same image
for a long time.
Use the screen saver or
power saving function to
avoid displaying the same
image for extended periods of
time.
Interference patterns or Leave the monitor with a
pressure marks remain on
white or black screen. The
the screen.
symptom may disappear
774

Other The Adjustment menu Check whether the operation
Problems does not appear. lock function is active
No mode menu is Check whether the operation
displayed. lock function is active
When using the presence Check the setting
sensor:
environment of the monitor.
The images remain to be
displayed when you move Presence Sensor may not
away from the monitor. work correctly in the following
The images do not environments.
reappear when you come
near it. -There is an object that
reflects light such as a mirror
or glass in front of the sensor.
-The monitor is located in a
place that receives direct
sunlight.
-There is an infrared light
emitting device near the
monitor.
-There is some obstacle in
front of the sensor.
Check whether any dirt on
the sensor. Clean the sensor
with a soft cloth.
Check whether you are in
front of the monitor. The
infrared ray is emitted
perpendicularly from the
sensor to detect a person.
775

The monitor connected Check whether the USB
with the USB cable is not
cable is connected correctly.
detected./ USB devices
connected to the monitor Change the USB port to
does not work. another one. If the PC or
peripheral devices works
correctly by changing the
USB
port, contact your local EIZO
representative. (Refer to the
manual of the PC for details.)
Reboot the PC.
If the peripheral devices work
correctly when the PC and
peripheral devices are
connected directly, please
contact your local EIZO
representative.
Check whether the PC and its
OS are USB compliant. (For
USB compliance of the
respective devices, consult
their manufacturers.)
For Windows, check the PC’s
BIOS setting for USB. (Refer
to the manual of the PC for
details.)
Integrated Front Sensor Turn the main power off an
stays out. on again.
Self Calibration/ Grayscale Refer to the error code table
Check failure. in the Monitor’s manual.
If an error code that does not
appear in the error code table
is displayed, contact you local
Eizo representative.
Time is not displayed Execute Monitor Detection
correctly in the history of using RadiCS/RadiCS LE.
SelfCalibration/ Grayscale For details refer to JobCard
Check. IST A85 or to the RadiCS/
RadiCS LE User’s Manual.
776
Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG C28 - Barco Monitors Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
• Barco review monitors with Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400.
• IDI systems v. 4.6.0 or higher running on Windows 7.
1 Field Engineer
Time:
3 Presentation
This job card provides solutions to the following two errors:
- Missing drivers for Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400;
- Wrongly installed driver for the card.
4 Missing drivers for Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400

4-1 Description
The drivers are normally not included in the delivery of the Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400. These
are shipped with the monitors and thus might not be readily available for the graphics board installation.
4-2 Solution
The drivers for the Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400 and the corresponding tools are available for
download on the IDI Service Support Central community:
1. Go to IDI Service Support Central Community.
2. Login with SSO credentials.
3. Look for the corresponding drivers’ pack:
4. Click on the pack to download.

Note:
Make sure to extract all compressed folder within the downloaded pack.
777
5 Wrongly installed driver for the card

5-1 Description
Internally, the Graphics Board Barco MXRT 5400 is an ATI V5800. Windows 7 will thus automatically try
to install the drivers for ATI V5800, if there is an Internet connection. In this case, the Barco software will
not be able to install the drivers and thus, it will not display MGs on the review monitors. This requires a
manual exchange of the drivers.
Note:
Please always perform the installation as described in Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco
MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb on page 293.
1. Check if the Barco Driver is listed in the first step of the installation:
2. Whether the driver is listed or not, proceed with the normal installation of the driver.
- Scenario A: If the Barco Driver is present in the step corresponding to the above print-screen,
then you are not facing the issue described in this service note. Please carry on with the normal
installation and configuration as described in Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-
5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb on page 293.
- Scenario B: If no Barco Driver is detected in this step, once the normal installation is completed,
apply the solution described below and then continue with the configuration of the monitors as
described in Job Card IST C80 - Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and
QAWeb on page 293.
5-2 Solution
1. To make sure the correct drivers are used for operation, follow the instructions described in 4-2
Solution on page 777.
778
2. Once the drivers are downloaded and extracted, go to Computer Management and choose from
View - Devices by connection:
3. Drill down to ATI FirePro V5800, to which the Barco monitors are connected:
Note:
Please be aware that there might be two ATI FirePro V5800. One of them has the Barco monitors
connected, the other has the reporting monitor connected. Please be sure to execute the following
steps only for the one where the Barco monitors are connected.
4. Right-click on the ATI FirePro V5800 and choose Update Driver Software.
779
3. From the pop-up window, choose Browse my computer for driver software:
4. Select Let me pick from a list of device on my computer:
780
5. Click on Have Disk:
6. Browse to the folder containing the drivers. The path should be similar to this:
....MXRT5400_Win7\MXRT5400_Win7\K5407971_03_Driver\Barco\driver\VS64\MXRT
_WDDM\barcomed.inf
7. When you have reached the location, Barco MXRT 5400 will be selected. Then click on Next and
Install:
781
8. Wait for the installation to complete and then click Close:
5-3 Verification
1. Go back to the Device Manager and check whether the Barco MXRT 5400 is listed:
782
2. Go to Screen Resolution and check if the display for the corresponding review monitors is available:
After verification, continue with the configuration of the monitors as described in Job Card IST C80 -
Installation of Barco MXRT-5400 Graphic Board Drivers and QAWeb.
783
This page is blank.
784
Job Card TSG C24 - Idle DICOM Time-out
Job Card TSG C24 - Idle DICOM Time-out Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Problem Description
Depending on the available DICOM type, the association reply might take more than 120 seconds, as
set in the standard configuration. After this time, the idle DICOM connection time-out leads to
interruption of communication with the other DICOM partner.
4 Solution
Starting with version 4.7.0, the time-out delay time can be configured. The maximum value allowed is
600 seconds.
5 Procedure
3. Edit CcConf.xml.

<qr_scu_idle_timeout description="Timeout Sec. for Idle DICOM Connection"
>120</qr_scu_idle_timeout>
5. Change the value as desired. Note that the max. value is 600 seconds.
785
Job Card TSG C24 - Idle DICOM Time-out
6 Verification
The changes can be tested by re-checking the association.
786
Job Card TSG M29 - Cache Search Limit
Job Card TSG M29 - Cache Search Limit Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card applies to v. 4.6.0 and higher.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’
3 Description of the Problem

The standard limit for Cache/PACS data (including Patient cases, Studies and Series) to be displayed
after a search on the IDI software is set to 2000. Whenever this value is exceeded, the following
message will be displayed, informing the user about this limitation:
787
Job Card TSG M29 - Cache Search Limit
Note:
The warning message will display only on version 4.7.0, but all previous version have the same
default limit.
4 Solution
WARNING
Increasing the cache limit will result in a slower performance of the IDI software!
For this reason, make sure to discuss the change with the customer first and also document it in
the service tool.
In order to change the limit of the displayed data, proceed as follows:

2. Click on the Configuration Folder and edit the MammoWorkstation.ini file.
3. Under the section [Partners], look for the following tag:

MaxCacheResultSize = 2000
4. Change the value as agreed with the customer.

788
Job Card TSG A20 - How to Modify Annotation Properties
Job Card TSG A20 - How to Modify Annotation Properties Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Starting with MammoWorkstation 4.6.1, some of the below mentioned annotation properties can be
manually configured.
Note:
Please check with the customer if they require any of these customized options (optional CAD
markers, font, size and color of text/annotations, etc.).
4 Procedure
4-1 Location of the Annotation Configuration File
3. Edit the AnnotationConfig.xml.
4-2 General Annotation Properties

Property: annotation_color
Description: Color in which annotations shall be drawn.
Default value: white
Allowed values: Any of the color keyword names recognized by World Wide Web Consortium.
Note:
Please refer to http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/types.html#ColorKeywords.
Property: annotation_invert_color
Description: Color in which annotations shall be drawn when image is inverted.
Note:
Property: shadow_color
Description: Color in which annotations shadow is to be drawn.
Default value: black
Allowed values: Do not modify the value for this parameter manually.
Property: pen_width
789
Description: Width of the pen that is to be used while drawing.

Default value: 2
Allowed values: 2 - 5
Property: line_width
Description: Width of the pen that is used while drawing line annotation.
Default value: 2
Property: marker_size
Description: Annotation corner marker / handle size in pixels.
Default value: 25
Property: marker_color
Description: Color in which the annotation marker / handle shall be drawn.
Note:
Property: marker_invert_color
Description: Color in which the annotation marker / handle shall be drawn when image is inverted.
Note:
4-3 Additional Properties Specific to Text Annotation

Property: font_family
Description: Font family keyword that is to be used while drawing text.
Default value: Helvetica
Allowed values: Helvetica, Times, Courier
Property: font_size
Description: Font size to be used while drawing text.
Default value: 24
790
Property: text_width
Description: Width of the text bounding box.
Default value: 300
Property: text_height
Description: Height of the text bounding box.
Default value: 100
Property: text_anchor_size
Description: Size of the text anchor arrow.
Default value: 20
4-4 Additional Properties Specific to Finding Annotation

Property: outer_circle_dist
Description: Distance in pixels between inner and outer circle of finding annotation.
Default value: 25
Property: dashed_line_length
Description: Gap length in pixels that shall be used while drawing finding inner circle.
Default value: 5
Property: mamilla_circle_radius
Description: Radius of the mammilla circle drawn in pixels.
Default value: 10
4-5 Additional Properties Specific to CAD Annotation

Property: enabled_optional_mark_rendering
Description: enable or disable rendering of marks with present intent type value "Presentation Optional".
Default value: no
Allowed values: (yes/no) or (true/false)
Property: IDI_manufacturer_label
Description: Label identifying the manufacturer of the annotation.
Default value: image diagnost
791
Property: enabled_IDI_mark_rendering
Description: Enable or disable rendering marks identifying IDI as manufacturer.
Default value: no
Property: IDI_cad_point_size
Description: IDI CAD marker size [mm] of individual calcification.
Default value: 10
Property: IDI_density_size
Description: IDI CAD marker size [mm] of density (side length of the rectangle)
Default value: 10
Property: R2_manufacturer_label
Description: Label identifying the manufacturer of the R2 annotation.
Default value: R2 technology
Property: enabled_R2_mark_rendering
Description: Enable or disable rendering of R2 marks.
Default value: yes
Property: enabled_R2_mark_size_calculation
Description: Enable or disable calculation of R2 marks size.
Default value: yes
Property: default_R2_mark_size
Description: Default R2 marker size [pixel], will be used if size calculation is not enabled or failed
Default value: 35
Property: viewing_distance_R2
Description: User's viewing distance [cm] from the monitor for rendering R2 CAD marks, will be used to
calculate marker size.
Default value: 60
792
Property: viewing_arc_R2
Description: Marker's covered arc [degree] from the user's viewpoint for rendering R2 CAD marks, will
be used to calculate marker size.
Default value: 0.5
Property: filler_color_R2
Description: Color in which the R2 markers shall be filled.
Default value: black
Property: outline_color_R2
Description: Color in which the R2 markers outline shall be filled.
Property: cad_point_size
Description: default cad marker size [pixel] of graphic type "POINT" (diameter of displayed circle).
Default value: 35
Property: other_cad_finding_size
Description: default marker size [pixel] of other cad findings with unknown graphic type.
Default value: 105
793
This page is blank.
794
Job Card TSG M21 - OverlayObjects Properties
Job Card TSG M21 - OverlayObjects Properties Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Starting with MammoWorkstation 4.6.1, some of the below-mentioned overlay properties can be
manually configured. The most common change made in this file is the font size of the overlay text.
Note:
If this file has been deleted or is missing for any other reason, a new version with the default
configuration will be generated when the workstation is (re)started. This behavior may be used to
overcome problems due to changes made in the OverlayObjects.xml file.
4 Procedure
4-1 Location of the OverlayObjects Configuration File
Alternatively select Start ➜ Program Files ➜ Image Diagnost ➜ Tools ➜ SupportInterface.
3. Edit the OverlayObjects.xml.
795
4-2 General Annotation Properties

4-2-1 Example of the OverlayObjects.xml Tree Structure:
4-2-2 Description of the Tree Structure Tags

1. OverlayText id: defines the identifier label. Below is a list of all the existing labels. Some labels are
always visible (mandatory), others are displayed only when they are configured.
! Notice:
The following labels cannot be changed. Missing mandatory labels prevents the system from
working properly.
Label Description
PatientTextLabelId: is a mandatory label, which includes the patient information, name,
identifier etc.
CadAlgoInfoId: includes information about the CAD markers used on the image. Only
if a CAD option is installed on the system.
TopTextLabelId: additional patient information. This is visible when the "Show
Information" button is active.
796
Label Description
LateralityMarkerId: laterality marker of the image, for example L(eft).
This is a mandatory label.
ProjectionMarkerId: projection marker of the image, for example CC.
NoPostProcessId: displays the following message: "there is no processed image
available" if processed images are requested and are not available.
InstallationLicenseWarn if running on an installation license, a message will appear on the
ingLabel: screen, obscuring the images. This is a mandatory label.
NotForDiagnosisId: placeholder for a message informing that the image should not be
used for diagnosis.
ImageQualityWarningId: placeholder for a warning about the image quality (if any).
DateLabelId: the date of the image. This is a mandatory label.
NoImageLabelId: the text "No Image" is displayed when no images are available.
BottomTextLabelId: bottom text with further patient information. Visible only if "show
information" is active.
ScaleTextId: gives the scaling information of the image on the screen.
WarningLabelId: placeholder for possible warning messages.
ScaleIndicationId: the scaling of the image. This is a mandatory label.
Note:
Every identifier label can be configured through the tags described in this job card.
2. Name: provides the name of the item. This is a free-text field, which does not affect the configuration
settings.
3. Context id
a. Denotes the following configurable output devices:
Context id Description
MammoViewport default viewport (for mammography images).
MammoScreenshot screenshot from default viewport (useful to hide items).
MammoPrintout printout from default viewport (requires different font size).
ExternalViewport external viewport (special items for non-mammo images).
ExternalScreenshot screen shot from external viewport (not in use yet).
ExternalPrintout printout from external viewport (not in use yet).
ReportEmbeddedIcon rendered icon to be embedded in report (not in use yet).
797
! Notice:
For mandatory items, the context id must be present, otherwise the system will not work properly.
b. Every target id can be individually configured in terms of font, margin and alignment.
Note:
The Context id settings must be present for each target to be supported (otherwise the item is not
displayed).
- Font attributes - are all mandatory (i.e., they need to be assigned a value), except for the
weight:
Size: the font size of the text displayed.

Unit: the measurement unit, which can be set to either "pt" (pixel) or "mm"
(millimeter).
Weight: allowed values: "Light", "Normal", "DemiBold", "Bold". When this is not
assigned a value, then the default setting of the file will be used.
Color: can be set to any of the color keyword names recognized by World Wide
Web Consortium. For more information, please refer to
http://www.w3.org/TR/SVG/types.html#ColorKeywords.
Font the font type must be chosen from an already installed font family.
- Margin: defines the margin with respect to the boundary of the overlay text item.
- The horizontal value gives the minimum distance in pixels to the left and right side of the
overlay text.
- The vertical value gives the minimum distance in pixels to the top and bottom of the overlay
text. This value has meaning only for items that are close to the border given the position
indication.
- Alignment: the following options can be used alone or combined. When a value combination is
used, a comma is required between the values.
AlignAuto: the default leaves the alignment to the internal business logic.
AlignLeft: aligns to the left border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the right.
AlignRight: aligns to the right border, except for Arabic and Hebrew where it aligns to the left.
AlignJustify: produces justified text.
AlignHCenter: aligns horizontally centered.
AlignTop: aligns to the top border.
AlignBottom: aligns to the bottom border.
AlignVCenter: aligns vertically centered.
AlignCenter: aligns both horizontally and vertically centered.
798
4. Defaults type: indicates the type and format attributes.
Allowed values for type: "text" or "date".
Allowed values for - "plain" for text;

format: - "SystemLocaleShortDate" or "SystemLocaleLongDate" for date.
5. Position indication: denotes the position of the overlay information on the screen.
Allowed values: "topLeft", "topCenter", "topRight", "topOpposedToImage", "topNextToImage",

"aboveMidLeft", "aboveMidCenter", "aboveMidRight",
"aboveMidOpposedToImage", "aboveMidNextToImage", "midLeft", "midCenter",
"midRight", "midOpposedToImage", "midNextToImage", "belowMidLeft",
"belowMidCenter", "belowMidRight", "belowMidOpposedToImage",
"belowMidNextToImage", "bottomLeft", "bottomCenter", "bottomRight",
"bottomOpposedToImage", "bottomNextToImage".
- The relation type provides information of where the particular overlay text label is placed in
relation to other labels. More relation types can be added. However, the outcome depends on the
order of the relations given.
Allowed values "above" - places the overlay text label above the text mentioned in this string;
for the relation "below" - places the overlay text label below the text mentioned in this string;
type: "right" - places the overlay text label to the right of the text mentioned in this string;
"left" - places the overlay text label to the left of the text mentioned in this string;
"hide" - hides the given text when there is an overlap with the text mentioned in this
string.
Note:
An overlay text cannot be assigned a fixed location on the screen. This is because other text items
can be assigned the same position by using relation types.
6. Properties: defines the properties of the corresponding OverlayText Id. Currently this is not
configurable. The fields "selectable" and "moveable" should be set to "false".
7. Highlighting: for the following two events:
- undermouse - when the cursor is placed on a certain overlay text, this is modified according to
the configured value;
- imageSelected - when an image is selected, the overlay text corresponding to it changes
according to the value assigned in the file.
Allowed values "fontToBold", "fontToItalic" or "rectangle"

for highlighting:
A combination of these option is also possible by creating extra <highlight> tags.
799
This page is blank.
800
Job Card TSG A06 - X-keys 20 Keypad Troubleshooting
Job Card TSG A06 - X-keys 20 Keypad Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Procedure
In case a key on X-keys 20 does not carry out the action intended, there are several possible reasons:
1. X-keys service not running: the "X-keys Macro Works II" icon not being visible in the system tray
implies that the service is not running.
Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ P.I. Engineering ➜ MacroWorks II and click on MacroWorks II to start
the service.
2. USB port not working
Try a different USB port and restart the X-keys service.
3. Old software version of X-keys (This applies especially to a situation where the IDI workstation was
upgraded and X-keys was not updated).
Open the X-keys GUI - go to Help - about
The version should be 1.0.1.2 or higher
4. The layout loaded is not up to date (This applies especially to a situation where the IDI workstation
was upgraded and X-keys was not updated)
Open a Record / Edit Macro window by pressing a key on the X-keys device.
The code displayed should have the [arrow up] and [arrow down] included. The effect is that a key
(e.g. the "alt" key) is explicitly activated and released at the end of the process.
801
In older x-keys software versions, the insertion of the [arrow up] and [arrow down] was not an
available feature. Therefore, the code contained within the layout looked as follows:
This sometimes resulted in a key (especially the alt key) being blocked within the X-keys application.
Therefore, pressing the key would have no effect.
5. Non existing shortcut.
a. Use the shortcut on the keyboard itself to verify it is working.
b. Open the corresponding Record/Edit Macro window to check whether the code is correct.
For example, pressing alt + q on the keyboard (shortcut to quit the IDI application) should
correspond to this code in the Record/Edit Macro window.
Refer to the last page of the IDI user manual to obtain the list of available shortcuts within the IDI
application.
802
Job Card TSG A22 - X-keys 24 Keypad Troubleshooting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Problem
The Script has not been applied, i.e. the buttons of the keypad in the configuration window are blank
(not check-marked) after following the procedure of section 6 Configuration in Job Card IST C49 -
MacroWorks 3 Keypad Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251:
4 Procedure
It is necessary to copy the complete script and paste it to the device manually:
1. Open the drop-down menu in the MacroWorks3 Graphical User Interface and change the entry in the
drop-down menu from X-keys XK-24 / ID:1 to Virtual / X-keys XK-24.
Change the entry from

X-keys XK-24 / ID:1 to
Virtual / X-keys XK-24
803
2. Click on View ➜ Advanced View.

3. The following window will be displayed:
4. Mark the complete text by using the mouse.

Note:
Pressing Ctrl-A does not work.
5. Press Ctrl-C to copy the complete text.

6. Press [Close] to close the window.
804
7. Open the drop-down menu in the MacroWorks3 Graphical User Interface and change the entry in the
drop-down menu from Virtual / X-keys XK-24 to X-keys XK-24 / ID:1.
Change the entry from

Virtual / X-keys XK-24 to
X-keys XK-24 / ID:1
8. The "Closing Script!" window appears. In the drop-down menu (1) make sure the device X-keys XK-
24 is selected and click [Assign] (2).
1
2
9. The MacroWorks3 Graphical User Interface will be displayed as follows:

Click on View ➜ Advanced View.
805
10. The following window will be displayed:
11. Mark the complete text by using the mouse.

Note:
Pressing Ctrl-A does not work.
806
12. Press DEL to delete the complete text:
13. Press Ctrl-V to paste the text you copied earlier in step 5.
➜ the complete script will be pasted.
14. Press [Build] and the press [Close] to close the window.
15. Return to section 7 Verification of Configuration of Job Card IST C49 - MacroWorks 3 Keypad
Installation for IDI Keypad X-keys 24 on page 251 to verify the configuration.
807
This page is blank.
808
Job Card TSG A23 - Wrong Gray Palette Setting
Job Card TSG A23 - Wrong Gray Palette Setting Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card applies to MWS, which have been upgraded to v.4.6.1 and are running on Windows XP.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Overview
This job card explains how to fix the wrong gray palette settings, if the user detects bad image quality.
Note:
If you are using Windows 7, go to Job Card IST C29 - Installation of Barco 5MP2FH Driver and
QAWeb for Windows 7 on page 285 to install the Barco driver again.
To test if the wrong gray palette settings are the root cause for the poor image quality, do the following:
• Open any series with MG images
• From that series, open the Window Level dialog.
Note:
When the bad image quality is related to the wrong set gray palette, the Window Level dialog looks
like the following (displaying gray lines instead of a smooth gray surface):
Note:
If the grayscale looks completely smooth, the bad image quality is not related to the problem
described in the current job card.
In this case, check for other possible reasons (Monitor calibration, window leveling etc.).
4 Procedure
809
To correct the driver settings:

1. Close all programs (including the MammoWorkstation)
2. From the Desktop right-click menu, select “Properties”.
3. The window “DisplayProperties” will open. Go to the “Settings” tab.
810
4. Mark one of the 5MP monitors and check that in the section “Display” (1) the BarcoMed 5MP2FH is
indicated:
5. Click on the button [Advanced] (2) ➜ the following window will open:
6. Select the tab “BarcoMed Driver”.
811
7. Change the following settings:

In the section “Palette Mode” (1):
- Uncheck the “Static Gray Palette with NO system colors”.
- Check the “Color to Gray Compatibility”.
In the section “Drawing Modes” (2):
- uncheck “Disable RGB to Static Gray Color Translations”.
change
settings
8. Click [OK] ➜ a warning message will pop up.
9. Conform this warning message by clicking [OK].

10. Reboot the system.
812
5 Verification
Check if the settings have been successfully changed:
• Go back to the Graphics-Properties-BarcoMed Driver:
- Go back to Procedure on page 809 and repeat steps 2 to 6.
- Make sure that the settings have been successfully changed.
• Check if the change in settings was successful:
- Start the MammoWorkstation.
- Open on patient with MG images.
- Open the Window Level dialog.
Note:
The Window Level dialog should look like the following:
813
This page is blank.
814
Job Card TSG A25 - Troubleshooting System Lockup
Job Card TSG A25 - Troubleshooting System Lockup Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 5’
3 Introduction
If the system does not respond to commands anymore, please create a dumping process file first and
then contact the next GE service level for assistance. This file contains information that is useful for the
service department to understand what went wrong with the system.
Note:
This procedure can be applied only in Windows 7.
4 Procedure
In order to create a dumping process file, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the taskbar and select Start Task Manager:
815
2. In the Windows Task Manager, go to the Processes tab:
3. Right-click on the MammoWorkstation.exe and select Create Dump File:
816
4. Wait for the file to be saved. A popup window will show where the file is located on disk:
817
This page is blank.
818
Job Card TSG A26 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows 7 Configuration
Job Card TSG A26 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows 7

Configuration Chapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
The current job card describes how to perform a manual configuration of the following topics:
- Windows User Account Creation on page 819
- Firewall on page 822
- Deactivate IPv6 on page 824.
Note:
The following procedures are normally applied automatically during the installation of the IDI
software v. 4.7.0. However, if errors related to these topics occur, these steps must be performed
manually.
4 Windows User Account Creation

Note:
The default account created during Windows installation is an Administrator account. For computer
security reason, a password must be provided for this account.
Also remember that it is possible, on request, to set a BIOS password that prevents any
uncontrolled boot.
! Notice:
Every account must be password protected!
1. Click on Start ➜ right click on Computer ➜ click Manage ➜ expand "Local Users and Groups".
819
2. For new users, right click on "Users" and then on "New User".
Note:
The user name is limited to 20 characters.
3. Set a password:
• Select "Users" and highlight the desired user.
• Right click the user and click "Set password".
• Confirm query by clicking [Proceed].

• Click [OK].
! Notice:
To avoid unauthorized access to any MammoWorkstation, one of the following security features
must be activated on all user accounts:
- Feature 1: the current user account is locked when inactive for 30 min:
a. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Appearance and Personalization.
b. Under Personalization click "Change Screen Saver".
820
Note:
For a four monitor setup it is recommended to set the screen saver to blank.
c. Checkmark the box: On resume, display logon screen.
- Feature 2: Press the keys [Windows + L] when leaving the room.
4. Activate Administrator account and set password:

• Activate Administrator account:
- Select Start ➜ right click on Computer - click on Manage.
- Expand "Local Users and Groups".
- Select "Users" and highlight Administrator.
- Right click on Administrator and select Properties.
- Uncheck "Account is disabled".
• Set password for Administrator account:
- Right click on Administrator.
- Select "Set Password".
- Confirm query to proceed.
Note:
For Administrator, choose password "operator".
5. Logout from the session:

• Select Start.
• Select the arrow button next to the [Shut down] button.
• Select Log Off.
• The new user account should appear as well as the Administrator account.
6. Login to the user account.
821
5 Firewall
1. It is recommended to turn off the firewall.
a. To turn off the firewall, select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security ➜ Windows Firewall.
b. On the left side click "Turn windows firewall on or off".
c. Set all location settings to "Turn off Windows Firewall (not recommended)".
2. If the customer requires the firewall to remain active, make sure the following TCP ports are open:
TCP Ports to keep open
104 DICOM storage
4005 DICOM worklist
8080 Support interface
5900 VNC, Remote Desktop Tool
3389 RDP, Remote Desktop Protocol
9090 Internal remote control server (not configurable)
59717 Internal cache message server (not configurable)
27778 Postgres SQL
27777 Remote Control Registry
27505 Dakota Client Service
To open a port through the firewall, perform the following steps for each port:
a. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ System and Security ➜ Windows Firewall.
b. On the left side click "Advanced settings".
822
c. On the left side select "Inbound Rules".

d. On the right side select "New Rule".
e. Select "Port" and click [Next].

f. Insert the port number and click [Next].
g. Keep setting "Allow the connection" and click [Next].

h. Select the Profile according to customer's need and click [Next].
i. Enter the Name and Description (optional) of your created rule.
j. Click [Finish].
823
Note:
If the customer requires the firewall to remain active, make sure that the system passes the
acceptance test. See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
6 Deactivate IPv6
To this date, IDI MammoWorkstation is not compatible with the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6). The
IPv6 must therefore be deactivated:
Note:
To deactivate IPv6 you must be a Member of the Administrator Group or at least have permission
to edit the Windows registry.
! Notice:
Since serious problems may occur if the registry was modified incorrectly, back up the registry
before modifying it. If any problem occurs after modifying the Windows registry, restore it with the
backup version. For detailed information on how to back up the Windows registry, refer to:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/322756/en-us.
Temporary solution
1. Open the Local Area Network Status window and click on [Properties].
2. Uncheck the box next to The Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6).
Note:
The IPv6 will be enabled again whenever the system is restarted.
! Notice:
Since no procedure to deactivate IPv6 on Windows 7 has been validated so far, the following
procedure can only be a suggestion. Check every modification on Windows registry with your
Network Administrator.
Permanent solution
1. Open the registry editor by clicking Start ➜ Run, type regedit ➜ click [OK].
2. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM ➜ CurrentControlSet ➜ services ➜ TCPIP6 ➜
Parameters key.
3. Right-click on [Parameters] on the left side. Select New ➜ DWORD (32-bit) Value.
4. Name the value as DisabledComponents.
5. Set the value to 0x20 to use IPv4 instead of IPv6 in prefix policies.
6. Click [OK].
7. Reboot the system.
8. After reboot, follow the steps described in the Temporary solution.
Validation:
Open the Local Area Network Status window and click on [Properties]. The box next to Internet Protocol
Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) should be unchecked.
Note:
For further information on how to disable the IPv6 permanently, refer to:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/929852.
824
Job Card TSG A27 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows XP Configuration
Job Card TSG A27 - Post-installation Checks of the Windows XP ConfigurationChapter 11
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10’
3 Introduction
The current job card describes how to perform a manual configuration of the following topics:
- Windows User Account Creation on page 825
- Firewall on page 829
- Deactivate IPv6 on page 831.
Note:
The following procedures are normally applied automatically during the installation of the IDI
software v. 4.7.0. However, if errors related to these topics occur, these steps must be performed
manually.
4 Windows User Account Creation

! Notice:
The default account created during Windows installation is the Administrator account. For
computer security reason, a password must be provided to this account. In addition, a "standard
user" account must be created (the "standard user" account will have most of the Administrator
rights). Every account must be password protected.
Also remember that it is possible, on request, to set a BIOS password that prevents any
uncontrolled boot.
825
1. Click on Start ➜ right-click on My Computer ➜ Manage ➜ "Local Users and Groups".
2. Right click on "Users" and then on "New User".

3. Fill in the details (choose a generic user name e.g. "ImageDiagnost").
4. Set a password e.g. "idi" .

5. Uncheck "User must change password at next logon" .
6. Check only "Password never expires" and click [Create].
Note:
User name is limited to 20 characters.
826
7. Assign admin rights: right click on the user that has just been created and select "Properties".
8. Go to tab “Member Of” and click [Add].
9. In the Select Groups window, type "Administrators" and click on the button [Check Names] to
make sure there is no typing error.
! Notice:
To avoid unauthorized access to any MammoWorkstation, one of the following security features
must be activated on all user accounts:
- Auto-logoff: the current user is logged-off when inactive for 30 min.:
a. Select Start ➜ Control Panel (switch to classic view) ➜ Display.
b. On tab Screen Saver, choose a screen saver.
Note:
For a four monitor setup it is recommended to set the screen saver to blank.
c. Checkmark the box On resume, display the welcome screen / On resume, password protect.
- Press the keys [Windows + L] when leaving the room.
827
10. Setting Administrator password:

Right click on Name “Administrator” and select “Set Password.”
Note:
For Administrator, choose password “operator”.
11. Logout from the session: Select Start ➜ Log Off, click [Log Off].
The new user account should appear and the Administrator account should have disappeared.
12. Login to the new account.
828
5 Firewall
1. It is recommended to turn off the firewall.
a. To turn off the firewall, select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Windows Firewall - tab "General".
b. Select "Off".
2. However, if the customer requires the firewall to remain active, make sure that the following ports are
open:
TCP Ports to keep open
104 DICOM storage
4005 DICOM worklist
8080 Support interface
5900 VNC, Remote Desktop Tool
3389 RDP, Remote Desktop Protocol
9090 Internal remote control server (not configu-

rable)
59717 Internal cache message server (not

configurable)
27778 Postgres SQL
27777 Remote Control Registry
27505 Dakota Client Service
829
To open a port through the firewall, perform the following steps for each port:
a. Select Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Windows Firewall - tab "Exceptions".
b. Click on [Add Port].
c. Enter the name and port number of the port to keep open and select "TCP".
Note:
If the customer requires the firewall to remain active, make sure that the system passes the
acceptance test. See Job Card IST A32 - Acceptance Test on page 473.
830
6 Deactivate IPv6
To this date, IDI MammoWorkstation is not compatible with Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6).
IPv6 must therefore be deactivated:
Note:
To deactivate IPv6 you must be a Member of the Administrator Group or at least have permission
to edit the Windows registry.
1. Go to Start ➜ Run, type cmd ➜ click [OK].

2. Execute the command: >netsh int ipv6 uninstall
3. Press [Enter].
Note:
For further information on how to deactivate IPv6 refer to:
http://support.microsoft.com/?scid=kb%3Ben-us%3B555577.
831
This page is blank.
832
Job Card TSG M30 - Worklist Error after Upgrade from 4.6.0 to 4.7.0
Job Card TSG M30 - Worklist Error after Upgrade from 4.6.0 to 4.7.0 Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card applies to upgrades from v.4.6.0 to v.4.7.0.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’

When the IDI services are restarted after an update from v.4.6.0 to v.4.7.0, the query to external worklist
providers may fail. The IDI application will display the following pop-up message:
Note:
This issue is likely to occur if an external worklist provider has been configured before or after the
4.7.0 upgrade procedure.
4 Solution
To resolve the issue, it is recommended to do one of the following:
1. Restart the system, or
2. Restart the IDI services:
- go to the Support Interface.
- click on [Restart Server].
5 Verification
1. Open the IDI application.
2. Select the worklist icon referring to an external worklist provider.
3. Apply the filter criteria – e.g. “from today.”
833
Job Card TSG M30 - Worklist Error after Upgrade from 4.6.0 to 4.7.0
4. Click on [Update].
5. Worklist is visible in the patient manager.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 until all configured worklist items in the [Data Source] have been verified.
834
Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI Software Upgrade
Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI Software
Upgrade Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card applies to any update from v.4.6.0 and below - to v.4.6.1 or above.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’

After upgrading the IDI software to v.4.6.1 or above, an error might occur while performing the database
migration (according to Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks).
This is caused by a difference in the database tables used by MySQL (v.4.6.0 and below) and
PostgreSQL (v.4.6.1 and above). Therefore, a table must be manually created, in order for the system to
retain the table structure information.
4 Solution
2. Click on [Workflow SQL Gateway]:
3. Click on [Show Query List].

4. In the field Query name, enter: ABCD
835
Job Card TSG M31 - Database Migration Error after IDI Software Upgrade
5. Click on [Save Query] to save it and create the table structure.
6. From the Query List (workflow), delete the newly created query “ABCD”:
7. Repeat the Database Migration steps described in Job Card UPG A08 - Post-Upgrade Checks,
section 3 Database Migration.
5 Verification
If no error pops up while executing the IDImysql2postgres.exe file, then issue has been solved.
836
Job Card TSG C32 - Error Message of Missing Configuration Files
Job Card TSG C32 - Error Message of Missing Configuration Files Chapter 11
1 Applicability
This job card discusses an error message of missing configuration files, which is likely to occur on
versions 4.6.1 and higher.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 15’

Starting with the 4.6.1 release, the configuration files are automatically backed up on the restore.dmp
file, which is located here: %IDI_HOME%\backups\
As a safety measure, every time the IDI software is launched, the system checks if this backup file
exists.
1. If the file does not exist → a new file is created with a backup of all configuration files from
%IDI_HOME%\config and its sub-folders.
2. If the file exists → a comparative analysis is run between the configuration files already backed up
(%IDI_HOME%\backups\ ) and the actual files which are available in the configuration folder
(%IDI_HOME%\config).
- If there are file differences between the backups and the config folders (meaning some
configuration files have been removed), the software would not start and the following error-
message will be displayed:
837
4 Solution
4-1 General Solution
The following steps can be followed when this error message is displayed, or if the configuration files
have been changed, in order to avoid this error.
- Rename the current %IDI_HOME%\backups\restore.dmp to:
%iDI_HOME%\backups\restore_[DateStamp].dmp.
- The next time the IDI software is launched, a new backup file will be automatically created.
4-2 Special Cases

4-2-1 Missing Configuration Files from backups Folder
- If some of the configuration files have been deleted from the config folder, they can be restored by
executing %IDI_HOME%\MammoWorkstation\ConfigRecovery\configrecovery.exe
- The executable will inform of what files had been missing and which have been restored.
4-2-2 Use of Case Collections

- If case collections are used on a regular basis, this error message will occur when one of the case
collections is deleted, but it still appears in the backups folder.
- To prevent this from happening, proceed as follows:
1. Move the folder PersonalLists located at: %IDI_HOME%\config\ to the following address:
%IDI_HOME%\custom\
3. Click on the Configuration Folder and edit the MammoWorkstation.ini file.
4. Under the section [PersonalLists], look for the following tag:

DefaultDir = ..\config\PersonalLists
838
5. Replace the word “config” with “custom”:

DefaultDir = ..\custom\PersonalLists
6. Go to C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost\backups\ and delete the restore.dmp file.

! Notice:
If the PatientListImporter tool is used, its corresponding paths must also be updated according to
the changes made above.
5 Verification
To check if the issue still exists, at least one configuration file must be deleted, so the backups and the
config folders would not have the same content anymore. For safety reasons, the following steps can be
used for verification:
1. Start the IDI software.
839
2. Create several case collections.

→ on the Control Monitor, go to the Case Collections tab and create several new (empty) cases, by
clicking on the [+] button:
3. Exit the IDI software.

4. Go to C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost\backups\
5. Delete the restore.dmp file.
6. Login to and then exit the IDI software.

7. Login again to the IDI software.
8. Remove one of the case collections by using the [-] button.
9. Exit the IDI software and login again.
10. The error should not be displayed anymore and the software is launched.
840
Job Card TSG C33 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service
Job Card TSG C33 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service Chapter 11
1 Applicability
MammoWorkstation systems with a PACS Viewer license (Universal Viewer integration).
1 Field Engineer
Time:
The Dakota Client Service is used to receive DICOM data through the Universal Viewer interface.
The standard TCP/IP port configured for the communication between the Dakota Client Service and the
MammoWorkstation is port 27505. Check with your network administrator whether another application is
using this port. If your network administrator detects a possible conflict, then follow the procedure
described in this job card to change the port assigned to the Dakota Client Service.
! Notice:
changes:
Note:
4 Configuration
In case the port needs to be changed, proceed as follows:
c. Edit the IDDakotaService.xml
d. Look for the following tag <listen_port>27505</listen_port>

e. Change the value of the port.
f. Save the .xml file.
841
Job Card TSG C33 - Port Reassignment for Dakota Client Service
g. Restart the Apache Tomcat service.
h. Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage ➜ Services and Applications ➜ Services.

i. Restart the IDDakotaService.
842
Tips
Tips Chapter 11
1 How to Adjust the Number of "Active Sent SCU"

• The standard number of simultaneous targets to which images are pushed is 3 (priorities are set in
the routing rule).
• On a Gigabit network, this number can be increased to 4 or 5.
• To do this, edit file CcConf.xml, locate line: "Max number of active send SCU" and modify the
number.
• Restart the IDI application.
2 How to Test if a Rule Is Not Rejected by a PACS

• Open a DOS command window and apply this command (apply adequate AET’s, IP & port #, AET’s
are case sensitive!).
• sendscu -a DISTRIB_IMAGE -r GEPACS -n 10.200.100.55 -p 4100 -e
• Answer should be: C-ECHO | 0 | Success
3 MWS LUT Settings

• Interpolation must be "Bilinear" for GE images
• LUT must be "sigmoid" type
• LUT must be set while viewing a real GE image!
• Image identifiers are defined in: WindowLevelConfig.xml
4 How to Determine where the Images Are Viewed

• Images viewers are defined in: ImageTypeConfig.xml.
• Viewport can be "STD" (review LCD) or "EXT" (control LCD).
• This setting is also the filter for Query/Retrieve (that’s why there is no CT retrieve by default).
5 How to Not Open the "Image folder" by Default

• To do this, edit config file MammoWorkstation.ini.
• Locate section [ModalitySettings].
• Change variable "ShowImageFolder" from 1 to 0 (the folder remains openable on demand).
Note:
Do not confuse with "ImgViewerEnabled"!
6 How to Display Raw Images on a MWS

This can be necessary for Quality Control checks. To do this:
• Edit config file MammoWorkstation.ini.
• Locate section [ModalitySettings].
• Add line "ShowRawImages = 1" at the end of the section.
• Save file changes and restart the IDI application.
843
Tips
7 How to Manually Remove a Service

• Open a command prompt: click Start ➜ Run and type "cmd".
• Type the following into the command line:
sc delete IDDicomReceiveSCP (for instance)
• A message "Success" confirms the deletion of the service.
8 How to Correct Patient Demographics

DICOM files should always be corrected at the PACS archive. This is the only way to guarantee that
changes are stored permanently.
MammoWorkstation allows correction of DICOM files:
1. Login to the configuration interface and select the tab "Routing".
2. Create a new rule.
3. Select "Change DICOM Header" and select [New] to create a new “Change DICOM Header Rule”.
4. Enter a precondition, for example the patient ID of the files to be corrected. Use “*” as a wildcard.
5. In “Change DICOM Header” define the new values. Use “*” in the value-field to copy the original
value. This enables to create a prefix or a postfix.
6. From the MammoWorkstation, send the case to the rule.
The files will be corrected and imported to the MammoWorkstation.
! Notice:
MammoWorkstation does not allow duplicate files. For corrected files to be imported, the patient
ID, the study instance UID, the series instance UID or the document instance UID must be
changed. Otherwise the files are rejected as duplicates.
9 How to Display Raw Data

Note:
Raw data ("DICOM for processing") shall not be displayed to the radiologist, as it is not approved
for diagnostic reading. It may only be displayed for quality control purposes.
1. Logout and quit MammoWorkstation application.

2. Edit the config file MammoWorkstation.ini.
3. Add/edit the following line in the section [ModalitySettings] of MammoWorkstation.ini:
ShowRawImages = 1
4. Start MammoWorkstation and login. MammoWorkstation now displays all available raw data.
5. Perform QC tasks.
6. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Remove the above line from MammoWorkstation.ini or change it to:
ShowRawImages = 0
Validation:
• Start MammoWorkstation and select a case that contains raw images.
• Open the case and check that only processed images are displayed.
844
Tips
10 Cache Status Indicator

Starting with MammoWorkstation release 4.6.1, it is possible to show the fill indicator of the cache:
To display this fill indicator in the MammoWorkstation in the Patient Manager:

3. Edit the MammoWorkstation.ini
• Enable the Cache fill indicator:
a. Look for the following tag:
ShowCacheUsage = 0
b. To enable the Cache fill indicator, set the value to 1
➜ ShowCacheUsage = 1
• Set the update interval:
a. Look for the tag:
CacheUsageUpdateInterval = 600000
b. Set the value of this tag to an appropriate time interval after which the cache fill indicator shall
be updated.
Note:
The time interval is indicated in milliseconds, i.e. 600000 milliseconds correspond to 10 minutes.
11 Wildcard Matching Possible in ImageTypeConfig.xml and

WindowLevelConfig.xml
Always use valuemask instead of value when you are inserting the wildcard "*" in the
WindowLevelConfig.xml or in the ImageTypeConfig.xml.
<tag id ="00080070" valuemask="GE*"/>

➜ All Studies from GE are taken into account.
<tag id ="00080070" value="GE Senographe 2000 DS"/>
➜ Only Studies from GE Senographe 2000 DS are taken into account.
845
Tips
This page is blank.
846
Planned Maintenance
Chapter 12 Planned Maintenance

All recommended planned maintenance tasks for the IDI are listed below. The corresponding Job Cards
and manuals which are necessary are indicated.
1 Planned Maintenance Steering Guide
Action Reference Timing Interval Done?

(months)
1. Clean review monitors and Job Card PM A02 - Cleaning / 5’ 12

keyboard Checking Monitors and Keyboard
on page 849
2. Check PC fan and clean the dust NA 10’ 12
3. Check and set viewing conditions NA 5’ 12
4. Check luminance of the reading Job Card IST A28 - Ambient Light 10’ 12
room and compliance of the Measurement on page 325
monitors
5. Luminance Measurement Check Job Card PM A04 - Luminance 20’ check
Measurement Check on page 851 regulation
6. Calibrate the review monitors Job Card IST A30 - Barco Monitors 30’ 12
Calibration on page 331
7. Reboot all PCs NA 10’ 12
8. Backup or Restore of IDI Job Card PM M05 - Backup or 30’ 12

Systems Restore of IDI Systems on
page 853
9. Backup of the configuration folder Job Card IST A34 - Backup of the 15’ 12
Configuration Folder on page 479
847 Chapter 12
Planned Maintenance
This page is blank.
Chapter 12 848
Job Card PM A02 - Cleaning / Checking Monitors and Keyboard
Job Card PM A02 - Cleaning / Checking Monitors and Keyboard Chapter 12
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all monitors and all keypads.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 10
3 Tools
• Dry, soft, lint-free cloth or cleaning tissue.
• Water or 25% solution of either ethanol or isopropyl alcohol in clean water.
WARNING
Never apply water or other fluids directly to electronic equipment.
4 Prerequisites
WARNING
Shut down the workstation and its peripherals before cleaning.
5 Procedure
5-1 Cleaning Procedure
1. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the monitor screen and housing to remove dust, fingerprints and other
marks. If necessary, moisten the cloth with either clean water or ethyl alcohol (up to 96%).
2. Check the screen to verify that it is clean.
3. Clean the keyboard.
Note:
Do not allow any drops of cleaning liquid to remain on the surface; extended contact may cause
discoloration of the surface.
! Notice:
Do not use isopropyl ("rubbing") alcohol.
Do not use cleaning agents which attack the surface, such as petroleum (mineral) spirits.
The front panel is extremely sensitive to mechanical damage. Avoid all scratches, knocks, etc.
Do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the monitor housing or screen.
Be sure to dampen the cloth sparingly.
WARNING
Do not allow the cleaning liquid to enter the monitor housing or keyboard.
5-2 Cables - Visual Checks

Verify the integrity of the power cable and any external cable connections to the peripheral devices.
849
Job Card PM A02 - Cleaning / Checking Monitors and Keyboard
This page is blank.
850
Job Card PM A04 - Luminance Measurement Check
Job Card PM A04 - Luminance Measurement Check Chapter 12
1 Applicability
This job card applies to all Eizo review monitors.
1 Field Engineer
Time: 20’
3 Time Interval
This procedure is subject to local regulation. Please make sure to check which time interval is required in
your country and plan it accordingly.
4 Viewing Conditions Check and Setting

4-1 Objective
• Ensure optimal viewing conditions.
4-2 Tools Required

• Illuminance meter with a minimum resolution of 5 Lux.
• Chart of baseline luminance levels (provided by the Field Engineer after a monitor calibration done
according to Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors Calibration Baselines on page 357).
4-3 Procedure
1. Fill in the baseline luminance levels.
2. Follow the instructions in section 6 Calibration Procedure of Job Card IST A72 - Eizo Monitors
Calibration Baselines on page 357.
3. The tolerances in cd/m2 are provided for each of the five measurement points. The target value is to
be taken according to the baseline measurement made just after the latest calibration.
- The L10 luminance level of each monitor must be within ± 0.5 cd/m2 of the baseline measurement,
- the L60 luminance level of each monitor must be within ± 1 cd/m2 of the baseline measurement,
- the L255 luminance level of each monitor must be within ± 10 cd/m2 of the baseline measurement.
! Notice:
If the system fails the test, the failing measurement shall be retried. If a monitor fails only at the L10
luminance level, first ensure that the ambient illuminance level requirement is met, then repeat the
measurement.
If the failure persists, the source of the problem must be identified and corrective action must be
taken within 30 days of the test date.
851
Job Card PM A04 - Luminance Measurement Check
Chart "Luminance Check" for EIZO 5MP review monitors.

Facility:
Room:
Date:
Luminance Units:
Date of Baseline Setting: Date of QC Measurement:

Baseline Luminance Luminance Measurements
Luminance Left monitor Right monitor Left monitor Pass/Fail? Right monitor Pass/Fail?
level
L10
L60
L120
L180
L255
852
Job Card PM M05 - Backup or Restore of IDI Systems
Job Card PM M05 - Backup or Restore of IDI Systems Chapter 12
1 Applicability
This job card applies only to systems in Europe!
1 Field Engineer
Time: 30’
3 Overview
This job card describes a backup-and-restore procedure for the operating system hard disk of IDI
systems. This procedure should be followed for any of the following cases:
- Backup in case of software issues.
- Restore the backup after replacement of the entire workstation.
Note:
For license purposes, the restore and backup is limited to the same hardware setup and same GE
system ID.
- Restore the backup after replacement of the operating system hard disk.
Limitation: this applies only when the new hard disk has at least the same size as the one to be
replaced.
4 Requirements
The backup-and-restore has to be performed with the following tools and spare parts:
Source Description
FRU 2419998 10x DVD -R MEDIA WRITE SPEED X4-X16 4.7G
IDI Service Community Acronis True Image 9
5 Preparation
A. Steps performed prior to the customer visit:
1. Order the DVD kit (FRU 2419998).

Note:
The following step requires a GE network connection.
2. Download the ISO image of the Backup and recovery software Acronis True Image 9 from the
following GE folder:
853
- http://libraries.ge.com/foldersIndex.do?entity_id=27633630101&sid=101&SF=1#27633630101:
B. Steps performed on the site:
1. All patient-related information has to be removed prior to the backup.

a. Remove all patient data from the following folders:
- C:\%Program Files%\ImageDiagnost\log\<all_logfiles>
- C:\Temp\attachments\
- C:\Temp\hl7
- C:\Temp\pdfexport
b. It is mandatory to delete all patient information in the database prior to the backup.
! Notice:
After performing this step, there will be no more patient data visible in the IDI system’s Patient
Manager.
Note:
After the following steps were performed, a database rebuild is necessary.
Clean-up Cache Database:

- Create a new folder on D: partition "dbcache_temp"
- Login to IDI Settings and change the dbcache path to: D:\dbcache_temp
- Go to Start ➜ All programs ➜ ImageDiagnost ➜ Tools ➜ Rebuild Database
- Click on the "Rebuild database" button.
- Login to IDI Settings and change the dbcache path to the original dbcache folder (e.g.
D:\dbcache)
- Delete the folder "dbcache_temp" on D: partition.
c. Remove all the data from the worklist database.
854
WARNING
The ClearLocalWorklist.bat deletes the full history of the worklist items, and it cannot
thereafter be restored. Please contact the next GE service level for an Acronis backup of a
MammoWorkstation (stand-alone) or of a Collaboration Server.
- Run the batch file ClearLocalWorklist.bat
(C:\Program Files (x86)\ImageDiagnost\CollaborationServer\Tools) to remove all available
worklist tasks in the internal database.
2. Use one of the shipped DVDs and create a bootable medium with the Acronis ISO file:
d. Windows 7 offers an integrated Disc Image Burner for that:
- right-click on the Acronis ISO file and choose Burn disk image;
- check the option “Verify disc after burning”:.
e. For Windows XP: a common burning software (e.g. Nero Burning Rom) is required in order to
create the Acronis True image media. Open the burner software and follow its specific steps.
- Once the burning is completed, make sure to label the DVD.
6 Backup Procedure
1. Switch unit on.
2. Launch the BOOT MENU by pressing F9 during the HP start-up screen is visible.
855
3. Insert ACRONIS True Image medium/DVD.

4. Boot up the unit from the Optical Drive.
5. Wait until Acronis starts:
6. Select Backup in the main screen:
856
7. Click Next:
8. Select My Computer and click Next:
9. Select Disk 1 (all partitions of the Disk 1 will be selected) and click Next.
857
! Notice:
Do not back up the partition including the dbcache or any patient data!
858
10. Select partition D: of the workstation.

11. Create a folder named “Acronis_System_Backup”.
12. Define the name of the backup file inside the newly created folder:
Recommended format: YYMMDD_<GE-SystemName>_<CustomerName> *
*YYMMDD meaning Year/Month/Day
13. Select Create a new full backup archive and click Next:
859
14. Select Archive protection and enter the password 1dsupp0rt:
15. Click Compression level, select Normal and then go to Additional Settings
860
16. From Additional settings, select:

• Validate backup archive upon its creation completion and
• Ask for first media while creating backup archives on removable media.
17. After checking these two options, click Next:
18. Add a detailed description of the system environment including hardware components, the Serial
Numbers of the control monitor, the Barco review monitors and Z800 Workstation. Click Next:
861
19. Start the backup process:
20. When the backup process is completed, reboot the system.

21. A new database rebuild is required:
- Go to Start ➜ All programs ➜ ImageDiagnost ➜ Tools ➜ Rebuild Database
- Click on the "Rebuild database" button.
7 Restore Procedure
1. Switch unit on.
2. Launch the BOOT MENU by pressing F9.
3. Insert ACRONIS True Image medium.
4. Boot up the unit from the Optical Drive:
862
5. Wait until Acronis starts:
6. Select Recovery in the main screen.
7. Click Next:.
863
8. Select the .TIB file from D:\Acronis_system_backup and click Next:
9. Enter the password created in step 14 and click Next:
864
10. Select Restore disks or partitions and click Next:
11. Select Disk 1 (size: ~250GB) and click Next:
865
12. Select No, I do not want to resize partitions:
13. Select the Disk 1 in the Restored Hard disk Drive Location window and click Next:
866
14. Select Yes, I want to delete all the partitions on the destination hard disk drive before restoring and
click Next:
15. Select No, I do not and click Next:
867
16. Start the restore by clicking on the Proceed button:
17. When the restore is completed, reboot the system.

Note:
The Restore process should take about 20 minutes.
868
8 Reactivate Foreign Partition(s)

After a backup restore, the partitions of additional hard disks (e.g., D partition – cache drive) may not be
available anymore. This situation is likely to occur when the backup has been restored on a different
workstation unit.
Note:
By following this procedure, the data on the D: partition will not be lost.
1. Open My Computer and check if the D: partition is visible.

2. If the cache drive is not available, right-click on My Computer → Manage.
3. Select Disk Management from Computer Management.
4. Disk 1 and Disk 2 are detected as Dynamic - Foreign.
869
5. Right-click on one of the disks and select Import Foreign Disks:
6. From the pop-up window, select the foreign disk group and click [OK]:
7. From the next window, select the foreign disk volume and click [OK]:
870
8. The disks have been reactivated:
871
9 IDI Application dbcache Sync after Restore
After the operating system hard disk drive was restored, the available data in dbcache and the
references in the IDI Database are out of sync. Please follow this mandatory procedure to rebuild the
database:
1. Start-up the IDI system.

2. Check with the customer whether the data in the cache should be kept. Also, inform the customer
that cache could be corrupt.
A. If the customer would like to keep the dbcache folder, go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ ImageDiagnost -
Tools ➜ Rebuild Database and click on the Start button [the rebuild procedure could take up to 10
hours, depending on the size of the dbcache folder].
B. If the dbcache data can be removed:
a. Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage ➜ Computer Management ➜ Services and
Applications ➜ Services and stop the following services: ApacheTomcat, IDReceiveSCP,
IDWorklistSCP and IDDatabase (v4.6.1 and higher) or MySQL (v4.6.0 and below);
b. Delete the dbcache folder on the D drive;

c. Create a new dbcache folder on the D Drive;
d. Right-click on the Computer icon ➜ Manage ➜ Computer Management ➜ Services and
Applications ➜ Services and start the services ApacheTomcat, IDReceiveSCP, IDWorklistSCP
and IDDatabase (v4.6.1 and higher) or MySQL (v4.6.0 and below);
872
e. Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ ImageDiagnost ➜ Tools ➜ Rebuild Database and click on the Start
button.
Note:
In case a worklist broker is configured and is actively running, the IDI system will automatically
query the worklist from the worklist provider or the RIS system according to the configuration or
the filter options.
10 Verification
After either the backup or restore procedure was finished, please verify if no error messages appear.
No matter the result, fill in the Acceptance Test from the IDI Software DVD (see Job Card IST A32 -
Acceptance Test).
873
This page is blank.
874
Uninstallation Job Card UIST A01 - IDI Applications Uninstallation
Chapter 13 Uninstallation
Job Card UIST A01 - IDI Applications Uninstallation
1 Applicability
1 Field Engineer
3 Stop IDI Relevant Services

1. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Administrative Tools ➜ Services
A window with all installed services will appear.
2. Stop (1):
- ApacheTomcat6forIDI
Note:
Stopping the ApacheTomcat6forIDI will also stop IDDicomReceiveSCP, IDDicomWorklistSCP and
IDDakotaClientService. Confirm message with [Yes]:
- for versions 4.6.0 and below: also stop MySql;

- for versions 4.6.1 or higher: IDDatabase,
875 Chapter 13
- for versions 4.6.1 and below: also stop IDDicomWorklistSCP, IDDicomReceiveSCP,

IDRMIRegistry.
4 Stop MWSTray
The MWSTray can be stopped in two ways:
1. right-click on the MWSTray icon in the taskbar and click on [Exit]
OR:
2. - open the Task Manager:
- Press [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Esc]
or
- Go to Start ➜ Run, type "taskmgr" and click [OK].
- Go to the tab Processes;
- Make sure the box next to Show processes from all users is checked (1);
- Look for all processes where the column "Image Name" contains "MWSTray.exe";
- Right click on each MWSTray.exe and select End Process Tree (2);
Chapter 13 876
5 Software Uninstallation
5-1 Windows XP:
1. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel ➜ Add or Remove Programs.
2. Select "Image Diagnost Software XXX" and click the button [Change/Remove].
Note:
For version 4.6.1 and higher, select "MammoWorkstation 4.x.x" and click the button [Change/
Remove].
3. For versions below 4.6.1: Proceed accordingly with "MySQL".

5-2 Windows 7:
1. Go to Start ➜ Control Panel On the Control Panels, select "View by: Small icons".
2. Go to Programs and Features.

3. Select "Image Diagnost Software XXX" and click the button [Uninstall/Change].
877 Chapter 13
Note:
For version 4.6.1 or higher, select "MammoWorkstation 4.x.x" and click the button [Uninstall/
Change].
For versions below 4.6.1: Proceed accordingly with "MySQL".

6 Manual Deletion
1. Delete the Workstation Cache (folder dbcache) manually.
! Notice:
This is very important for data protection reasons.
In case you want to dispose of the hard-disk, be aware that deleting data or even formatting the
hard-disk won’t actually erase the data. It is still there and accessible to most file recovery
programs. Only when new data is written to the hard-disk, the old data is permanently wiped.
Windows does not provide any tool to do this, so procure an appropriate tool on the internet.
2. For software versions below 4.6.1:
a. Delete the Database service manually:
- Click on Start ➜ Run, type in "cmd" and hit [Enter].
- type in "sc delete MySql" ➜ the following success message should be displayed:
b. Delete the database:

- delete the C:\mysql folder manually.
c. Delete the %IDI_Home% folder manually.
d. Delete the C:\WINDOWS\my.ini file manually.
3. Delete the C:\TEMP\pdfexport folder manually.
Chapter 13 878
4. Delete all MWS related icons:

a. Delete MWS desktop icon
b. Delete MWS shortcut icon:
- Go to Start ➜ All Programs ➜ Image Diagnost
- Right click on the icon you want to delete.
- Select "Delete" in the opened dialog.
c. Delete MWS quick access icon:
- Expand the quick access bar (next to the [Start] button) by clicking on the "double greater-
than sign."
- Right click on the icon you want to delete and select "Delete".
d. Delete MWS icon in the Start dialog:
- Click on [Start] ➜ a dialog window opens.
- Right click on the Icon you want to delete and select "Remove from This List".
7 Verification
Manually check that all MammoWorkstation services are removed:
1. Go to Control Panel ➜ Administrative Tools ➜ Services.
2. The services "ApacheTomcat6forIDI," "IDDicomReceiveSCP," "IDDakotaClientService" and
"IDDicomWorklistSCP" must be removed.
For further information, see How to Manually Remove a Service on page 844.
879 Chapter 13
This page is blank.
Chapter 13 880
This page is blank.
To contact your local GE representative, please go to:

http://www.gehealthcare.com/helpcenter.html
China Service Agent Address:

GE Medical Systems Trade & Development (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. (Building 1, 96 Yiwei Road, Wai
Gaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Shanghai, China, 200131)
Service Call Center: 800-810-8188
通用电气医疗系统贸易发展（上海）有限公司 ( 中国上海外高桥保税区意威路 96 号 1 幢，邮编 200131)
售后服务热线：800-810-8188
For the most recent China Service Agent information, please go to:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/cnzh/contact/address.html
Manufacturing site:
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS SCS
283 RUE DE LA MINIERE
78530 BUC FRANCE
IMAGE DIAGNOST INTERNATIONAL

OSKAR-SCHLEMMER-STRASSE 11
80807 MUNICH GERMANY
882

IDI_SM_M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IDI_SM_M

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IDI_SM_M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Image Diagnost International

Service Manual Revision 1

Service Manual Revision 1

Chapter 2: Publication Presentation

Chapter 3: Proprietary Considerations

Chapter 5: Renewal Part List

Service Manual Revision 1

Job Card IST A45 - Windows 7 Configuration for IDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Service Manual Revision 1

Chapter 9: Advanced Configuration

Service Manual Revision 1

Job Card CFG C36 - XDT/GDT Export of Imaging Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10: Upgrade

Service Manual Revision 1

Chapter 11: Corrective Maintenance

Chapter 12: Planned Maintenance

Chapter 13: Uninstallation

Service Manual Revision 1

Job Card UIST A01 - IDI Applications Uninstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875

Service Manual Revision 1

- Language Warnings on page 11

Service Manual Revision 1

This page is blank.

Service Manual Revision 1

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

Service Manual Revision 1

ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

Service Manual Revision 1

ATTENTION Ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance est disponible

Service Manual Revision 1

AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua

Service Manual Revision 1

ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

Service Manual Revision 1

ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию

Service Manual Revision 1

OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

Service Manual Revision 1

This page is blank.

Service Manual Revision 1

Definition of Warnings and Notes

Definition of Warnings and Notes

Service Manual Revision 1

Definition of Warnings and Notes

This page is blank.

Service Manual Revision 1

Chapter 2 Publication Presentation

Job Cards and Scenarios Categories

Code Definition Scope

PRE Pre-installation Includes room preparation, electrical cabling, etc.

IST Installation First installation on customer site. Physical and software

CFG Configuration First installation on customer site. IDI software configuration.

DC Data Correction Manual modification of data.

PM Planned Maintenance Specifies planned maintenance procedures and their frequency.

UIST Uninstallation Describes on-site uninstallation procedures.

Service Manual Revision 1

Code Definition Scope

UPG Upgrade Describes update procedures.

Service Manual Revision 1

AET Application Entity Title